HCIA-LTE Training Material V1.0 PDF

Recommendations
 Huawei Learning Website

 http://learning.huawei.com/en
 Huawei e-Learning
 http://support.huawei.com/learning/NavigationAction!createNavi?navId=MW
n
000001_term1000025144&lang=en it o
i c a
 Huawei Certification if
r t
Ce
http://support.huawei.com/learning/NavigationAction!createNavi?navId=_31
&

&lang=en g
n in
 Find Training
rai
i T

e
http://support.huawei.com/learning/NavigationAction!createNavi?navId=_trai
a w
ningsearch&lang=en
Hu
More Information n
it o
ic a
t i f
 Huawei learning APP e r
C
&
i ng
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
版权所有© 2018 华为技术有限公司

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu
Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Mobile networks have been evolving for many H
u
years. The initial systems, which are
referred to as “First Generation” were launched commercially at the end of the 1980’s. the
o n and roaming saw these replaced with “Second

tiGeneration”
pressure for greater capacity, more security
a
Generation”, and more recently “Third solutions. Today, the growth in mobile
ic
broadband has promoted the development of 4G or “Fourth Generation” systems.
1 Generation mobile systemsifused analogue modulation techniques. These analogue
rt based on Frequency Modulation. For this reason, they all

st
C e
systems were proprietary, and
lacked security, any meaningful data service or international roaming capability. The main
&
commercial systems deployed around the world included AMPS, TACS and ETACS.
 AMPS g
n AMPS system appeared in 1976 in the USA. From its initial commercial
Theifirst

n
i it was mainly implemented in the America, Russia and Asia. Various issues
a launch
r including weak security features made the system prone to hacking and handset
T
i cloning.
eTACS
aw

Hu
 The European version of AMPS but with slight modifications including its operation
on different frequency bands. It was mainly used in the UK, as well as part of Asia.
 ETACS
 An improved version of TACS. It enabled a greater number of channels and
therefore facilitated more users.

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The development of GSM, GPRS, EDGE, UMTS,H
u
HSPA and LTE, as well as the strategy for
future mobile networks has been coordinated and planned by the various parties that sit
o n
ti the key Release milestones. These started with
within the 3GPP working groups. This development roadmap is based on a series of
the introduction of GPRS in Releasea97 and chart the evolution of 3GPP networks up to
specification releases. The diagram shows
i f ic
rt
the introduction of LTE and beyond.
 Pre-Release 99
 Pre-Release 99C
e
saw the introduction of GSM, as well as the addition of GPRS. The
main GSM& Phases and 3GPP Releases include:
i
ngGSM Phase 1.
a in GSM Phase 2.
r

i T  GSM Phase 2+ (Release 96).

e
aw
 GSM Phase 2+ (Release 97).
Hu
GSM Phase 2+ (Release 98).
 3GPP Release 99
 3GPP Release 99 saw the introduction of UMTS, as well as the EDGE enhancement
to GPRS. UMTS contains all the features needed to meet the IMT-2000
requirements as those defined by the ITU. It is able to support CS voice and video
services, as well as PS data services over common and dedicated bearers. Initial
data rates for UMTS were 64kbit/s, 128kbit/s, and 384kbit/s. Note that the
theoretical maximum was 2Mbit/s.

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Heterogeneous Network, or HetNet for short,H
u
stands for the different types of base
WCDMA and LTE) are used together innthe same network to build the good coverage
stations (macro, micro, pico, relay) operating on different technologies (GSM,
t io from their operator. This concept is

a HomoNet for short, that are mainly built with one
and high capacity, that end-users demand
i
contrary to ‘homogeneous’ networks,
c
tif
type of base station, often macro.
r
Ce at the Mobile World Congress (MWC 2013) demonstrated the
 FusionNet
 Huawei in Barcelona
& multi-band,
next generation LTE-B (R12/R13) network architecture FusionNet. It combines
ng user throughput, which really create borderless networks.

multi-system, multi-layer heterogeneous networks, improved 500%
cell iedge
a in core of FusionNet is based on LTE-B techniques (such as multi-flow

The
r aggregation, interference coordination, service adaptation, spectrum efficiency

T
ei carrier aggregation), FusionNet realizes multi-system, multi-band, multi-layer
optimization, etc.). With the existing LTE, LTE-A (such as multi-point coordinate,
a w
u
network of deep integration, to help operators significantly reduce CAPEX and
H OPEX, allowing users to enjoy ultra-broadband, zero-waiting and ubiquitous

connectivity.

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H u PS transmission, lower latency, wider
Technical advantages to 3G: High data throughput,
coverage and downward compatibility
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The LTE network has a flat architecture, which H
u
has the following characteristics:

o n
The RNC is removed from the radio access network. The only NE in the radio
tiremoved from the core network. Voice services are

access network is the NodeB.
 The MSC server and MGW are
provided based on IP. ic
a
f
The PS domain of theticore network adopted an architecture similar to softswitch.

r
e plane from user plane.
C
It separates the control

& including the ID, status, and tracking area of the UE. It manages and
The mobility management entity (MME) stores UE contexts on the control
gplane,
n allocates
i an ID to an UE. The MME also performs functions such as mobility
a in management, authentication, key management, encryption, and integrity
T r protection.
ei  A serving gateway (SGW) provides functions such as paging, information
a w management for a UE in idle state, mobility management, encryption on
u
the user plane, PDCP, SAE bearer control, and encryption and integrity
H 
protection for NAS signaling.
It is an all-IP network.
 The reasons for this design are as follows:
 Too many network layers make it impossible to meet the requirement for low
delay, which is less than 10 ms on the radio network side.
 The all-IP network has the lowest costs because the VoIP technology is already
mature.

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H
All the interfaces within the EPC, and those extending
u to functions outside of the EPC, are
denoted by the letter “S”. These all use the service of IP. Elements supporting LTE
o n include the HSS, PCRF and ePDG. The

RNC and SGSN may also be involved.ti
operation, apart from MME, S-GW and PDN-GW,
HSS (Home Subscriber Server)cisaconsidered to be a “master” database. Although


i i the HSS in practice is made up of several physical

fentity,
t
logically it is considered as one
r number of subscribers and redundancy requirements. The
databases depending on the
HSS holds variables and e
Cidentities for the support, establishment and maintenance of calls
&Charging Rules Function) supports functionality for policy control and
and sessions made by subscribers.
 PCRF (Policy and g
n As such, it provides bearer network control in terms of QoS and the
n i
charging control.
a i of the associated charging vectors.

allocation
T
ePDG r (evolved Packet Data Gateway) is used when connecting to Untrusted Non 3GPP
i

eencapsulating/
IP Access networks. It provides functionality to allocate IP addresses in addition to
a w de-capsulating IPSec and PMIP tunnels.
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 GUTI =GUMMEI + M-TMSI Hu
=(MCC + MNC + MMEI) + M-TMSI
o n
ti
=(MCC + MNC + (MMEGI + MMEC)) + M-TMSI
c
=(MCC + MNC + MMEGI) + S-TMSI
i a

t if
GUMMEI：Globally Unique MME Identifier
r


MMEI：MME Identifier
Ce
MMEGI: MME Group Identifier
&
TMSI: Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity
ng

i
 MMEI=MMEGI + MMEC
n
ai
 S-TMSI=MMEC + M-TMSI
T r
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The eNB hosts the following functions: H u

o n Dynamic allocation of resources to UEs in

Functions for Radio Resource Management: Radio Bearer Control, Radio Admission
ti
Control, Connection Mobility Control,
i a
both uplink and downlink (scheduling);
c encryption of user data stream;

f
i UE attachment when no routing to an MME can be
IP header compression and
Selection of an MMEtat

determined frome
r
C
the information provided by the UE;
Scheduling&
 Routing of User Plane data towards Serving Gateway;
g and transmission of paging messages (originated from the MME);

in and transmission of broadcast information (originated from the MME

Scheduling
n

a i
or O&M);
T r Measurement and measurement reporting configuration for mobility and
ei Scheduling and transmission of PWS (which includes ETWS and CMAS) messages

scheduling;
aw

Hu
(originated from the MME).

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Mobility Management Entity (MME): The MME H
u
manages mobility, UE identities and
security parameters. MME functions includes:
o n
ti
 NAS signalling;
 NAS signalling security;
ic a
AS Security control;
i f
rt for mobility between 3GPP access networks;

e
 Inter CN node signalling

C
Idle mode UE Reachability (including control and execution of paging
&
retransmission);

PDNin
g
Tracking Area list management (for UE in idle and active mode);
n
GW and Serving GW selection;
i

r

aMME selection for handovers with MME change;
i T SGSN selection for handovers to 2G or 3G 3GPP access networks;


e Roaming;
w

u a  Authentication;
H 

Bearer management functions including dedicated bearer establishment;
Support for PWS (which includes ETWS and CMAS) message transmission;
 Optionally performing paging optimisation.

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 For details about SCTP, see RFC2960. Hu
 For details about UDP, see RFC 768.
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H
OFDM has a history of 40 years in application,
uand it is initially used in radio
communications in military.
In 1950s, American military establishednthe first multi-carrier modulation system.

t io subcarriers appeared. However, mass


commercial application did notic

a
In 1970s, the OFDM system with massive
tif of digital communication technologies, IFFT on the

appear due to the system complexity and high costs.

OFDM transmitter side e
r
In 1990s, with the development
and FFT on the OFDM receiver side reduces system
complexity, enabling C
OFDM to be widely used.
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 In traditional FDMA transmission, a channel H
u
is divided into multiple independent sub-
channels to transmit data streams in parallel, and the sub-channels are separated by
o n is simple and direct while the spectral

a group of filters on the receiver. This method
efficiency is low because guard-bands
subcarriers in the OFDM system a
ti are required between sub-channels. However,
i f iccompared with common FDA systems, as shown in
are overlapping and orthogonal, which greatly
rt
improves the spectral efficiency
the preceding figure.
 The orthogonal modulatione
C and demodulation in each sub-channel can be performed
& with the development of large-scale integrated circuit and
using IDFT and DFT. For systems with large N value, FFT can be used. IFFT and
g
FFT are easy to perform
in as shown in the preceding figure.
DSP technologies,
n
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Why CP is needed: Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 How CP is added Hu
o n
ati
ic
r t if
Ce
&
Integrate (FFT) any 64
samples within the
ng
extended period
n i
ai
Base symbol period, Extension, Base symbol period,
r
e.g 64 samples e.g 10 samples e.g 64 samples
T
ei
a w
Hu Extended symbol period, e.g
64+10=74 samples

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Deep fading does not occur simultaneously in H u
all subcarriers due to the frequency
selectivity. Therefore, dynamic bit or subcarrier allocation technology can be used to
utilize the sub-channels with high SNR n
o and improve the system performance.
In a multi-user system, a subcarriertithat is in poor performance for a user probably is

in good performance for another

ic auser. Therefore, a sub-channel is not disabled
r tif adaptive
unless it is in poor performance for all users, which occurs at a low probability. The
average SINR in the C e

single-carrier system performs modulation and coding (AMC) based on the
entire system, while the multi-carrier system performs AMC
&
based on the average SINR in different frequency bands.
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Orthogonality is required because spectrumsH
u
of sub-channels overlap each other.
Frequency offset of radio signals, such as Doppler Shift, can be caused by radio
o
channel change with time. In addition, the n difference between transmitter carrier
a ti incan
frequency and receiver oscillator frequency also cause frequency offset,
i f icsub-channels is generated, deteriorating the BER of

destroying the orthogonality of subcarriers the OFDM system. As a result, inter-
t to the frequency offset is the primary disadvantage of

carrier interference (ICI) among
r
the system. The vulnerability
e
the OFDM system.
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H u system outputs combined signals of
Different from single-carrier systems, multi-carrier
multiple sub-channels. If these signals are in the same phase, the power of combined
signals must be higher than the average
o npower of signals, resulting in a high PAR. To
reduce the high PAR, high linearitytofi the PA in the transmitter is required. If the
dynamic range of the PA cannot a
ic adjust to the signal change, signals are deformed,
changing the spectrum of thefcombined
i
t
signals. As a result, the orthogonality of
r is destroyed, leading to interference and deteriorated
signals in multiple sub-channels
system performance. e
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H
The multiple-access technology is used to distinguish
u users in a system, including
FDMA, TDMA, and CDMA.
o n

it is easy to deploy. However,
FDMA: The first-generation mobile telecommunications uses FDMA, which divides a
frequency into multiple channels and
is limited due to limited frequency
i a
c resources.
the system capacity
f
ti the divides
 TDMA: Based on FDMA, TDMA
and time domain, increasing e r system
each frequency in both the frequency domain
capacity and improving the spectral
efficiency. C
&
CDMA: CDMA distinguishes users based on the frequency, time, and code. In this
ninginterference

way, the system capacity is further improved. However, CDMA has a high
requirement
n i resistance technology.
i
a of capacity, the capacity of a TDMA system is four to six times as large as
that r
 In terms
i Tlarge as that of an FDMA system.

of an FDMA system while the capacity of a CDMA system is ten to twenty times
eThe system capacity is closely related to the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR), which
as
a w

Hu refers to a ratio of the strength of a carrier signal to the strength of an interfering

signal in a radio channel. If a large CIR is required, the interference resistance of the
system is weak, and the system capacity is small.
 In terms of deployment, FDMA is the easiest one while CDMA is the most
complicated one.
 Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiple Access (OFDMA) is a multi-user version of
the orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing (OFDM) digital modulation scheme. As
shown in the figure, a bandwidth is divided into smaller units, that is, subcarrier.
These subcarriers are grouped and allocated to UE. The UE can be allocated with
different resources in both the time domain and frequency domain.

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Compared with CDMA, OFDMA has the following Hu advantages:

o n
Effectively eliminating multipath interference in radio communications by
ti multiplexing between users with an

using cyclic prefixes
ic a
Achieving orthogonal frequency
f

i
t MIMO Technology
ensured spectral efficiency
rand
 Combining OFDM
C e

&
Supporting frequency link adaptation and multi-user scheduling
g
OFDMA is a multiple-access modulation scheme based on resources in the
inand the domains.

time and frequency The smallest resource in the frequency domain is

i
subcarriersn smallest unit in the time domain is slot. For scheduling, the
a
rin time
smallest unit is RB, which occupies 12 subcarriers in frequency domain, and
i
1msT domain.
e
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Compared with OFDMA, SC_FDMA has the H
u
following advantages:

o n
Lower PAPR, facilitating the design of UE PAs
 Achieving orthogonal frequency
a ti multiplexing between users with an ensured
spectral efficiency
i f ibyc using DFT and orthogonal subcarrier mapping

e rt
Achieving multiplexing

C
Supporting frequency link adaptation and multi-user scheduling
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The figure shows the SC-FDMA subcarrier mapping H uconcept. The basic transmitter and
receiver architecture is very similar (nearly identical) to OFDM, and it offers the same
o n because the underlying waveform is

tilower.
degree of multipath protection. Importantly,
a
essentially a single carrier, the PAPR is
In the figure, the SC-FDMA signalcgeneration process starts by creating a time domain
waveform of data symbols to ibe fi transmitted. This is then converted into the frequency

t
r Fourier Transform). DFT length and sampling rate are
e
domain, using a DFT (Discrete
C is fully represented, as well as being spaced 15kHz apart. Each
chosen so that the signal
symbol. Next the &

subcarrier will have its own fixed amplitude and phase for the duration of the SC-FDMA
g signal is shifted to the desired place in the channel bandwidth using the
n inconcept,
zero insertion i.e. subcarrier mapping. The signal is then converted to a single
a i Finally a cyclic prefix can be added. Note that additional functions such as S-P
carrier waveform using an IDFT (Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform) in addition to other
r to Parallel) and P-S (Parallel to Serial) converters are also required as part of a
functions.
T
i
(Serial
edetailed functional description.
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H
The figure illustrates the concept of the DFT, such
uthat a group of N symbols map to N
subcarriers. However depending on the combination of the N symbols into the DFT, the
o n and phase of the N subcarriers is more like

ti
output will vary. As such, the actual amplitude
a
a “code word”.
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H
At the eNodeB, the receiver takes the N subcarriers
uand reverses the process. This is
achieved using an IDFT (Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform) which effectively reproduces
o n the basic view of how the subcarriers received

ti the original signals. Note that the SC-FDMA
the original N symbols. The figure illustrates
symbols have a constant amplitudeaand phase, and like OFDMA, a CP is still required.
at the eNodeB are converted back into
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H
Each 10 ms radio frame consists of two half-frames
uof 5 ms each. Each half-frame consists
of eight slots of length 0.5 ms and three special fields: DwPTS, GP and UpPTS
o n
i
(DwPTS+GP+UpPTS=1ms).
GP is reserved for downlink to uplinkttransition.

downlink or uplink transmission. c a Other Subframes are assigned for either
t i fi are separated in the time domain.


e r
Uplink and downlink transmissions
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 f=7.5kHz is available for MBSFN（MBMS overH
u
Single Frequency Network），which
n
defined in 3GPP Protocol 8 but applied until 3GPP Protocol9. Attention:7.5kHz is only
o
ti
adapted for downlink.
ic a
i f
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 RE (Resource Element) Hu
 Minimum unit in physical resource
o n
ti
 Time domain: 1 OFDM Symbol, frequency domain: 1 Subcarrier
 RB（Resource Block）
ic a

t if
Minimum unit for resource allocation used for data transmission in physical lay
r


Ce
Time domain: 1 Slot; frequency domain: 12 continuous subcarriers
CCE(Control Channel Element)
&
Resource unit for control channel
ng

i
 1 CCE = 36 REs
n
ai
 1 CCE = 9 REGs (1 REG = 4 REs)

T r
TTI (Transmission Time Interval)
ei
 Basic unit in time domain when scheduling data in physical lay
a w  1 TTI = 1 subframe = 2 slots
Hu 

1 TTI = 14 OFDM symbols(Normal CP)
1 TTI = 12 OFDM symbols (Extended CP)

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The concept of “channels” is not new. Both GSM H uand UMTS defined various channel
categories, and the terminology of channels for LTE is closer to UMTS. Broadly there are
o n channels, transport channels, physical

ti
four categories of channels, which are logical
a
channels and radio channels.
f ic as logical channels. Logical channels define the type

RLC layer passes data to MAC layers
tithe logical channel data to PHY layer as transport channel.

of information to be transferred.
r
Cehow and in which format the information is transferred.
 MAC layer formats and sends
Transport channels define
& the transport channel data to physical channels. Physical channels
Physical layer encodes
g resource for information to be transferred between air interface.

n
define the physical
i

a incarriers for FDD or TDD operation.

The term “radio channel” is typically used to describe the overall channel, i.e. the downlink
r
and uplink
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The physical layer facilitates transportation of MAC
H utransport channels, as well as providing
scheduling, formatting and control indicators.
PBCH (Physical Broadcast Channel): the coded
o n is blindly
BCH transport block is mapped to 4 sub-
isub-frame is assumed

a t
frames within a 40ms interval. 40ms timing detected, i.e. there is no explicit
fic
signaling indicating 40ms timing. Each to be self-decodable, i.e. the
BCH can be decoded from a single
i
conditions. PBCH uses QPSKtmodulation.
reception, assuming sufficiently good channel
r Indicator Channel): used to indicate the number of OFDM
PCFICH (Physical Control e
C PCFICH uses QPSK modulation.
 Format
symbols used for PDCCH.
&and HARQ
PDCCH (Physical Downlink Control Channel): informs the UE about the resource allocation
ng PDCCH uses QPSK modulation.


of PCH and DL-SCH, information related to DL-SCH, carries the uplink
scheduling igrant.
i n Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel): carriers HARQ ACK/NACKs in response to

a
PHICH (Physical
r transmission. PHICH uses QPSK modulation.
T
uplink
i 16QAM,
eQPSK,
 PDSCH (Physical Downlink Shared Channel): carries the DL-SCH and PCH. PDSCH can use
w
and 64QAM modulation.
u a  PRACH (Physical Random Access Channel): carries the random access preamble, which are
H
generated from ZC sequences with zero correlation zone, generated from one or several
root ZC sequences. The location of PRACH is defined by higher layer signalling.
 PUCCH (Physical Uplink Control Channel): carries HARQ ACK/NACKs in response to
downlink transmission, scheduling request, CQI reports. PUCCH uses BPSK and QPSK
modulation.
 PUSCH (Physical Uplink Shared Channel): carries the UL-SCH, carries both signalling and
user data, in addition to UL control information. UE is not allowed to transmit the PUCCH
and PUSCH at the same time. PUSCH can use QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM modulation.

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Downlink physical channels PCFICH, PHICH andH
u
PDCCH and uplink physical channel PUCCH
carry physical layer and MAC layer control information. Higher layer information is not
o n is mapped to these physical channels.

ti
carried by these channels. No transport channel
ic a
i f
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 As an example, the applications of the channelsH
u
in a complete network access procedure
are as follows:
o n

it synchronization
The UE obtains the PCI and gets synchronized with the eNodeB in the downlink on
i a
the P-SCH and S-SCH. The downlink
c synchronization.
includes frame
f
synchronization and symbol

on the PBCH ande rti SIBs are dynamically

The UE gets system information
other
on the PDSCH. MIB and SIB1 are always scheduled
scheduled on PDSCHs.
PeriodsC
the&
 and listening windows of other SIBs are broadcast in SIB1. After
ginitiates the random access on the PRACH and gets synchronized with the
UE receives SIB1, it knows the other SIBs to be received later.
i
The UE n
n in the uplink.

aiAfter
eNodeB
T r
 random access, the UE requests uplink scheduling on the PUCCH.
ei PDCCH to get information about the PUSCH and PDSCH. Then, the UE sends data
 If there is uplink or downlink data to be transmitted, the UE needs to listen to the
a w
u
on the PUSCH and receives data on the PDSCH.

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H
The downlink reference signals consist of known
u
reference symbols inserted in the first
and third last OFDM symbol of each slot. There is one reference signal transmitted per
o n antenna ports equals 1, 2, or 4.

ti
downlink antenna port. The number of downlink
ic a
i f
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 A UE considers an E-UTRAN cell as a suitable cell H u
only when the measured RSRP and
reference signal received quality (RSRQ) values of the cell are greater than the receive (RX)
o n quality threshold (QqualMin) for the cell,

ti
level threshold (Qrxlevmin) and the RX signal
a
respectively.
An E-UTRAN cell becomes a suitable
f ic cell when both the following conditions are met:
Srxlev > 0 Squal > 0ti

e r - (Qrxlevmin + Qrxlevminoffset) – Pcompensation

C - (QQualMin + QQualMinOffset)
 Srxlev = Qrxlevmeas
&
 Squal = Qqualmeas
Parameter
n g Description
Qrxlevmeas
i ni Measured RSRP value
Qrxlevmin a
T r Minimal Required Rx level (dBm) in SIB1
e i
Qrxlevminoffset Offset to Qrxlevmin, relative with PLMN priority. QrxlevminOffset is only applied when a
a w cell is evaluated for cell selection as a result of a periodic search for a higher priority
u
PLMN while camped normally in a VPLMN in SIB1
H Pcompensation max (PMaximum allowed power – PUE MAX Output Power, 0), where PMaximum allowed power is sent in SIB1
Qqualmeas measured RX signal quality (RSRQ value) of the cell, expressed in units of dB.
Qqualmin Minimal required signal quality
QqualMinOffset Offset to Qqualmin, relative with PLMN priority. QqualMinOffset is only applied when a
cell is evaluated for cell reselection as a result of a periodic search for a higher priority
PLMN while camped normally in a VPLMN in SIB1

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The effective way to increase capacity is to useH
u
multi-antenna technology when the SINR is
high. Multi-antenna technology can make better use of spatial resource, it can increase
o n
ti
transmission capacity of a wireless communication system without increasing the transmit
a
power and bandwidth.
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H u techniques can be used:
According to different purposes, different multi-antenna

o n on different antennas should have a low

Diversity mode. Multiple antennas can be used to provide diversity to resist fading
ti
of radio channels. In this case, fading
correlation.
i a
cdata on different antennas

f
ti can indirectly increase the capacity
Transmit the same

r
Diversity mode
e receiving antennas may be less than the number of transmitting

C
Number of
&
antennas
g
Spatial multiplexing. Transmitter and receiver using two or more antennas, spatial
in can be performed.

n
multiplexing
a i Transmit the different data on different antennas

r

i T  Diversity mode can directly increase the capacity

e Number of receiving antennas is not less than the number of transmitting
w

u a antennas
H
 Beamforming. Multi-antenna can perform beamforming, such as the maximizing
objective of the antenna gain in the specified direction or suppress specific main
interference signal. According to the correlation between different antennas,
system can adopt different beamforming methods.
 The data are weighted and sent by transmitter, forming narrow transmit
beamforming energy and aim at the target user, thereby improving
demodulation SINR of the target user and reducing the interference of
non-target users.

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 MIMO can better use space resource and improves H uspectrum efficiency, so the signal
obtain array gain, diversity gain, multiplexing gain and interference cancellation gain,
o n and user throughput.

ti
which can improves system capacity, coverage
ic a
i f
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 SISO（Single input single output）
 SISO is the basic radio channel access mode, it is the default method in radio
n
communication system at the beginning.
o
 MISO(Diversity transmitting mode)
ati
ic
MISO, multiple input single output, in other words, it means two or multi-transmitter but
if

t
one receiver. Because the same information transmitted by different antenna, which can
r
enhance the robustness against fading and improve the transmission performance in low
e
C
SNR scenarios. It can be used at the same rate with lower transmission power but cannot
&
improves the transmission rate.
ng
 SIMO(Diversity receiving mode)

n i
SIMO is opposition with MISO. SIMO means single input multiple output, namely two or
ai
more receivers but one transmitters, usually refers to the receive diversity. SIMO is similar
T r to transmit diversity which is particularly suitable for low SNR scenarios. In this scenario, if
ei
you use dual receiver, in theory, the gain will be 3dB. Compared with transmit diversity,
the cell edge coverage has improved because the SNR has improved when using receive
a w diversity.
Hu  MIMO（Multiple input multiple output）

 MIMO, two or more receivers and two or more transmitters. This model is not only the
simple sum of SIMO and MISO, because multiple data streams are simultaneously
transmitted in frequency domain and time domain to fully utilize the radio channel in
different paths. For MIMO system, the number of multiple receivers must be at least
equal to transmit data stream. (Notes: Number of transmit data stream may be unequal
to number of transmit antenna).

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 In previous slide, the transmitter and receiver are not specified to be belonged to one base
station/one UE or more, so we have different scenarios in this page.

o n
The purpose of the pre-coding is based on the optimal transmission characteristics of the
ti
channel, so that when the signal is received, it can more easily be separated and then restored to
a
the original data stream.
ic
if
 The intention of SU-MIMO is to increase the rate of a single user, which would also enhance the
t
capacity of the cell. The figure shows that two different data streams are assigned to the same
r
e
UE. SU-MIMO can be used for uplink or downlink.

C
The second scenario is multi-user MIMO(MU-MIMO), which is just implemented in uplink
&
nowadays. MU-MIMO can’t increase the rate of a single user, but can enhance cell capacity gain,
ng
it is similar to SU-MIMO or better. The figure shows that two data streams come from different
i
UEs, and there is not physical connection between two transmitters, which means no chance to
n
mix two data flows to optimize channel coding. However, the spatial separation method
ai
improves the opportunity for eNodeB to collect irrelevance channel of UE. Thus, compared to the
r
T
pre-encoded SU-MIMO, it maximizes the possible capacity gain. Another advantage of MU-
ei
MIMO is the UE doesn’t raise the power of the transmitter, but the cell capacity stills can
improve.
a w The third scenarios is Co-MIMO, the essence of this mode is the end point of two transmitters
u

have been associated. The figure shows that in DL scenario, through sharing data stream and
H pre-coding spatial separate antenna cooperation, two eNodeBs can better communicate with at
least one UE. This is the best methods in the cell edge, where the SINR will suffer but the radio
channel is non-related, so it will potential enhance the system coverage. Co-MIMO can also be
used in the uplink by theory, but it is difficult to be applied because there is no physical
connection between UE. That’s why Co-MIMO pre-coding is not used in MU-MIMO uplink.
Uplink Co-MIMO also names virtual MIMO. There is no Co-MIMO defined in 3GPP R8 protocol, it
will be studied and achieved in 3GPP R9/R10, to satisfy the requirement of IMT-Advance 4G.

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H u information, suitable for low speed
Closed-loop: Need the UE feedback encoder selection
scenarios.
o nselection information, determine by eNodeB,

suitable for high speed scenarios. ti
 Open-loop: No need UE feedback encoder
ic a
r tif
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H
Array gain: MIMO system uses the signal correlation
u and noise non-correlation on each
antenna, improves the average SINR of the combined signal, and obtains the performance
o n
i channel fading of the effect of performance,
gain.
Diversity gain: MIMO system against tthe

i a
c on signal
f
reduce the fading range of combined and obtain performance gain base on the
rti of same bandwidth and same total transmission power,

signal deep fading non-correlation each antenna.
Multiplexing gain: On theepremise
increase the number ofCspatial channel(Increase the number of antennas) and obtain

throughput gain. &


i ngantenna interference
Interference cancellation gain: Make use of IRC(Interference Rejection Combining) and the
i n
other multiple rejection algorithms, obtain the gain on interference
a
scenarios.
r
i T
e
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The BTS3900(A) LTE is a compact indoor / outdoorHumacro eNB providing the following
features:
o n
t
The BBU3900 and LRFU are installed i in the BTS3900 LTE in a centralized mode which
a

ic
helps to reduce the cost of maintenance on the tower.
if and compact in size yet provides excellent scalability
The BTS3900 LTE is lowtweight
r
e installation of two BTS3900s.

C
in that it supports stack

& space and facilitates smooth technology evolution.
The BTS3900 family (LTE, UMTS and GSM) can share one indoor macro cabinet which
g
in
saves installation
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

Hu easy installation and low power
The DBS3900 LTE is characterized by its small footprint,
n
consumption thus enabling it to be installed in the spare space at an existing cell site. The
RRU is also compact and light allowingio
a tcoverage. Thus the DBS3900 LTE enables service
it to be installed close to the antenna to reduce
c
providers to efficiently deployiafihigh performance LTE network with a low TCO (Total Cost
feeder loss and thus improve system
e
of Ownership) by minimizing rtthe investment in power, space and manpower.
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H u the eNodeB, locally locate faults,
The eNodeB LMT is mainly used to help Commissioning
and clear faults.
o nthrough the LMT in the following scenarios:

ti the eNodeB and the M2000 is unavailable, you
 You can operate and maintain the eNodeB

i a
When the transmission between
c through the LMT.
f
ti between the eNodeB and the M2000 fails, you can
can Commissioning the eNodeB

r
When the communication
e through the LMT.
C
locate and clear faults
& you can locate and clear faults through the LMT.
 When alarms are generated on the eNodeB and related boards need to be
g
replaced locally,
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE System Overview
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

MBTS GUL V100R013 Product Description
n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu BSC nodes, and the transport
The RAN physical layer consists of BTS nodes,
network that connects BTS and BSC nodes.
o n
t i and application platform for a base station
a Service, and eNodeB Service. BTS nodes are
 BTS Node: provides the infrastructure
ic
classified into single-modeifmulti-mode base stations based on the types and
to deploy GBTS Service, NodeB
e rt
C
quantity of services deployed.

& forwards data between BTS nodes and BSC nodes, between
BSC Node: provides GBSC Service or RNC Service.
g
in and the operation and maintenance center (OMC). Multiple modes
 Transport network:
n
i one transport network or use an independent transport network.
BTS nodes
cana
T r share
e

i transmission scheme supported by each mode is as follows:
The
a w  GSM: TDM and IP transmission
Hu
 UMTS: ATM and IP transmission
 LTE: IP transmission

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H u
The RAN logical layer is classified into the GBSS, UTRAN, and E-UTRAN according to protocols
n of base stations include GBTS Service,

used by each network. The RAN logical layer consists of logical functions implemented on base
o
tifor GSM
stations and base station controllers. Logical functions
a
NodeB Service, and eNodeB Service. Logical functions of base station controllers include GBSC
universal terrestrial radio accessif

Service and RNC Service. GBSS is short
ic base station system, UTRAN is short for
r t network, and E-UTRAN is short for evolved universal terrestrial


radio access network.
GBTS Service: performs C e
logical functions of GSM base stations and is controlled by the GBSC
&
Service. These functions are radio channel management, physical layer protocol processing, and
g
in and communicates with the MS through the Um interface.
signaling procedure processing. The GBTS Service communicates with the GBSC Service through
n
the Abis interface
GBSC iService: provides logical functions of GSM base station controllers. These functions are

r aresource management, base station management, mobility management, and access control.
T
ei NodeB
radio
 Service: performs logical functions of WCDMA base stations and is controlled by the RNC
a w Service. These functions are radio channel management, physical layer protocol processing, and
Hu
signaling procedure processing. The NodeB Service communicates with the RNC Service through
the Iub interface and communicates with the UE through the Uu interface.
 RNC Service: performs logical functions of WCDMA base station controllers. These functions are
radio resource management, base station management, mobility management, and access control.
The RNC Service communicates with each other through the Iur interface.
 eNodeB Service: performs logical functions of LTE base stations. These functions are radio
resource management, radio channel management, mobility management, physical layer protocol
processing, signaling procedure processing, and access control. The LTE FDD single-mode, LTE
TDD single-mode, and LTE FDD and LTE TDD (LT) dual-mode are supported. The eNodeB Service

communicates with the MME/S-GW through the S1 interface, communicates with other eNodeB
Service through the X2 interface, and communicates with the UE through the Uu interface.
n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
a ti
ic
r tif
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu
Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without

Permission
n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
BTS CTL subsystem: BTS control
Husubsystem: BTS transport subsystem
BTS TRP
onBTS RF subsystem: BTS radio frequency

subsystem
BTS BB subsystem: BTS baseband

t i
a
subsystem subsystem
BTS TAS subsystem: BTS clock c
t i fi BTS MPE subsystem: BTS power and
r
subsystem environment monitoring

C e
The BTS subsystems include the control subsystem, transport subsystem, baseband subsystem, radio
frequency (RF) subsystem, clock subsystem, and power and environment monitoring subsystem.
&
BTS CTL subsystem: controls and manages resources in a base station. This subsystem provides the
g

in
management plane interface between the base station and the OMC, the control plane interface between the
base station and other NEs, and the interface for controlling and negotiating common devices in a multimode
i n
base station.

r a
BTS TRP subsystem: forwards data between the transport network and the base station. This subsystem
i T
provides physical ports between the base station and the transport network, and the user plane interface
e
between the base station and other NEs.
w
 BTS BB subsystem: processes uplink and downlink baseband data. The UMTS mode supports the baseband
a
resource pool.
Hu
 BTS RF subsystem: receives and transmits radio signals. This subsystem provides ports to connect the base
station and antenna system. The baseband subsystem is connected to the RF subsystem through CPRI ports.
CPRI links support the star, chain, ring, and dual-star topologies.
 BTS TAS subsystem: synchronizes the base station clock with external clock sources. This subsystem
provides ports to connect the base station clock to external clock sources. For details about time management,
see Time Management. Multiple modes can share one clock or use an independent clock.
 BTS MPE subsystem: provides power supply, dissipates heat, and monitors the environment for a base station.
This subsystem provides ports to connect the base station and site devices.

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu each carrier can be configured
If GSM is configured with 72 carriers (G24/24/24),
n carrier can be configured three

with one Standalone Dedicated Control Channel (SDCCH) only; if GSM is
o
a ti
configured with 24 carriers (G8/8/8), each
ic network is configured with three cells and each

SDCCHs.
i f
rt
 GA/A/A indicates that the GSM
cell has A TRX
C e

&
B x C indicates that the UMTS network is configured with B cells and each cell
g
inindicates that the LTE network is configured with D cells and each cell
has C carrier.

i
D x E MHz
n
r a
is configured with E MHz bandwidth.
e iT
a w
Hu

Permission
n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

Permission
n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu each TRX can be configured with
If GSM is configured with 48 TRXs (S16/16/16),
with 24 TRXs (S8/8/8), each TRX ican o nbe configured three SDCCHs.
one Standalone Dedicated Control Channel (SDCCH) only; if GSM is configured
a t
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

Permission
n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

Permission
n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
H u
 BBU consists of the following subsystems: baseband subsystem, power and mechanical
n
tio These subsystem consist of different modules.
subsystem, transmission subsystem, interconnection subsystem, main control subsystem,
monitoring subsystem, and clock subsystem.
The baseband subsystem consistsaof the baseband processing unit.
f c of the backplane, fan, and power modules.
iconsists
t i
The transmission r
 The cabinet subsystem

transmission C
e subsystem consists of the main control transmission unit and
extension unit.
& (a)
g interconnection unit.
 The interconnection subsystem consists of the main control transmission unit and
i n
infrastructure
i nThe main control subsystem consists of the main control transmission unit.
a The monitoring subsystem consists of the power module and monitoring unit.

r
T The clock subsystem consists of the main control transmission unit and satellite card

ei

a w and clock unit.
Hu
 The BBU performs the following functions:
 Provides ports to connect to the transmission equipment, RF modules, USB
devices(a), external reference clock, and LMT or U2000 to provide signal
transmission, perform automatic software upgrade, receive reference clock, and
support BBU maintenance on the LMT or U2000.
 Manages the entire base station system, including the processing of uplink and
downlink data, signaling processing, resource management, and operation and
maintenance.

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Input power specifications of the BBU: Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
 The BBU3900 and C
e
BBU3910 have the same size and weight, as provided in the
following table.&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu  The following table lists the heat dissipation capability of the BBU.

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
o n
ati
ic
rt if

e
C of a BBU3910A.
Dimensions and weight
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu
 Heat dissipation capabilities of a BBU3910A.

n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The BBU3910A is a multimode digital unit H
u
that processes signals of a base station.
 Function
o n
The BBU3910A performstthe i following functions in a base station:
a

f ic to the transmission equipment, RF modules,

ti reference clock, and LMT or U2000 to provide
Provides ports for connecting
r
a
USB devices , external
C e perform automatic software upgrade, receive

signal transmission,
&the entire base station system. The management involves the

reference clock, and support BBU maintenance on the LMT or U2000.
g
in
 Manages
i n
processing of uplink and downlink data, signaling processing, resource
r a management, and operation and maintenance.

e iT
a w
Hu

n
a tio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Item Silkscreen Connector
H u
Description
n
(1) Ports on HEI0 QSFP connector Reserved (for interconnection between BBU3910As)
cavity panel CPRI0 to CPRI5 SFP connector ioData transmission ports connecting the BBU to RF modules.
the cabling HEI1 QSFP connector Reserved (for interconnection between BBU3910As)
a t They support the input and output of optical transmission

i f ic signals.
r tconnector Input port for -48 V DC power supplied to the BBU3910A
e
NEG(-) EPC4
RTN(+)
CRJ45 connector GE electrical signal transmission port
(2) Ports on GE0
& SFP connector GE optical signal transmission port
g
the bottom GE1
DBGn
i
panel USB connector •Used for the software upgrade of a base station using a USB
i n flash drive.
r a •Used as a local maintenance port when connecting to a WLAN

T
ei
adapter.
•Port for clock signal outputs. The clock signals are used for
a w testing.
u
RJ45 connector Commissioning port, which connects to the LMT for
H EXT_ALM DB15 female

commissioning base stations
Port for monitoring environmental alarms
connector
E1/T1 DB26 female E1/T1 signal transmission port
connector
GPS Type N female GPS port for forwarding RF signals from the antenna to the
connector satellite card
(3) Indicators -
Indicators

Permission
n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
o n
ati
ic
rt if

e
C of a BBU3910C:
Dimensions and weight
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 A G[U*L] base station is configured with one
u which works in triple-mode.
HBBU,
n and the other (UMPT) works in UMTS and
The BBU is configured with two main control boards, in which one (GTMU or
o
GTMUb/GTMUc) works in GSM mode,
a ti
ic in GSM mode are required, ensure that at least
LTE dual-mode.
i f
rt (UBBPd_G, UBRI, or UBRIb) is installed in slot 1, slot
 If two or more baseband boards
C e
one of the baseband board
&
2, or slot 3.
g
in
 The UBBP_G installed in slot 4 can not be connected CPRI cables in a GBTS.
i n
r a
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 A G*U*L base station is configured with one
u which supports triple modes
HBBU,
using one UMPT.
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The baseband processing board in UMTS H
u
mode configured in any slots can be
connected CPRI cables.
o n
BBU3910 only can be installed in iVer.D

t
acan be installed in BBU3910.
cabinet, only UMPT, UBBP, UTRPc,
ic
tif
UTRPa, UBRIb, USCU boards
r
Ce
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu unit (UMPT) can be installed in a
The universal main processing and transmission
BBU3900 or BBU3910.
o n
t i is used for the software upgrade of a base
aBus (USB) storage device. This port also functions
 The USB port with the USB silkscreen
ic
tif port.
station using a Universal Serial
r
as a commissioning Ethernet

C e as a commissioning Ethernet port, ensure that an
When the USB port functions
&
OM port has been opened and the user has obtained required authorities for
g
in USB port.
accessing the base station through the OM port before accessing the base station
n
i used for local maintenance connects the USB port on the UMPT to an
through the
a
Tr cable during local maintenance. The adapter used for local maintenance
 An adapter
ei has a USB connector at one end and an Ethernet connector at the other end.
Ethernet
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

Permission
n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

Permission
n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
uthe UMPTa1 have this indicator
status: ACT -> Green -> Blinking (on for 1sH
 Only the UMPTb1 working in UMTS mode and
and off for 1s).
Only the UMPTb1 working in LTE mode
o n and the UMPTa2 and UMPTa6 have this
i every 4s, the indicator is on for 0.125s and off

indicator status: ACT -> Green ->tIn

a
for 0.125s (eight times) in thecfirst 2s and then off for 2s.
t i fi

e r
All cells configured in the subrack that houses this board are not activated.
 The S1 link Cis faulty.
Ports on the UMPT& panel:
ng

i
a in
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu
The DIP switches perform the following functions:
o n
SW1 is used to select E1/T1 mode.
ti mode of E1/T1 transmission.


a
 SW2 is used to select grounding
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu can be configured in either a
The universal baseband processing unit (UBBP)
BBU3900 or a BBU3910.
UBBP can be configured in slots 0io
n

a t to 5.
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Specifications of UBBP boards working in H
u
UMTS mode:
o
Number of Uplink CE iDownlink
n
Board
a t Number of Number of Number of
Cells
f ic CE HSDPA HSDPA HSUPA
rt i Codes UEs UEs

UBBPd1
UBBPd2
6
6
e
384
C 512
512
768
6x15
6x15
288
384
288
384
& 384
UBBPd3 6
g 512 6x15 288 288
UBBPd4
n i6n 512 768 6x15 384 384
a i 6
UBBPd5
r
T 12
768 768 6x15 512 512
e i
UBBPd6 1024 1024 12x15 768 768
a w
H u

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

Permission
n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

Permission
n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

Permission
n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w

Huis an extension transmission. The
The universal transmission processing unit (UTRP)
n
UTRPc can be installed in a BBU3900 or BBU3910 and other types of UTRP boards can
o
ti
only be installed in a BBU3900.

ic
UTRP2 panel (with two optical ports) a
i f
e rt
C (supporting eight channels of E1/T1 signals)
&
 UTRP3 or UTRP4 panel
g
n in
a i panel (supporting one channel of STM-1 signals)

T r
UTRP6
e i
a w
Hu
 UTRP9 panel (with four electrical ports)
 UTRPa panel (supporting eight channels of E1/T1 signals)
 UTRPc panel (with four electrical ports and two optical ports)

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

Permission
n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
H u
The universal baseband radio interface unit (UBRI) can only be installed in a
n radio interface board type b (UBRIb)

i o
BBU3900. However, the universal baseband
can be installed in a BBU3900 ortBBU3910.
The UBRIb receives CPRI f
a
ic in single-mode or multimode base stations.

i
rtsingle mode in separate-MPT base stations.
signals
 The UBRIb only supports
e
CUBRI and UBRIb:
&
 Specifications of the
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
H u
The universal inter-connection infrastructure unit (UCIU) can be installed in a
n

BBU3900.
ti o
 Ports on the UCIU:
ic a
i f
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
H u
 The universal satellite card and clock unit (USCU) can be installed in a BBU3900
or BBU3910.
o n
The USCU performs the followingtifunctions:
aports for communicating with the RGPS (for

ic
tifon the reused customer equipment) and BITS
 The USCUb11 provides
r
Ce not support GPS signals.
example, the RGPS
equipment. It does
& does not support RGPS signals. It contains a UBLOX

The USCUb14
g card.

i n
satellite

a inThe USCUb22 does not support RGPS signals. It uses a Naviors satellite
T r card, which must be purchased locally and installed onsite.

e  i Specifications of the USCU:
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The FAN is a fan module in a BBU3900. The HuFAN or FANc can only be installed in
The FAN panel has no silkscreen. on
a BBU3900 and the FANd can only be installed in a BBU3910.
ti

 a
icsilkscreen.
The FANc panel has a FANc silkscreen.
i f
rt
 The FANd panel has a FANd
The FANe panel has e

C a FANe silkscreen.

&
Indicator on the FAN panel:
g
nin
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The universal power and environment interface H u unit (UPEU) is a power module in
but other types of UPEU can only be n
a BBU3900 or BBU3910. The UPEUd can be installed in a BBU3900 or BBU3910,
ti o installed in a BBU3900.
ic a
i f
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Indicator on the UPEU panel:
Hu
n

ti o
ic a
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Ports on the UPEU panel: Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu is a environment monitoring unit
The universal environment interface unit (UEIU)
in a BBU3900 or BBU3910.
o n
 Ports on the UEIU panel:
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w

Hu to the main control unit.
The UEIU transmits monitoring and alarm signals

o n
The BBU provides a maximum of 2 RS485 buses and 16 routes of Boolean signal
inputs.
a ti bus 0 and of those on RS485 bus 1 cannot

i f ic
The positions of modules on RS485
rt and the settings of their Dual In-line Package (DIP)

be changed.

e
C the two PMUs cannot be connected to the same bus.
If two PMUs are configured
switches are the same,
RS485 bus 0 is&

g indicated by bus0. RS485 bus 1 is indicated by bus1.
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w

u
Monitoring signal cables in a BTS3900 (-48HV DC):
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 HuDC):
Monitoring signal cables in a BTS3900A (-48V
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 HuV DC):
Monitoring signal cables in a BTS3900L (-48
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 HuDC):
Monitoring signal cables in a DBS3900 (-48V
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

BTS5900 V100R013 Product Description
n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 This page only lists the typical modules, forH
u
the details，please refer to RFU
n
Hardware Description, RRU Hardware Description and AAU Hardware
o
Description.
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

Permission
n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

Permission
n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 The RRU/RFU consists of the high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier, duplexer,
extension ports, and power module.
n
 The RRU performs the following functions:

ti o
Receives downlink baseband data from the BBU and sends uplink baseband data to the BBU.
a
 Receives RF signals from the antenna system, down-converts the signals to intermediate frequency
ic
(IF) signals, amplifies the IF signals, and performs analog-to-digital conversion. The transmit (TX)
if
channel filters downlink signals, performs digital-to-analog conversion, and up-converts RF signals to
the TX band.
r t

Ce
Multiplexes receive (RX) and TX signals on the RF channel, which enables these signals to share the
same antenna path. It also filters the RX and TX signals.
&
 Provides a built-in Bias Tee (BT). The built-in BT couples RF signals and OOK signals and transmits
ng
them through the TX/RX port A. The built-in BT also supplies power to the tower mounted amplifier
(TMA).
i ni
 An RFU performs the following functions:
ra
 Performs digital up-convert on intermediate frequency (IF) signals on the transmitting channel, and
T
modulates baseband signals to RF signals. After being filtered and amplified, the RF signals are sent
i
by the duplex filter to the antenna.
e Receives RF signals from the antenna system and then down-converts the received signals to IF
w

a
signals. After being amplified, analog-to-digital converted, digital down-converted, matched filtered,
Hu
and digital automatic gain control (DAGC) processed, the IF signals are sent to the BBU for further
processing.
 Controls power.
 Tests the VSWR.
 Manages the TMA power feeding and RET antennas.
 Controls the DPD feedback.
 Generates the CPRI clock, recovers the CPRI clock from out-of-synchronization, and detects alarms.

Permission
n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 An MRFUd performs the following functions: Hu
Performs digital up-convert onnintermediate frequency (IF) signals on the
io

t
a the RF signals are sent by the duplex filter to
transmitting channel, and modulates baseband signals to RF signals. After
ic
tif
being filtered and amplified,
r
the antenna.

C e from the antenna system and then down-converts the
Receives RF signals
&
received signals to IF signals. After being amplified, analog-to-digital
g
in control (DAGC) processed, the IF signals are sent to the BBU for
converted, digital down-converted, matched filtered, and digital automatic
n
i further processing.
gain
a
r Controls power.
i T
e

a w  Tests the VSWR.
Hu
 Manages the TMA power feeding and RET antennas.
 Controls the DPD feedback.
 Generates the CPRI clock, recovers the CPRI clock from out-of-
synchronization, and detects alarms.

n
a tio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Identit
Status Description Hu
n
y
ON
ti o
There is power supply, but the module is faulty or the version is being checked.
OFF
ic a
There is no power supply or the module is faulty.
tif is working.
RUN
r
1s ON, 1s OFF The module
CeThe module is loading software

0.125s ON, 0.125s
OFF
&
ng
Alarms (excluding VSWR alarms) are generated and the module needs to be
ON
i
replaced.
i n
a
Alarms are generated. The alarms may be caused by the faults on the related
r
ALM
1s ON, 1s OFF boards or ports. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before deciding
i TOFF
whether to replace the module.
e
w
No alarm (excluding the VSWR alarm) is generated.
a
Hu
ON The module is functioning properly with TX channels enabled.
ACT
1s ON, 1s OFF The module is functioning properly with TX channels disabled.

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu from SRAN7.0 and supported only
(d) indicates that the configuration is supported
at the 1800 MHz frequency band.
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu from SRAN7.0 and supported only
(d) indicates that the configuration is supported
at the 1800 MHz frequency band.
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu for the MRFUd with a single
This section describes the RF cable connections
sector.
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

.
n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Ports and on the RRU panels: Hu
Item Silkscreen Remarks
o n
RTN(+)
a ti socket
Power supply
f ic supply socket
rtiOptical/electrical port 0, connected to the BBU or an upper-level RRU
(1) Ports in the NEG(-) Power
cabling cavity
Ce
CPRI0
CPRI1 Optical/electrical port 1, connected to a lower-level RRU or the BBU
&
g
TX/RX port A (DIN-type connector), supporting RET signal
ANT_TX/RXA
n
ni
transmission
i
aat the
ANT_RXB RX port B (DIN-type connector)
T r
(2) Ports RX_IN/OUT Interconnection port, used for RRU interconnection
e i
bottom
Alarm monitoring port used for monitoring one RS485 signal and two
w
EXT_ALM
a
dry contact signals
H u RET
Communication port for the RET antenna, supporting RET signal
transmission
RUN
ALM
ACT
(3) Indicators Please see RRU indicators in the next page
VSWR
CPRI0
CPRI1

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Capacity
Hu
n

 GSM: 8 TRXs
ti o
 UMTS: 6 carriers
ic a

r t if The bandwidth per carrier is 1.4/3/5/10/15/20

LTE FDD: 2 carriers.
MHz.
C e
&
 LTE (NB-IoT): 1 carrier
g
nin
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

.
n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Ports and on the RRU panels: Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 Capacity
o n
GSM: 8 TRXsa ti
ic

i f
 UMTS:
ert
 6Ccarriers without MIMO
&4 carriers with MIMO
ng
ni LTE FDD: 2 carriers (The bandwidth per

a i
r

i T carrier is 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15

e
a w MHz, or 20 MHz.)
Hu  LTE NB-IoT: 1 carrier

n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu from SRAN10.1.
(a) indicates that the configuration is supported
RRU5909 supports GSM, UMTS, LTEnFDD, LTE NB-IoT, GU, GL, UL, GM, UM,
iolists typical power configurations in LTE FDD

LM, GLM, ULM, and GUL, here only

t
a configurations, please refer to the Technical
900 MHz, for the other typicalcpower
i
Description.
r tif
Ce
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu for the RRU serving a single
sector.
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
sector.
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
sector.
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Ports Hu
o n
ti
No. Silkscreen Description
(1) CPRI0
c a
Optical port 0 with a maximum data rate of 9.8 Gbit/s for
i
r tif
connecting a BBU.
(2) CPRI1
C e
Optical port 1 with a maximum data rate of 9.8 Gbit/s for
&connecting a BBU.
g
(3) Input
nin Power input port for connecting power equipment.
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Capacity of an AAU5940 working in a single
u
Hfrequency band
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

Permission
n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu power system is required. The
If the external -48V DC input is used, no additional
n the -48V DC to boards and modules in

external -48V DC input is directly connected to the power input terminals on the
o
ti
DCDU-01. Then, the DCDU-01 distributes
a
ic
the cabinet.
i f
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu is installed with the power
If the external +24V DC input is used, the cabinet
n -48V DC to the DCDU-01. Then, the

subrack (DC/DC). The power subrack (DC/DC) converts the external +24V DC
o
input into the -48V DC and supplies
a tito boards and modules in the cabinet.
the
ic
DCDU-01 distributes the -48V DC
i f
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu is installed with the power
If the external 220V DC input is used, the cabinet
n -48V DC to the DCDU-01. Then, the

subrack (AC/DC). The power subrack (AC/DC) converts the external 220V AC
o
input into the -48V DC and supplies
a tito boards and modules in the cabinet.
the
ic
DCDU-01 distributes the -48V DC
i f
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Huprovides -48 V DC power for other
A direct current distribution unit-01 (DCDU-01)
n(Ver.B) cabinet, or RFC (Ver.B).

components in a cabinet. A DCDU-01 is 1 U high and can be installed in a
o
BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet, BTS3900L
a ti on a DCDU-01 panel:

f ic
Ports, terminals, and circuit breakers
i
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu is 1 U high and provides -48 V
A direct current distribution unit-03B (DCDU-03B)
n
DC power for other components. It can be installed in BTS3900(Ver.B),
o
t i
BTS3900L(Ver.B), RFC(Ver.B), TMC11H(Ver.B), IMB03, BTS3900AL(Ver.A), and
OMB cabinets.
ic a

r tifbreakers on a DCDU-03B panel:
Ports, terminals, and circuit
Ce
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 A DCDU-11A is 1 U high and can be installedHuin a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet,
n
BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet, or RFC (Ver.C).
o

a ti
A DCDU-11A has the following functions:
f ic input of 160 A or two -48 V DC inputs of 80 A.

tiDC outputs with a maximum of 25 A for each output.
 Provides one -48 V DC
Provides ten -48rV
Ce to the RFUs and fan assembly in the cabinet.


 Provides power
&and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11A panel:
g
 Terminals, ports,
nin
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 A DCDU-12A is 1 U high and can be installed Huin any of the following cabinets:
o n (Ver.D_B), BTS3900L (Ver.E_B~D),
BTS3900 (Ver.D), BTS3900 (Ver.D_A), BTS3900 (Ver.D_B), BTS3900
(Ver.E_A~D), BTS3900L (Ver.D), iBTS3900L
a t(Ver.D_A1), RFC (Ver.D_A2), RFC (Ver.D_B),
ic (Ver.A), BTS5900L (Ver.A), and BTS3012AE
RFC (Ver.D), RFC (Ver.E), RFC
i f
rt
BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z), BTS5900
(Ver.D_Z).
e
Terminals and portsCon a DCDU-12A panel:
&

g
nin
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hinuan IMS06 subrack or in any of the
A DCDU-12B is 1 U high and can be installed
n RFC (Ver.D), RFC (Ver.E), RFC

following cabinets: BTS3900 (Ver.D), BTS3900L (Ver.D), BTS3900 (Ver.D_A),
o
ti(Ver.D_B), BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z), BTS3012AE
BTS3900 (Ver.D_B), BTS3900L (Ver.D_B),
a
c (Ver.E), BTS3900AL (Ver.A), BTS3900
(Ver.D_Z), TMC11H (Ver.D),fiTMC11H
(Ver.D_A1), RFC (Ver.D_A2), RFC
t i
(Ver.E_A~D), BTS3900Lr(Ver.E_B~D),
(Ver.E), IMB05, andC
e
IMB03.
BTS5900 (Ver.A), BTS5900L (Ver.A), ILC29
& on a DCDU-12B panel:

ng
 Terminals and ports
i
a in
T r
e i
a w
Hu

Permission
n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 A power supply unit (PSU) (EPW25-24S48D) Huconverts +24 V DC power into -48 V
n
DC. PSUs (EPW25-24S48D) can be installed in an IMB03.
o
t i following functions:
a to -48 V DC power and provides the -48 V DC
 A PSU (EPW25-24S48D) performs the
ic
tif
 Converts +24 V DC power
r
power to the DCDU-01.
e alarms related to module faults (such as output

C
Monitors and reports
&(such as over temperature protection and input

overvoltage, no output, and fan failure), alarms related to module
g
in
protection
i n
overvoltage/undervoltage protection), and module not-in-position alarm.
r a on a PSU (EPW25-24S48D):
iT
 Indicators
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
A power supply unit (PSU) (PSU4850A) converts
H u 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -
48 V DC power. It can be used in BTS3900(Ver.C) and APM30H(Ver.C) cabinets.
o n functions:
Converts 110 V AC or 220 tVi AC power into -48 V DC power and distributes
A PSU (PSU4850A) performs the following
the -48 V DC power. ic


a
r tifalarms related to module faults (such as output
overvoltage, noeoutput, and fan failure), alarms related to module protection
Monitors and reports

C
& and module not-in-position alarm.
(such as over temperature protection and input overvoltage/undervoltage
n g
protection),
Indicatorsi on a PSU (PSU4850A):

n
i Color Status Meaning
LEDra
i T
e On Normal
a w Power Mains power supply faults (such as no AC input and
Hu
Green
indicator Off overvoltage or undervoltage of AC input), or no output
from PSUs
Protection Off Normal

Yellow
indicator On Temperature pre-warning
Normal, or no output from PSUs due to mains power
Off supply faults (such as no AC input and overvoltage or
Fault undervoltage of AC input)
Red
indicator No output from PSUs due to output overvoltage shutdown,
On fan fault, overtemperature shutdown, or remote shutdown,
or no output from PSUs due to other internal problems
n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
A power supply unit (PSU) (R4850G2) convertsu110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48
V DC power. PSUs (R4850G2) can be used H

in an IMS06 subrack or in any of the
o nBTS3012 (Ver.D_Z), BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z),

following cabinets: BTS3900 (Ver.D), BTS3900 (Ver.D_A), BTS3900 (Ver.D_B),
ti (Ver.D_A1), APM30H (Ver.D_A2), APM30H

BTS3900L (Ver.D), BTS3900AL (Ver.A),
a
c (Ver.E_A1), APM30H (Ver.E_A2), APM30H
OMB (Ver.C), APM30H (Ver.D), APM30H
i
f
ti the following functions:
(Ver.D_B), APM30H (Ver.E), APM30
r
(Ver.E_B~D), IMB03, and IMB05.

C
A PSU (R4850G2) performse
&DC power.
 Converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and distributes
g
the -48 V
n in and reports alarms related to module faults (such as output

Monitors
i overvoltage, no output, and fan failure), alarms related to module protection

a
r (such as over temperature protection and input overvoltage/undervoltage
i T
e protection), and module not-in-position alarm.
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H
A power monitoring unit 01B (PMU 01B) manages u the power system and batteries,
monitors power distribution, and reports alarms. It can be used in BTS3900(Ver.B),
o n
i
BTS3900(Ver.C), APM30H(Ver.B), APM30H(Ver.C), and IMB03 cabinets.
a t functions:
ic upper-level device through an RS485 port.
 A PMU 01B performs the following
Communicates withfthe

i
rt system and the charge and discharge of storage

batteries. C
e
Manages the power
Reports&

g alarms related to the door status, standby Boolean detection,
n humidity and temperature, battery temperature, and standby
n i
ambient
a i analog values.
T r Monitors power distribution and reports dry contact alarms.
i

e
w
 Communicates with the battery cabinet through an RS485 port.
a
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 A power monitoring unit 11A or 11B (PMU 11A)
H u manages a power system and
batteries, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms. A PMU 11A or PMU
11B can be used in an IMS06 subracknor in any of the following cabinets:
t io BTS3900AL (Ver.A), BTS3900 (Ver.D_A),
ic a(Ver.D_Z), BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z), IMB03, IMB05,
BTS3900 (Ver.D), BTS3900L (Ver.D),
tif(Ver.D_A1), APM30H (Ver.D_A2), APM30H

BTS3900 (Ver.D_B), BTS3012
r
(Ver.E_A1), APM30He
APM30H (Ver.D), APM30H
C (Ver.D_B), or OMB (Ver.C).

 & the following functions:
A PMU 11A performs

i ng
Communicates with the upper-level device through an RS485 port.
a inManages a power system and the charge and discharge of storage

r batteries.

i T
e
w
 Monitors the door status and the temperature of storage batteries.
a
Hu
 Monitors power distribution and reports alarms.
 Communicates with the battery cabinet through an RS485 port.

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The FAN dissipates heat from the cabinet andumonitors temperature. It can be
H cabinets.

used in BTS3900 (Ver.B) and BTS3900L (Ver.B)
o n
ti
 Ports on a FAN:
ic a
i f
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i on a FAN:

T r
Indicators
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H
A FAN 02E dissipates heat from a cabinet andumonitors temperature. A FAN 02E
can be installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E).
o n
ti
 Ports on a FAN:
ic a
i f
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i on a FAN:

T r
Indicators
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Huto the 3900 Series Base Station
For the description of the ports, please refer
Hardware Description.
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 As a mandatory module providing protection Hu
for trunk signals in APM30H or
n
TMC11H cabinet, the SLPU is configured with a UELP or UFLP and is installed in
the top 1 U space of the cabinet.
i o
UELP: Universal E1/T1 LightningtProtection

a
ic Protection
i f
rt
 UFLP : Universal FE Lightning

C e
SLPU slot assignment rules:
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Ports on the panel of the UELP: Hu
o n
ati
ic
r t if
Ce
&
ng
 DIP switch on the UELP
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu  The E1 cable of 75 ohms can be either grounded or not grounded, whereas the
E1 cable of 120 ohms and the T1 cable of 100 ohms cannot be grounded.

n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
A universal FE lightning protection unit type bu

H (UFLPb) or universal FE lightning
protection unit type c (UFLPc) provides protection for two channels of FE or GE
o n
ti
signals.
 UFLPb panel :
ic a
i f
e rt
C
&
 UFLPc panel :
g
n in
a ion the UFLP:

T r
Ports
e i
a w
Hu
 Ports on the UFLPb or UFLPc:

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

Permission
n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

Permission
n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

Permission
n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The CPRI fiber optic cables from the sockets Huat the bottom of RMU connect the
n"CPRI 6,7,8", and "CPRI 9,10,11".
RMU and RRUs. 12 CPRI ports are provided from four sockets with each socket
o
numbered "CPRI 0,1,2", "CPRI 3,4,5", i
tconnect
ic a
tif
 The ports for fiber optic cables to the RMU and BBU are located in the
r
maintenance cavity.
Ce
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

Permission
n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

Permission
n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

Permission
n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Problem: Residential high-rises, the site coverage Hu is affected by the building block,
n
the around macro station can not solve the depth of coverage.
o
 Program:
a ti
f ic the roof, the BBU and transmission equipment can
ti
 If there is a site room in
r
be placed in the room;
e mounted on the wall in the roof of the building, and BBU
 Easy Macro are
C
&
connected to BBU by the fiber;
n g
i
 AC power distribution box is provided in the room for the Easy Macro
i npower supply.
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H u
An APM30H houses the BBU and also provides 5 U space for customer equipment where an
an AC heater, and a service outlet unit (SOU)n

environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA/EMUB), an environment monitoring unit type B (EMUB),
o
tiHert power monitoring interface unit (HPMI), and central
can be installed.

a
monitoring unit type A (CMUA). Thecfans dissipate heat from the cabinet.
The FAN 02A is configured with the fans,
i fi a signal lightning protection unit (SLPU) is mandatory and

To provide protection for trunktsignals,

e rof the cabinet. It is configured with the universal E1/T1 lightning

Cuniversal FE lightning protection unit (UFLP).
installed in the top 1 U space
&cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.

protection unit (UELP) or
g
 The ELU reports the

n in
A power supply unit (PSU) converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power.

a
The EPS
i 01 subrack distributes AC and DC power to components in a cabinet.
T r antenna and TMA control module (GATM) supplies power to the tower-mounted amplifier
A GSM
i (TMA), reports alarms related to the remote electrical tilt (RET), and monitors the feeder current.

e
a w  The EMUA/EMUB monitors the environment in a cabinet and processes alarms.
Hu
 The AC heater ensures that components in a cabinet work within an acceptable temperature range
when the surrounding temperature is low.
 The SOU transfers AC power supply to customer equipment.
 The outer air circulation component includes the heat exchanger core and fans.
 When a heater or a heating film is configured, the AC junction box provides power for the heater or
the heating film.
 The power monitoring unit 01B (PMU 01B) manages the power system and storage batteries,
monitors power distribution, and reports alarms.

n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H u
An APM30H houses the BBU and also provides 5 U space for customer equipment where an
an AC heater, and a service outlet unit (SOU)n

environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA/EMUB), an environment monitoring unit type B (EMUB),
o
The FAN 02E is configured with the fans, iCCUB which is used to monitor a fan module, a heater,
can be installed.

cabinet temperature, a power module,a

t
f ic
and lower-level devices. The fans dissipate heat from the
cabinet.
r i
tsignals, a signal lightning protection unit (SLPU) is mandatory and

e
To provide protection for trunk
Cuniversal FE lightning protection unit (UFLP).

installed in the top 1 U space of the cabinet. It is configured with the universal E1/T1 lightning
&cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.

protection unit (UELP) or

g
The ELU reports the

n insubrack
A power supply unit (PSU) converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power.

a i
The EPU05A distributes AC and DC power to components in a cabinet.
T r reports
A GSM antenna and TMA control module (GATM) supplies power to the tower-mounted amplifier
i

e
(TMA), alarms related to the remote electrical tilt (RET), and monitors the feeder current.
a w  The EMUA/EMUB monitors the environment in a cabinet and processes alarms.
Hu
 The AC heater ensures that components in a cabinet work within an acceptable temperature range
when the surrounding temperature is low.
 The SOU transfers AC power supply to customer equipment.
 The outer air circulation component includes the heat exchanger core and fans.
 When a heater or a heating film is configured, the AC junction box provides power for the heater or
the heating film.
 The power monitoring unit 11B (PMU 11B) manages the power system and storage batteries,
monitors power distribution, and reports alarms.

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H
When -48 V DC input power is available, the TMC11H
u can be configured to provide
n
additional space for transmission devices. It also provides a space of 11 U for customer
o
ti (DCDU-03B) or direct current distribution unit-03C
equipment.
 a
ic to components in a TMC11H. The DCDU-03B or
The direct current distribution unit-03B
DCDU-03C is of 1 U high.rt
i
(DCDU-03C) distributes DC power f
 Cepromotes the inner and outer air circulation, and accelerates
The heat exchanger core
and protects g
&
internal and external air exchanges. This lowers the operating temperature of the cabinet
i n
a cabinet from dust.
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H
When -48 V DC input power is available, the TMC11H
u can be configured to provide
n
additional space for transmission devices. It also provides a space of 11 U for customer
o
ti (DCDU-12B) or direct current distribution unit-12C
equipment.
 a
ic to components in a TMC11H. The DCDU-12B or
The direct current distribution unit-12B
DCDU-12C is of 1 U high.rt
i
(DCDU-12C) distributes DC power f
 Cepromotes the inner and outer air circulation, and accelerates
The heat exchanger core
and protects g
&
internal and external air exchanges. This lowers the operating temperature of the cabinet
i n
a cabinet from dust.
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H
The direct current distribution unit-12B (DCDU-12B)
u distributes ten DC power outputs to
RRUs.
o nand CMUEA. The fans dissipate heat from the
 The FAN 01C is configured with the fans
cabinet, and the CMUEA controls a ti
fic temperature, detects Boolean alarms, and identifies the
ELU of the cabinet.
t i
The DCDU-12A distributesr ten DC outputs to components in an RFC.
Ce one or two DC power inputs into two DC power outputs.

A DC junction box converts

&

g
n in
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H
The direct current distribution unit-12B (DCDU-12B)
u distributes ten DC power outputs to
RRUs.
o nand CMUEA. The fans dissipate heat from the
 The FAN 01D is configured with the fans
cabinet, and the CMUEA controls a ti
fic temperature, detects Boolean alarms, and identifies the
ELU of the cabinet.
t i
The DCDU-12A distributesr ten DC outputs to components in an RFC.
Ce one or two DC power inputs into two DC power outputs.

A DC junction box converts

&

g
n in
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The TEC ensures the normal operation of an HuIBBS200T in high-temperature areas
n
and dissipates heat from the storage batteries.
o
t i Boolean alarm, and identifies the ELU.
a automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.
 The CMUA controls temperature, detects
ic
if
 The ELU reports the cabinet type
r tlong-duration
e
 Storage batteries provide backup power for a base station.

C monitors whether the cabinet door is open.
The door status sensor
& box is installed on the upper right wall of the cabinet interior,
g
 The power distribution
i n
transferring and distributing power to the TEC or fans and storage batteries.
n
i terminal provides the input power port for the heating film.

a
The junction
r IBBS200D must be configured with the heating film in cold areas. The heating

i T
The
e film is not required in general areas.
a w
Hu
 The IBBS200D and IBBS200T also include the four types, Ver.B, Ver.C, Ver.D,
and Ver.E.

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H upart of the front door. It dissipates heat
The inner air circulation fan is installed in the upper
The TEC ensures the normal operation ofnan IBBS700T in high-temperature areas and
for the storage batteries.
t io

a in the lower part of the front door. It dissipates heat

dissipates heat for the storage batteries.
ic
if
 The outer air circulation fan is installed
for the TEC.
r t
Ce
 The central monitoring unit type F (CMUF) controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm,
and identifies the ELU.

& unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate
The electronic label
g unit (CCU) monitors the environment in a cabinet and manages
ncontrol
troubleshooting.
i
in
 The cabinet
a
Tr AC junction box is installed on the left inner wall of the cabinet and provides power for
devices.
ei the
 The
heater.
a w The heater assembly unit 01A-01 (HAU01A-01) is a heater. It functions in the low-

Hu
temperature environment to provide the suitable storage and operating temperature for the
storage batteries.
 The power distribution box is installed in the middle of the cabinet. It transfers and
distributes power to the TEC or fan, CCU, and storage batteries.
 The fan mounting frame configured with fans is installed on the lower middle part in the
front door of the cabinet.
 The central monitoring unit type EA (CMUEA) controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm,
and identifies the ELU.

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 A G[U*L] base station is configured with one
u which works in triple-mode.
HBBU,
n and the other (UMPT) works in UMTS and
o
GTMUb/GTMUc) works in GSM mode,
a ti
ic in GSM mode are required, ensure that at least
LTE dual-mode.
i f
rt (UBBPd_G, UBRI, or UBRIb) is installed in slot 1, slot
 If two or more baseband boards
C e
one of the baseband board
&
2, or slot 3.
g
in
 The UBBP_G installed in slot 4 can not be connected CPRI cables in a GBTS.
i n
r a
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
HBBU,
using one UMPT.
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
HBBU,
using one UMPT.
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 CPRI ports with different rates on the UBBP
u in GSM mode support
Hworking
n
different numbers of carriers, as listed in the following table.
o
t i and the number of carriers:
a
 Mapping between the CPRI port rate
ic
r tif
Ce
&
g
n in
CPRI iports with different rates on the UBBP working in UMTS mode support

r a numbers of cells, as listed in the following table.
iT
different
e
w
 Mapping between the CPRI port rate and the number of cells:
a
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 VIRTUAL indicates a virtual cabinet. It canH
u
be an object in physical entity modeling,
n is no physical entity, for example, base

for example, a legacy cabinet or a cabinet type not included in the existing cabinet
o
ticabinets.
types. It can also be an object when there
a
stations installed in an open rackor independent modules such as BBU3910A and
f
OPM50M that have no installation
i ic
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H
RFU subrack. RFUs can be configured in subracks
u 4 and 5 in BTS3900L and
n be configured in extension subracks. You
virtual cabinets, and only in subrack 4 in other cabinets.
 GPS receivers, EMUs, and GATMs can
o
ti in subrack 50 or 51.
are advised to configure the GATM
a
ic the following rules when configuring RRU subrack

i
You are advised to comply with
f
numbers:
e rt

C numbers for the same project must consistent with each
The RRU subrack
other. &
g
If anmultimode

i RRU needs to be configured in multiple modes, it must be
a inconfigured with the same subrack number. Otherwise an alarm is

Tr generated, indicating the configuration conflict.
ei The RRU subrack numbers are numbered starting from the lowest band
w

a that the RRUs support. Some subrack numbers need to be reserved for
Hu
capacity expansion. For example, in a network using the RRU3926 of 900
MHz, RRU3929 of 1800 MHz, and RRU3806 of 2100 MHz, the subrack
numbers are assigned as follows: 60 to 69 are assigned to the RRU3926s
of 900 MHz, 70 to 79 are assigned to the RRU3929s of 1800 MHz, and 80
to 89 are assigned to the RRU3806s of 2100 MHz.
 The TCU can be configured in subrack 14 in a virtual cabinet.
 AAS: Active Antenna System

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 In this scenario, the GTMUb does not needH
u
to be configured with Ethernet port
n
attributes such as duplex mode and rate because the GTMUb communicates with
o
the UMPT_U through the backplane.
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The UTRPc provides an FE/GE port as theH
u
co-transmission port. The main control
n directly between the baseband board

board of each mode communicates with the UTRPc through the backplane. The
o
ti
data of the managing mode is transmitted
a
ic through the main control board.
and the UTRPc. The data of the non-managing mode is transmitted between the
i f
rt of the non-managing mode communicates with the
baseband board and the UTRPc
e
UTRPc through theC
 When the main control board
&
backplane, both the main control board and the UTRPc must
ngcorresponding board, and is uniquely numbered within the

be configured with a tunnel to each other. Each tunnel is managed only by the
mode of ithe
a in mode. Tunnels of different modes can have the same number. Use
ther network structure as an example and assume that mode 1 is the managing
corresponding
T The UTRPc must be configured with a tunnel to the main control board of
i mode.
e
a w mode 2, and the main control board of mode 2 must be configured with a tunnel to
Hu the UTRPc.

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 If the co-transmission on the Co-MPT GULH
u
multimode base station side is in IP
n
over FE/GE mode, each mode uses the same OM IP address but different service
o
IP addresses.
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 If the co-transmission on the Co-MPT GULH
u
multimode base station side is in IP
n
over FE/GE mode, each mode uses the same OM IP address but different service
o
IP addresses.
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Star Topology Hu
o n
The star topology is the most common topology and is applicable to
ti

a
densely populated areas.
ic
if
 Advantages

e rt
Each MBTS is directly connected to an MBSC/MME/S-GW. Therefore, this
C
topology is characterized by easy engineering, maintenance, and capacity
&
expansion.
EachgMBTS directly transmits data to and receives data from an
in

i n
MBSC/MME/S-GW. Signals travel through few nodes, and therefore line
r a
T
reliability is high.
ei Disadvantages

a w The star topology requires more transmission resources than other


Hu
topologies.

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Chain Topology Hu
o n
The chain topology is applicable to belt-shaped and sparsely populated
ti

a
areas, such as areas along highways and railways.
ic
if
 Advantages

e rt
This topology helps reduce costs of transmission equipment, engineering
C
construction, and leased transmission lines.
 Disadvantages&

i ng travel through many nodes, which lowers line reliability.
Signals
a inFaults in an upper-level base station may affect lower-level base stations.

r The number of levels in a chain topology cannot exceed five.

i T 
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Tree Topology Hu
o n
The tree topology is applicable to areas with complicated network
ti

a
architecture, site distribution, and subscriber distribution, for example, hot
ic
if
spot areas in which subscribers are widely distributed.
 Advantages
e rt

C
The tree topology requires fewer transmission cables than the star
&
topology.
g
in
 Disadvantages
n
i engineering and maintenance are difficult.
a
 Signals travel through many nodes, and therefore line reliability is low and
T r
e i  Faults in an upper-level base station may affect lower-level base stations.
a w Capacity expansion is difficult because it may require changes in the
Hu

current network architecture.

 The number of levels in a tree topology cannot exceed five.

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Star topology:
H u
n processing board. The control- and user-plane
 An operation and maintenance (OM) channel is set up between each RRU/RFU
o
ti link.
and the GTMU, UBRI, or baseband
a
data is transmitted on the CPRI
Star topologies apply to c

the downtown areas.if

i most areas, especially densely populated areas, such as
e
Star topologies arerthighly reliable. In a star topology, if a CPRI port or CPRI link is
Conly on the RRU/RFU that communicate with the BBU over the

faulty, services
&
faulty CPRI port or CPRI link are affected. Compared with topologies of other types,
g
star topologies require more optical cables.
n

n i
Chain topology:
a i An
r transmitted
 OM channel is set up between each RRU/RFU on the chain and the GTMU,
i T UBRI, or baseband processing board. The control- and user-plane data is
e
on the CPRI link.
a w  Data of a lower-level RRU/RFU is forwarded by its upper-level RRUs/RFUs. The
Hu
total physical bandwidth of RRUs/RFUs in a chain cannot exceed the physical
bandwidth capacity of the connected CPRI port on the GTMU, UBRI, or baseband
processing board.
 Chain topologies apply to long and narrow, and loosely populated areas, such as
highways and railways.
 Chain topologies are less reliable. In a chain topology, if a CPRI port or CPRI link
is faulty, all services on the lower-level RRU/RFU that communicate with the BBU
over the faulty CPRI port or CPRI link are affected. Compared with topologies of
other types, chain topologies require less optical cables.

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 In an intra-board cold backup ring topology: Hu
If the GTMU, UBRI, or baseband n
o are interrupted.
processing board is faulty, services
carried by all RRUs on the iring

t
alink that transmits services on the ring is faulty,
ic
if
 If the CPRI port or CPRI
the RRU servicesttransmitted
r over the CPRI port or CPRI link are
ethen return to normal within at most 20s after the services
C
interrupted and
&
are switched to another fiber. If the CPRI port or CPRI link that does not
g
in
transmit services is faulty, the services on the RRUs are not affected.
i n
r a
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 In an inter-board cold backup ring topology: Hu
n
other baseband processingio
 If the baseband processing board that transmits services is faulty and the
baseband resources, c
t
a services on all RRUs on the ring are interrupted
board works properly and has available
i
if within at most 20s after the RRUs establish
the
r t
and then return to normal
C
communications e with the normal baseband processing board. If the
services&
baseband processing board that does not transmit services is faulty, the
g on the RRUs are not affected.

n CPRI port or CPRI link that transmits services on the ring is faulty,
If ithe

n
i the RRU services transmitted over the CPRI port or CPRI link are
a
r interrupted and then return to normal within at most 20s after the RRUs
i T
e
w
establish communications with another baseband processing board. If the
a
Hu
CPRI port or CPRI link that does not transmit services is faulty, the
services on the RRUs are not affected.

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 In a hot backup ring topology: Hu
o n
If the baseband processing board that establish OM channel with RRU on
ti

a
the ring is faulty, the services on the RRU are interrupted and then return
ic
if
to normal within at most 20s after the RRU establish OM channel with the
r t
other baseband processing board. If the baseband processing board that
C e OM channel with RRU is faulty, the services on the RRU

do not establish
&
are not affected.
g
in on the RRU are quickly switched to the other CPRI link and return
 If the CPRI port or CPRI link that carries the OM channel is faulty, the
n
i to normal within at most 500 ms. If the CPRI port or CPRI link that does not
services
r a
i T carry OM channel is faulty, the services on the RRU are not affected.
e Hot backup ring topologies are more reliable than cold backup ring topologies.
a w 
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu
This solution applies to the BBU3910 and BBU5900.
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 In a dual-star topology in GU/GL mode, two
u on an RRU/RFU/AAU are
Hports
n In a dual-star topology in UL mode,
connected to the GTMU or UBRI on the GSM side and the baseband processing
o
ti
board on the UMTS/LTE side, respectively.
two ports on an RRU/AAU are a
ic
connected to the baseband processing boards on
f
the UMTS and LTE sides,irespectively.
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu carries services in multiple
If a CPRI link in a multimode load sharing topology
n
modes, the CPRI MUX feature must be enabled. For details, see CPRI MUX
Feature Parameter Description. io
If each of the two CPRI links c ina
t
fi ports must be connected to baseband processing
 a multimode load sharing topology carries services
t i
r of two different modes, respectively and the boards
in single mode, the two CPRI
e
C WBBPa, WBBPb, WBBPd, or LBBPc that does not
boards or interface boards
& In most cases, this scenario occurs when the co-MPT

must be UBRIa, GTMUb,
g
support CPRI MUX.
multimode
ninload sharing topology is reconstructed from the separate-MPT dual-
a i
rthe preceding scenario, the baseband processing board or interface board in
star topology.

i T
In
e
w
one mode is connected to one CPRI port on an RRU/RFU and that in the other
a
Hu
mode is connected to the other CPRI port on the same RRU/RFU. User plane
data for the two modes are transmitted over the CPRI links, respectively.
 In this case, if one CPRI link carrying the OM channel of a multimode RRU is
faulty, the OM channel switches over to the other CPRI link automatically.

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 GBTS Hu
o n
Settings of parameters specified by running the SET BTSRXUBP
ti

a
command:
ic
if
 Sending Receiving Mode: SGL_ANTENNA(Single Feeder[1TX +
1RX])
e rt

C
Settings of parameters specified by running the SET GTRXDEV command
&
(using MRFUd as an example):
g
in Send Mode: DTIC(Transmit Independency or Combination)
 Receive Mode: MAINDIVERSITY(Main Diversity)
i n
a

r
iT
 eGBTS
e Configuring one SECTOREQM for setting antenna receive and send

w

a modes:
Hu  Channel No. of Antenna 1: R0A(R0A)

 Antenna 1 RX/TX Mode: RXTX_MODE(RX And TX)
 Configuring one GTRXGROUP for setting receive mode and send mode of
eGBTS TRXs:
 Receiving Mode: SINGLERECV(Single Receiver)
 Sending Mode: SINGLESND(Single Transmitter)

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 GBTS Hu

o n
Settings of parameters specified by running the SET BTSRXUBP command:

ati
Sending Receiving Mode: DOUBLESINGLE_ANTENNA(Double
ic
Feeder[1TX + 1RX])

r t
Settings of parametersifspecified by running the SET GTRXDEV command (using
C e
MRFUd as an example):
& Mode: DTIC(Transmit Independency or Combination)

eGBTS in
g
 Send
inConfiguring one SECTOREQM for setting antenna receive and send modes:

a
Tr

ei
 Channel No. of Antenna 2: R0A(R0A)
a w  Antenna 2 RX/TX Mode: TX_MODE(TX)
Hu
 Channel No. of Antenna 2: R0B(R0B)
 Antenna 2 RX/TX Mode: RX_MODE(RX)
 Configuring one GTRXGROUP for setting receive mode and send mode of eGBTS
TRXs:

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 GBTS Hu

o n
Settings of parameters specified by running the SET BTSRXUBP command:

ati
Sending Receiving Mode: DOUBLEDOUBLE_ANTENNA(Double
ic
Feeder[1TX + 2RX])

r t
Settings of parametersifspecified by running the SET GTRXDEV command (using
C e
MRFUd as an example):
& Mode: DTIC(Transmit Independency or Combination)

eGBTS in
g
 Send
inConfiguring one SECTOREQM for setting antenna receive and send modes:

a
Tr

ei
a w  Antenna 2 RX/TX Mode: RXTX_MODE(RX And TX)
Hu
 Configuring one GTRXGROUP for setting receive mode and send mode of eGBTS
TRXs:
 Receiving Mode: MAINDIVERSITY(Main Diversity)

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 GBTS
H u
n
 Settings of parameters specified by running the SET BTSRXUBP command:
o
i running the SET GTRXDEV command (using MRFUd
Sending Receiving Mode: DOUBLE_ANTENNA(Double
Settings of parameters specifiedtby
 Feeder[2TX + 2RX])

ic a
f
as an example):

t i
Send Mode:rDTIC(Transmit Independency or Combination)
Receive Mode: MAINDIVERSITY(Main Diversity)
 eGBTS

C e

&
Configuring two SECTOREQMs for setting antenna receive and send modes:
g
in Channel
 Sector1:
i n
 No. of Antenna 2: R0A(R0A)
r a  Antenna 2 RX/TX Mode: RXTX_MODE(RX And TX)
i T  Channel No. of Antenna 2: R0B(R0B)
e  Antenna 2 RX/TX Mode: RX_MODE(RX)
a w  Sector2
Hu
 Configuring two GTRXGROUPs for setting receive mode and send mode of eGBTS TRXs
(The settings of the receive mode and send mode for the two GTRXGROUPs are the
same.):

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 GBTS
H u
n
o
Sending Receiving Mode: SGLDOUBLE_ANTENNA(Single

ic a
f
as an example):

t i
Send Mode:rDTIC(Transmit Independency or Combination)
 eGBTS

C e

&
g
in Channel
 Sector1:
i n
r a  Antenna 2 RX/TX Mode: RXTX_MODE(RX And TX)
i T  Channel No. of Antenna 2: R0A(R0A)
a w  Sector2
Hu
same.):

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 GBTS
H u
n
o
Sending Receiving Mode: FOURDOUBLE_ANTENNA(Four

ic a
f
as an example):

t i
Send Mode:rNOCOMB(No Combination)
 eGBTS

C e

&
g
in Channel
 Sector1:
i n
r a  Antenna 2 RX/TX Mode: TX_MODE(TX)
i T  Channel No. of Antenna 2: R0C(R0C)
a w  Sector2
Hu
 Antenna 2 RX/TX Mode: TX_MODE(TX)
 Channel No. of Antenna 2: R0D(R0D)
same.):

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 GBTS
Hu
n
ti o
 Sending Receiving Mode: FOURDOUBLEFOUR_ANTENNA(Four Feeder[2TX + 4RX])
a
 Settings of parameters specified by running the SET GTRXDEV command (using MRFUd as an
ic
example):
if
t

e r
Send Mode: NOCOMB(No Combination)
C
 eGBTS
&

Sector1:
ng

i
in
ra
 Channel No. of Antenna 2: R0C(R0C)
iT
e
 Sector2
w
a
Hu
 Channel No. of Antenna 2: R0D(R0D)
 Configuring two GTRXGROUPs for setting receive mode and send mode of eGBTS TRXs (The
settings of the receive mode and send mode for the two GTRXGROUPs are the same.):

n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Parameters related to the SectorEqmAntennaRef Hu

o nSet this parameter to MASTER for a cell with

Antenna RX/TX Mode: Set this parameter to RXTX_MODE for a cell with 1T1R.
 TX Antenna Master/Slave Mode:
a ti
ic MO
1T1R.
i f
rtthis parameter to NORMAL_CELL for a normal cell with 1T1R.
 Parameters related to the ULOCELL

C e
Local cell type: Set

&
Two Tx Way: Set this parameter to FALSE for a normal cell with 1T1R.
g
inwith 1T1R.
 SUPPORT VAM: It is a good practice to set this parameter to FALSE for a normal
n
i Cover Type: This parameter is available only when LOCELLTYPE is set to
cell
a
r HALFFREQ_CELL.

i T
e
w
 Parameters related to the ULoCellSectorEqm
a
Hu
 Sector Equipment ID: This parameter indicates the ID of sector equipment used in
the local cell.For a normal cell with 1T1R, only one ULoCellSectorEqm MO can be
created and associated with the SectorEqm MO.
 Max Output Power: For a normal cell with 1T1R, set this parameter to the default
value 65535, indicating that the maximum transmit power is automatically adjusted
by the local cell.

n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Parameters related to the SectorEqmAntennaRef
Hu

o nto RXTX_MODE for one MO and RX_MODE or

Antenna RX/TX Mode: Two SectorEqmAntennaRef MOs are created for a normal
ti
cell with 1T2R. Set this parameter
RXTX_MODE for the other MO.
a
icMode: If both SectorEqmAntennaRef MOs are
TX Antenna Master/Slave
i f
rt for one

e
configured with ANTTYPE set to RXTX_MODE for a normal cell with 1T2R, set this
C
parameter to MASTER MO only.

&
Parameters related to the ULOCELL MO
g
Local cell type: Set this parameter to NORMAL_CELL for a normal cell with 1T2R.
inTx Way: Set this parameter to FALSE for a normal cell with 1T2R.

n
i SUPPORT VAM: It is a good practice to set this parameter to FALSE for a normal
 Two
a
r cell with 1T2R.

i T
e Cover Type: This parameter is available only when LOCELLTYPE is set to
w

a HALFFREQ_CELL.
Hu
the local cell.For a normal cell with 1T2R, only one ULoCellSectorEqm MO can be
created and associated with the SectorEqm MO.
 Max Output Power: For a normal cell with 1T2R, set this parameter to the default
value 65535, indicating that the maximum transmit power is automatically adjusted
by the local cell.

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w

Hu
Parameters related to the SectorEqmAntennaRef

o n
Antenna RX/TX Mode: For a normal cell with 2T2R, set this parameter to
t i
RXTX_MODE for both SectorEqmAntennaRef MOs.
ic a Mode: For a normal cell with 2T2R, set this
if for both SectorEqmAntennaRef MOs.

r
parameter to MASTER
t
 Parameters related to e
C Set this parameter to NORMAL_CELL for a normal cell
the ULOCELL MO
&
 Local cell type:
g
with 2T2R.
n inTx Way: Set this parameter to TRUE for a normal cell with 2T2R.
Two
i SUPPORT VAM: None.

a
r Cover Type: This parameter setting is effective only when LOCELLTYPE

i T 
e
w
is set to HALFFREQ_CELL.
a
Hu
 Sector Equipment ID: This parameter indicates the ID of sector equipment
used in the local cell.For a normal cell with 2T2R, only one
ULoCellSectorEqm MO can be created and associated with the SectorEqm
MO.
 Max Output Power: For a normal cell with 2T2R, set this parameter to the
default value 65535, indicating that the maximum transmit power is
automatically adjusted by the local cell.

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
H u
n this parameter to RXTX_MODE for one or two
 Antenna RX/TX Mode: Four SectorEqmAntennaRef MOs are created for a four-
o
tiMOs.
antenna normal cell with 1T4R. Set
a
MOs and RX_MODE for other
f icMode: Set this parameter to MASTER for only one
ti

r
SectorEqmAntennaRef MO if two SectorEqmAntennaRef MOs are configured with
Cethe ULOCELL MO
ANTTYPE set to RXTX_MODE.
 Parameters related to
Local cell&type: Set this parameter to NORMAL_CELL for a four-antenna normal
nTxg Way: Set this parameter to FALSE for a normal cell with 1T4R.

cell with 1T4R.

i
inSUPPORT VAM: Set this parameter to FALSE for a normal cell with 1T4R.
 Two
a
r Cover Type: This parameter setting is effective only when LOCELLTYPE is set to

i T 
e HALFFREQ_CELL.
a w  Parameters related to the ULoCellSectorEqm
Hu
the local cell.Only one ULoCellSectorEqm MO can be created for a normal cell with
1T4R.
 Max Output Power: For a normal cell with 1T4R, it is a good practice to set this
parameter to the default value 65535, indicating that the maximum transmit power
is adjusted by the local cell. If the default value is used, the maximum transmit
power of each sector equipment is equal to the maximum transmit power of the
local cell.

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

antenna normal cell with 2T4R.o n this parameter to RXTX_MODE for two MOs
Antenna RX/TX Mode: Four SectorEqmAntennaRef MOs are created for a four-
ti MOs.
Set
and RX_MODE for another two
a
icMode: Set this parameter to MASTER for the two
 TX Antenna Master/Slave
i f
t MOs with ANTTYPE set to RXTX_MODE.
e
SectorEqmAntennaRef
r

C

&
Local cell type: Set this parameter to NORMAL_CELL for a four-antenna normal
g
cell with 2T4R.
n inTx Way: Set this parameter to TRUE for a normal cell with 2T4R.
i SUPPORT VAM: None.
 Two
a
r Cover Type: This parameter is available only when LOCELLTYPE is set to

i T 
e HALFFREQ_CELL.
a w Parameters related to the ULoCellSectorEqm
Hu

the local cell.Only one ULoCellSectorEqm MO can be created for a normal cell with
2T4R.
 Max Output Power: For a normal cell with 2T4R, it is a good practice to set this
power of each sector equipment is equal to the maximum transmit power of the
local cell.

n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Parameters related to the SectorEqmAntennaRef Hu

o n
Antenna RX/TX Mode: For a MIMO cell with 2T2R, set this parameter to
t i
RXTX_MODE for both SectorEqmAntennaRef MOs.
TX Antenna Master/Slave a
ic Mode: For a MIMO cell with 2T2R, set this parameter to
if

r t
MASTER for both SectorEqmAntennaRef MOs.

C e
& Set this parameter to TRUE for a MIMO cell with 2T2R.
 Local cell type: Set this parameter to NORMAL_CELL for a MIMO cell with 2T2R.
g
Two Tx Way:
in VAM: None.

n
i Cover Type: This parameter is available only when LOCELLTYPE is set to
 SUPPORT
a
r HALFFREQ_CELL.

i T
e
w
a
Hu
the local cell.Only one ULoCellSectorEqm MO can be created for a MIMO cell with
2T2R.
 Max Output Power: For a MIMO cell with 2T2R, it is a good practice to set this
power of each sector equipment is half that of the local cell.

n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu This means that in one single
GL base station is a separate-MPT base station.
n
BBU, there are two main control boards working in GSM and LTE modes
o
separately. i
tbase
G*L base station is a co-MPTcGL
i a
tif in GSM and LTE modes simultaneously.
 station. This means that in one single BBU,
r
the main control board work
Ce
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

Permission
n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
GL base station is a separate-MPT base station.
n
BBU, there are two main control boards working in GSM and LTE modes
o
separately. i
tbase
G*L base station is a co-MPTcGL
i a
tif in GSM and LTE modes simultaneously.
r
Ce
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

Permission
n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
UL base station is a separate-MPT base station.
n
BBU, there are two main control boards working in UMTS and LTE modes
o
separately. i
tbase
U*L base station is a co-MPTcUL
i a
tif in UMTS and LTE modes simultaneously.
r
Ce
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

Permission
n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 G[U*L] indicates that one single BBU workH
u
in triple modes. The BBU is configured
n
with two main control boards. One is the GTMU or GTMUb working in GSM mode,
and the other is the UMPT workingio
a t is configured with one UMPT working in
in UMTS and LTE modes.

i f
G*U*L indicates that one single
ic BBU
rt
triple modes
C e
&
g
nin
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu installed, 3900 series base
Based on the application scenarios and cabinets
n (BTS3900A and BTS3900AL),

stations can be classified into indoor macro base stations (BTS3900 and
o
ti and mini base stations (BTS3900C).
BTS3900L), outdoor macro base stations
a
ic BTS3900 (Ver.C), or BTS3900 (Ver.D)
distributed base stations (DBS3900),
f
BTS3900: uses BTS3900 i(Ver.B),
rt

cabinets.
C e

&
BTS3900L: uses a BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), or BTS3900L (Ver.D)
g
in uses BTS3900A (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), or BTS3900A (Ver.D)
cabinet.

i
BTS3900A:
n
r a
cabinets.
i T
e
 BTS3900AL: uses a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet.
a w  DBS3900: uses APM series cabinets, TMC series cabinets, battery cabinets,
Hu
OMB or OMB (Ver.C), IMB03 or IFS06. APM is short for advanced power module,
TMC is short for transmission cabinet, OMB is short for outdoor mini box, IMB is
short for indoor mini box, and IFS is short for indoor floor installation support.
 BTS3900C: consists of an RRU subrack and an OMB.

n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 BTS3900 configuration principles: Hu
Single-, Dual-, or
o n
ti
Maximum Number
ica
Triple-Mode Number of of BBUs Maximum Number of RF Modules
Cabinets
Base Station
ti f
e r If RFUs are configured but without RRUs,
2C
a maximum of 12 RFUs are supported.
Single- or dual-
&
1 If RFUs and RRUs are configured, a
mode base station
maximum of 12 RFUs and 6 RRUs are
g
in
supported.
i n If RFUs are configured but without RRUs,
r a a maximum of 12 RFUs are supported.

T
ei
If RFUs and RRUs are configured:
A BTS3900 using the BTS3900
a w Separate-MPT (Ver.B)/(Ver.C) cabinet supports a
Hu station
maximum of 12 RFUs and 6 RRUs. The
triple-mode base 2 2 DCDU supplying power to RRUs must be
installed on a wall.
A site using the Ver.D cabinet supports a
maximum of 12 RFUs, 6 high-power
RRUs, and 3 low-power RRUs. The
DCDU supplying power to RRUs can be
installed in the BTS3900 cabinet.
If RFUs are configured but without RRUs,
a maximum of 12 RFUs are supported.
Co-MPT triple-
2 1 If RFUs and RRUs are configured, a
mode base station
maximum of 12 RFUs and 6 RRUs are
supported.
n
atio
i c
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The BTS3900 cabinet supports three typesH
u
of power input: –48 V DC, +24 V DC,
ninto –48 V DC power for the BBU3900 and

and 110/220 V AC. If configured with suitable power modules, the cabinet can
o
ti varies with the type of power input
convert +24 V DC or 220 V AC power
a
ic
MRFUs. The structure of the cabinet
The BTS3900 cabinet thatifuses -48V DC power contains the RFU, FAN unit, BBU,
rt 2 U space is available in the cabinet for installing the

e
CSLPU is optional module
and DCDU-01. In addition,
&
user equipment. The
g
in and PSU (DC/DC)
 The BTS3900 cabinet that uses +24V DC power contains the RFU, FAN unit,
i n
BBU, DCDU-01,
TheaBTS3900

r cabinet that uses 110/220V AC power contains the RFU, FAN unit,
T DCDU-01, PSU (AC/DC), and PMU
ei 1U=44.45mm=1.75inch
BBU,
a w 
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The APM30H supplies AC power to componentsHu in the cabinet and other cabinets.
 The TMC11H can be used as a power
o ncabinet to supply DC power to components
in the cabinet or can be used as aitransmission
a t cabinet to provide space for
ic
tif providing backup power for a base station.
transmission equipment.

r
The IBBS is a battery cabinet,

Ce RFUs.
The RFC is used to house
 &
BTS3900A configuration principles:
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H
The BTS3900L, an indoor macro base station,
ucan be classified into BTS3900L
n the BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet is stacked
(Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D), in terms of cabinet versions.
The BTS3900L can use AC power o
ti
 when
upon an IMS06.
ic a
i f
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 A BTS3900AL, outdoor macro base station,
u the following cabinets:
Hsupports
n
BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet, IBBS700D, IBBS700T, and TMC11H (Ver.D).
o

a ti
BTS3900AL configuration principles:
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet Hu
n
 This cabinet is used in UMTS scenarios and consists of an OMB and an
o
ti
RRU subrack. The BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet can be supplied with AC or
ic a
DC power. The OMB is configured for housing the BBU and the RRU
if
subrack is used to install RRU.

r
BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinett
Ce
 This cabinet is used in UMTS or multimode scenarios and consists of an
&
OMB (Ver.C) and an RRU subrack. The BTS3900C cabinet can be
ng
supplied with AC or DC power. The OMB is configured for housing the
ni
BBU and the RRU subrack is used to install RRU.

a i
BTS3900C configuration principles
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 A DBS3900, a distributed base station, canH
u
be configured with various cabinets
nIMB03, IFS06, and INS12.

and racks, such as the APM30H series cabinets, TMC11H series cabinets, IBBS
o
ti cabinet and provides no backup power. It is
series cabinets, OMB series cabinets,
a

ic
used for the DBS3900 andifcannot be configured with an APM30 series power
The OMB cabinet is an outdoor power
e rt
C
cabinet.
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
r tif
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu natural heat dissipation, mute
Because of features such as flexible installation,
n
working mode, and fast network construction, the DBS3900 is applicable to
o
various scenarios outdoor
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
T r
e i
a w
Hu

n
atio
i c
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
i T
e
a w
Hu

MBTS GUL V100R013 Field Operation & P-0
Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The following table describes the various application H u scenarios in a triple-mode base
The application scenario in BBU3900: n
station. And this class focuses on discussing two scenarios, G[U*L] and G*U*L .

t io Types
Application scenario
ic a
t i f
Separate-MPT triple-mode base station •GU+L (BBUs not interconnected)
configured with two BBUs
e r •GL+U (BBUs not interconnected)
C
•GU+L (BBUs interconnected)
•GL+U (BBUs interconnected)
Separate-MPT g
& •GU+UL (BBUs interconnected)
n
•G[U*L]
i
base station configured
n
with one BBU •G[U*T]
a i •G[L*T]
r
T base station configured with one •G*U*L
•U[L*T]
ei Co-MPT
•G*L*T
w
BBU
u a Co-MPT base station configured with two •G*U*L
H
BBUs
 The application scenario in BBU3910:

Application scenario Types
Separate-MPT triple-mode base station •GU+L (BBUs interconnected)

configured with two BBUs •GL+U (BBUs interconnected)
Co-MPT triple-mode base station •G*U*L

configured with one BBU •G*U*T
•G*L*T
•U*L*T
 Note: G means GSM,U means UMTS, L means FDD LTE, T means TDD LTE.

Table 2 Typical configurations of a GUL base station restructured to a GU
Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Typical configurations of a GUL base stationH
u
can be restructured to a GULM base
MHz S1/1/1 10 MHz+NB-IoT 1800 MHznS1/1/1

station of GSM 1800 MHz S3/3/3+UMTS 2100 MHz S2/2/2 non-MIMO+LTE 1800
t io
Product Configurationc
i a
f
ti (per 3
Quantity
r
Ce
RF Multimode License (NB-IoT)
sector)
& 200 kHz carrier) 3

g
NB-IoT Carrier (per
i n License (NB-IoT) (per 1

UMPT)i n
UMPT Multimode
r a
i T Multimode License (NB-IoT) (per 1
e
UBBP
w
UBBP)
u a
H
NB-IoT User (per 100 NB-IoT Users) 1

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 BTS3900 System Overview Hu

o n
The BTS3900 consists of the BBU (BBU3900 or BBU3910), RFUs, and indoor
ti
macro cabinet. The BBU and RFUs are installed in the indoor macro cabinet.

c a
The RFUs are of three types: DRFUs and GRFUs in GSM mode, WRFUs in
i
if
UMTS mode, MRFUs in Dual mode.
BTS3900A System Overview
rt
e


C
The BTS3900A consists of the BBU(BBU3900 or BBU3910), RFUs, power
&
cabinet, and RF cabinet. The BBU is installed in the power cabinet, and the
ng
RFUs are installed in the RF cabinet.

ni
The RF modules are the same as the BTS3900.
rai

T
BTS5900 System Overview
ei  The BTS3900 consists of the BBU (BBU5900), RFUs, and indoor macro
a w cabinet. The BBU and RFUs are installed in the indoor macro cabinet.
Hu 
 The RF modules are the same as the BTS3900.
BTS5900A System Overview
 The BTS5900A consists of the BBU (BBU5900), RFUs, power cabinet, and
RF cabinet. The BBU is installed in the power cabinet, and the RFUs are
installed in the RF cabinet.
 The RF modules are the same as the BTS3900.

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 RRU5904: RRU5904 can support 8 carriers H
u
when working in UMTS only mode. Can
n
support 3 carriers when working in LTE(FDD) only mode. Can support 8 carriers of
o
RRU5501: RRU5501 can support 8ticarriers when working in UMTS only mode. Can
UMTS and 2 carriers of LTE(FDD) in UMTS&LTE(FDD) mode.

ic a when working in LTE(FDD) only mode ,4

f working in LTE(FDD) only mode. Can support 1
support 3 carriers(single Frequency)
r ticonfiguration
carriers(double Frequency) when
specification. ? C e
carriers of NB-IOT. Carriers in MSR mode please find in user
 NOTE: &
g
Thein
 For DBS3900, The BBU consists BBU3900 and BBU3910 in this document.
in DBS5900, The BBU consists BBU5900 in this document. The BBU5900

BBU3900 and BBU3910 have the same size and weight(<=15kg).

a
r and BBU3900 have the same size, and BBU5900 weighs(<=18kg) slightly
For
T
ei more than BBU3900.
a w  A GU+L base station is configured with two BBUs, in which one works in GU
Hu 
mode, the other works in LTE mode.
A G[U*L] base station is configured with one BBU, which works in triple-mode.
GTMUb) works in GSM mode, and the other (UMPT) works in UMTS and LTE
dual-mode.
 A G*U*L base station is configured with one BBU, which supports triple modes
using one UMPT.

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The typical configuration of BBU3900 boardsH
u
when in G[U*L] mode:
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
 C of BBU3900 boards when in G*U*L mode:
The typical configuration
&
g
n in
a i
T r
i typical configuration of BBU3910 boards when in G*U*L mode:
eThe
aw

Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 NOTE Hu

o n
The BBU3900 and BBU3910 have the same size and weight(<=15kg).
ti
 The BBU5900 and BBU3900 have the same size, and BBU5900
c a
weighs(<=18kg) slightly more than BBU3900.
i

r if
Boards supported by the BBU3900, BBU3910, and BBU5900 are different. For
t
details, see the related product documentation.
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The UMPT performs the following functions: H
u

o n
Performs configuration management, device management, performance
t i
monitoring, signaling message processing, and active/standby switchover.

a
c for the entire system.
Controls all boards in the system.
Provides the referenceiclock

i f
t and provides absolute time and 1 pulse per second

e r
Implements transmission
C
(PPS) reference clock source while being equipped with a single satellite card.

& with Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Internet Protocol (IP),
Provides four E1 ports and two FE/GE ports to implement basic transmission
g
in compliance
and n
i Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) during the initial configuration.
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 UMPTa1and UMPTa2 support GSM, UMTS,H
u
or LTE(NB-IoT),multimode including any
n or LTE(TDD)
mode.

o
ti LTE(FDD), LTE(NB-IoT) or LTE(TDD) ,Co-
UMPTa6 support LTE(FDD), LTE(NB-IoT),

c
UMPTb1/b2 can support GSM, UMTS,
a
MPT multimode including any imode.
i f
e rt
C
Board Transmission Mode Number Port Capacity Full/Half-
of ports Duplex
UMPTa1 (without a &
satellite card)
n g ATM over E1/T1 or
i
1 Four channels -
IP over E1/T1
a in a Transmission over
UMPTa2 (without
satellite r
T card) 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s,
i
FE/GE electrical 1 Full-duplex
e (without a
or 1000 Mbit/s
ports
a w
UMPTb1
Hu
satellite card)
Transmission over 100 Mbit/s or 1000 Full- or
1
UMPTb2 (with a GPS FE/GE optical ports Mbit/s half-duplex
satellite card)
IP over E1/T1 1 Four channels -
UMPTa6 (with a GPS Transmission over

10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s,
satellite card) FE/GE electrical 1 Full-duplex
or 1000 Mbit/s
ports
Transmission over 100 Mbit/s or 1000 Full- or
1
FE/GE optical ports Mbit/s half-duplex

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 UMPTb3 can support GSM, UMTS, LTE(FDD), H uLTE(NB-IoT), or LTE(TDD) ,Co-MPT
UMPTb9 can support GSM/UMTS/LTEn
multimode including any mode.

it o FDD/ LTE(NB-IoT), or LTE TDD/Co-MPT
multimode including any mode
ic a
Board
r tif Mode Number
Transmission Port Capacity Full/Half-
e
CTransmission
of ports Duplex
UMPTb3 (without a &

over
satellite card) g
FE/GE electrical 1 Full-duplex
n
or 1000 Mbit/s
i
na
ports
a
UMPTb9 (withi Transmission over 100 Mbit/s or 1000 Full- or
T r
GPS satellite card) FE/GE optical ports
1
Mbit/s half-duplex
ei
aw
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 UMPTe1/e2 can support GSM, UMTS, LTE(FDD), H u LTE(NB-IoT), LTE(TDD) , Co-MPT
n
multimode including any mode.
ti o
a
ic Mode Number Port Capacity Full/Half-
i f
Board
rt
Transmission
e
C
of ports Duplex
& Transmission over

UMPTe1 (without a
satellite card) n
g FE/GE electrical 2
Full-duplex
n i ports
or 1000 Mbit/s
i
UMPTe2a(with a
GPS T
r Transmission over
100 Mbit/s or 1000 Full- or
ei
satellite card) FE/GE/10GE optical 2
Mbit/s half-duplex
ports
aw
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 When a base station is configured with only oneH umain control board, services will be
n two main control boards working in
interrupted for an extended period of time if this main control board is faulty. To
o
i cold backup, the standby main control
support Cold Backup of Main Control Boards,
active/standby mode are required. tDuring
board is powered on but does notaback up the signaling and service data carried by
c
the active main control board.fiWhen a fault is detected on the active main control
r i
t boards switch roles. Services carried on the original
e
board, the active and standby
C
active board are interrupted but automatically recover within 4 to 7 minutes. This
&
improves base station reliability.
g
The main control boards work in cold backup mode. Only static data (for example,
inmain

configuration data, software data, and logs) must be synchronized between the active
i n
a
and standby control boards. Operating data, which requires real-time
T rbackup mode.
synchronization in hot backup mode, does not need to be synchronized in real time in
i transmission cables are required, with one connected to the main control board
cold
eTwo
aw

in slot 6 and the other connected to the main control board in slot 7.
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The positions of DIP switches on the UMPTaH
u
series boards is as shown.

o nmode.
Each DIP switch has four bits. The DIP switches have the following functions:
ti
 SW1 is used to select the E1/T1
SW2 is used to select thea

fic grounding mode of E1/T1 transmission.
r t i
C e
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 When a GBTS configured with a GTMUb is to H u
be evolved to a co-MPT multimode
n as an interface board which only

base station, a UMPT is required to serve as the main control board shared by
o
i baseband unit to RF modules.
multiple modes. The original GTMUb serves
provides CPRI ports for connectingtthe
ic a
i f
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Besides the preceding three indicators, the GTMUH u provides some other indicators
n
indicating the connection status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, CPRI port,
o
tithe
and commissioning port. There is no silkscreens for these indicators on the GTMU
a
panel, and these indicators are near corresponding ports. The following figure
i f ic
shows the positions of the indicators for ports on the GTMU panels.
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 DIP switch SW1 Hu
DIP Bit Setting Description
o n
ti
Switch
1 2 3 4
ic a
f E1 resistance is set to 120 ohms.
S1 ON ON - - The E1 resistance is set to 75 ohms.
OFF ON -
rt - iThe
ON OFF -
C e- The T1 resistance is set to 100 ohms.
&
ON ON OFF OFF The default setting is used.
g
in
 DIP switch SW2
n
i Bit Setting
DIP
r a Description
i T 1
Switch
2 3 4
e S2
w
OFF OFF OFF OFF All the bits are set to OFF by default in all
u a modes.
H
ON ON ON ON When the four E1 RX links using 75 ohms have
error bits, all bits of SW2 must be set to ON to
rectify the faults on the E1 links.
ON ON ON ON The default setting is used.

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

Hu slot assignment:
In a G[U*L] base station, the principle for BBU3900
Board Type Board
o n Maximum Slot Assignment Sequence (the Leftmost Slot Has the
ti
Quantity Highest Priority)
ic a
f
Baseband processing board in UBBP 2 Slot 3 Slot 2
multimode
rt i
mode
C e
Baseband processing board in GSM UBBPd_G 2 Slot 1 Slot 0 Slot 4
&
Baseband processing board in UBBPd_U 4 Slot 3 Slot 0 Slot 1 Slot 4 - -
g
UMTS mode
n in
Baseband processing board in LTE UBBPd_L 5 Slot 3 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 0 Slot 4 -
FDD mode
a i base station, the principle for BBU3900 slot assignment:


T r
In a G*U*L
ei
Board Type Board Maximum Slot Assignment Sequence (the Leftmost Slot Has the
awBaseband processing board UBBP 2

Hu
Slot 3 Slot 2 - - - -
in multimode
Baseband processing board UBBPd_ 2 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 0 Slot 4 Slot 5 -

in GSM mode G
Baseband processing board UBBPd_ 5 Slot 3 Slot 0 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 4 Slot 5
in UMTS mode U
Baseband processing board UBBPd_ 5 Slot 2 Slot 0 Slot 1 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5
in LTE FDD mode L

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H
Note: The BBU slot assignment in an LTE NB-IoT
u base station is the same as that in
n
an LTE FDD base station.
o
ti for BBU3910 slot assignment:

c a
In a G*U*L base station, the principles
Board fiMaximum Slot Assignment Sequence (the Leftmost Slot Has the
Board Type
i
rt Quantity Highest Priority)
Baseband processing board e
CUBBP 2 Slot 3 Slot 2 Slot 1 Slot 0 Slot 4 Slot 5
& UBBPd_ 2
in multimode
n g
Baseband processing board Slot 3 Slot 2 Slot 1 Slot 0 Slot 4 Slot 5
in GSM mode
n i G
a i board UBBPd_
Baseband processing 6 Slot 3 Slot 2 Slot 1 Slot 0 Slot 4 Slot 5
T r
in UMTS mode U
in e
i processing board UBBPd_
Baseband 6 Slot 3 Slot 2 Slot 1 Slot 0 Slot 4 Slot 5
aw
LTE FDD mode L
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The following table lists the RATs supportedH
u
by the UBBP.
o n
a ti
ic
Board Name Single mode Multimode
i f
rt
UBBPd1 GSM or UMTS GU co-BBP
UBBPd2
C
GSM or UMTS e GU co-BBP
&
g
UBBPd3 GSM, UMTS, LTE (NB-IoT), or LTE (FDD) GU, LM, or GL co-BBP
n in
i
UBBPd4 GSM, UMTS, LTE (NB-IoT), LTE (TDD), or LTE (FDD) GU, LM, or GL co-BBP
r a
T
UBBPd5 GSM, UMTS, LTE (NB-IoT), or LTE (FDD) GU, LM or GL co-BBP
ei
UBBPd6 GSM, UMTS, LTE (NB-IoT), LTE (TDD), or LTE (FDD) GU, LM, UM, GL, or GUL co-BBP
a w
Hu UBBPd9 LTE(TDD) -
UBBPe1 UMTS, LTE (NB-IoT), or LTE (FDD) LM co-BBP
UBBPe2 UMTS, LTE (NB-IoT), or LTE (FDD) LM co-BBP
UBBPe3 UMTS, LTE (NB-IoT), or LTE (FDD) UL, LM, or UM co-BBP
UBBPe4 UMTS, LTE (NB-IoT), LTE (TDD), or LTE (FDD) UL, LM, or UM co-BBP
UBBPei UMTS, , LTE(TDD), orLTE (FDD) UL co-BBP
UBBPem LTE(TDD) -

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The WCDMA baseband processing unit (WBBP) canube installed in a BBU3900 to support

H
n slot assignment:
UMTS mode.

o
tiAssignment Sequence (the Leftmost Slot Has the
In a G*U*L Base Station, the principle for BBU3900
Board Type Board Maximum Slot a

Quantity icHighest Priority)
5 rt
if Slot 3 Slot 0 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 4 Slot 5
Baseband
processing
WBBPf
WBBPd C e
WBBPb &
board in
ng
UMTS mode
i
inbase station, the principle for BBU3900 slot assignment:
WBBPa
a
r Board Maximum Slot Assignment Sequence (the Leftmost Slot Has the
T
 In a G[U*L]
ei
Board Type
wBaseband WBBPf 4
a
u processing Slot 3 Slot 0 Slot 1 Slot 4 - -
H board in
WBBPd
UMTS WBBPb
mode
WBBPa

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H u3 of a BBU3900 could transfer the
The baseband processing board in slot 2 or slot
n
received CPRI data to other boards.
ti o
ic a
i f
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu processing boards to share the
HEI port is used to connect to other baseband

baseband resources.
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H
Note: An LTE NB-IoT base station does not support
u the LBBPc. The BBU slot
n
assignment for other boards in an LTE NB-IoT base station is the same as that in an
LTE FDD base station.
ti o
a
ic Slot for

i f
In a G[U*L] base station, the principle BBU slot assignment:
t Highest Priority) Sequence (the Leftmost Slot Has the
Board Type Board
r
Maximum Assignment
Ce5
Quantity
&
Baseband LBBPc Slot 3 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 0 Slot 4 -
processing
g
LBBPd
in
board in LTE
n
mode
a i
ar
In T
i
 G*U*L base station, the principle for BBU slot assignment:
e
Board Type Board Maximum Slot Assignment Sequence (the Leftmost Slot Has the
a w Quantity Highest Priority)
Hu
Baseband LBBPc 5 Slot 2 Slot 0 Slot 1 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5
processing
board in LTE LBBPd
mode

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 On the lower left side of the LBBPd1, LBBPd2, H uLBBPd3 and LBBPd4, there are
n
silkscreens LBBPd1, LBBPd2, and LBBPd3, respectively, indicating their board types.
 Types of LBBP:
ti o
c a
fiFDD or LTE(TDD) _
Board Single Mode Mutimode
LBBPc
t i
r•LTE FDD, LTE(NB-IoT) •LM co-BBP
•LTE
LBBPd1 or LBBPd3
e
C •LTE(FDD), LTE(NB-IoT), •LM co-BBP
& or LTE(TDD)
LBBPd2
n g
LBBPd4
i •LTE TDD _
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The HEI port is Reserved. Hu
o n
ati
ic
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The FAN performs the following functions:: Hu

o n
It dissipates heat from other boards in the BBU.
ti
 It controls the speed of fans, monitors the temperature of fans, and reports the
c a
status, temperature and in-position signals of fans.
i

rt if
The FANc ,FANd ,FANe，FANf provides a read/write electronic label.
e
 FANc panel FANd panel FANe panel
FANf panel
C
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The universal power and environment interface unit u

H (UPEU) is a power module in a BBU3900
UPEUe can be installed in a BBU5900, but n
or BBU3910 or BBU5900. The UPEUd can be installed in a BBU3900 or BBU3910, The
o
other types of UPEU can only be installed in a
BBU3900.
a ti
ic and UPEUe convert the -48 V DC input power into +12
 The UPEU has the following functions:
t
The UPEUa, UPEUc, UPEUd
i f
r

e
V DC power.

C
The UPEUb converts the +24 V DC input power into +12 V DC power.

& with each transmitting four channels of Boolean signals. The Boolean
The UPEU provides two ports with each transmitting one channel of RS485 signals
g
and two ports
inof the UPEU

signals can only be dry contact or open collector (OC) signals.
n
i
Board Output Power Backup Mode
Specifications
a


UPEUa
T r
UPEUe的电源接口和电源线和UPEUa/b/c/d是不一样的
The output power of a UPEUa is 300 W. 1+1 backup
ei
UPEUc The output power of a UPEUc board is 360 W, and the output power of two In 1+1 backup mode, the
w
UPEUc boards is 650 W. output power of two UPEUc
a
boards is 360 W.
Hu UPEUd The output power of a UPEUd is 650 W. 1+1 backup
 Note:
 It is not recommended that the UPEUa and UPEUc boards are configured in one BBU.
When the power required by the BBU exceeds the power specification of the BBU:
 If the BBU has been configured with one or two UPEUa boards, replace the
boards with two UPEUc boards.

Maintenance
 If the BBU has been configured with one UPEUc board, add a second UPEUc
board.
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
r tif
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
modes and frequency bands supported Huby MRFU modules
o n
Type Frequency Receive Frequency
it Frequency Working Mode IBW (MHz)
Transmit
a
Band Band (MHz)
(MHz)
c
fi 935
Band (MHz)
MRFU V1 P-GSM 900 890 to 915
r t i to 960 GSM, UMTS, GU  GSM: 15
e
1800 1710 to 1755 1805 to 1850 GSM, LTE FDD, GL

Cto 1890
1740 to 1785 1835 to 1880 UMTS/LTE
FDD: 20
&1870 to 1910
1900 1850 1930 to 1970 GSM, UMTS
850 g 824 to 846.5

1950 to 1990
 GU/GL: 15
MRFU V2
n in 869 to 891.5 GSM, UMTS, LTE 22.5
i
FDD, GU, UL
r a E-GSM 900 880 to 915

P-GSM 900 890 to 915 935 to 960 GSM, UMTS, LTE 20
i T 925 to 960 FDD, GU, GL, LTE
e
(NB-IoT), GM, UM
aw
1800 1710 to 1770 1805 to 1865 GSM, LTE FDD, GL 20
1725 to 1785 1820 to 1880
Hu
1710 to 1785 1805 to 1880
MRFU V2a 900 885 to 910 930 to 955 GSM, UMTS, LTE 25
FDD, GU, GL
1800 1710 to 1755 1805 to 1850 GSM, LTE FDD, GL 25
MRFU V6 1800 1710 to 1785 1805 to 1880 GSM, LTE FDD, GL 35
P-GSM 900 890 to 915 935 to 960 GSM, UMTS, LTE 25
E-GSM 900 880 to 915 925 to 960 FDD, GU, GL

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
An MRFU performs the following functions: Hu
n
 Performs digital up-convert on intermediate frequency (IF) signals on the transmitting
o
ti
channel, and modulates baseband signals to RF signals. After being filtered and
ic a
amplified, the RF signals are sent by the duplex filter to the antenna.
if
 Receives RF signals from the antenna system and then down-converts the received
rt
signals to IF signals. After being amplified, analog-to-digital converted, digital down-
Ce
converted, matched filtered, and digital automatic gain control (DAGC) processed, the
IF signals are sent to the BBU for further processing.
 Controls power. &
i
 Tests the VSWR.
ng
n
ai
 Manages the TMA power feeding and RET antennas.
T r
 Controls the DPD feedback.
ei
 Generates the CPRI clock, recovers the CPRI clock from out-of-synchronization, and
a w detects alarms.
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 RF Unit handles modulation and demodulation H ubetween baseband signals and RF
The MRFU is a multi-carrier RF filteringnunit. One MRFU supports a 6 TRXs in GSM
signals, data processing, and combining-distribution.

t iomode or 6 TRXs in GSM+UMTS mode or 1

Only mode or 4 TRXs in UMTS Only
carriers in LTE FDD only modecor
i a6 carriers in GSM+LTE FDD mode.
r tif
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The RRU performs the following functions: Hu

o n
Receives downlink baseband data from the BBU and sends uplink baseband
ti
data to the BBU.

c a
Receives RF signals from the antenna system, down-converts the signals to
i
if
intermediate frequency (IF) signals, amplifies the IF signals, performs analog-
rt
to-digital conversion, and up-converts RF signals to the transmit (TX) band.

Ce
Multiplexes receive (RX) and TX signals on the RF channel so that these
&
signals can share the same antenna channel, and filters the RX and TX
signals.

i ng
Provides a built-in Bias Tee (BT). The built-in BT couples RF signals and OOK
n
ai
signals and transmits them through one or several TX/RX ports(depends on
T r different model) .
ei
 The RRU can work with the Monitoring Extension Box (MEB). The MEB can
transmit external RS-485 communication signals and dry node monitoring
a w signals into the RRU, implementing information monitoring and reporting. For
Hu 
details about the MEB, see MEB User Guide.
When an RRU is equiped with an AC/DC power module, the RRU and the
power module togther are called an AC RRU.

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The fan box regulates the temperature at theH
u
air inlet of the cabinet and in the fan box.
n
It can adjust the rotation speed of the fans to implement ventilation and dissipation for
the cabinet.
i o
The fan box performs the followingtfunctions:

a
ic and dissipation for the cabinet

i f
Provides forced ventilation
t of adjusting the rotation speed of the fans: adjustment

e
Supports two modes r
C
based on the temperature and adjustment controlled by the central processing
unit
&
g
Communicates with the central processing unit to report alarms and the
in rotation

n
adjusted speed of the fans based on the temperature to the central
a i
processing unit
T r Stops the rotation of the fans when the ambient temperature is low
i fan box is configured with one NFCB and four fans.


eANFCB
a w

Hu  The NFCB is located in the fan box and consists of the control unit and the
power supply unit. The power supply unit filters and converts the -48 V DC
power input, and distributes power to the control unit and each fan.
 The NFCB detects the temperature at the air inlet and reports it to the central
processing unit. The rotation speed of the fans can be regulated by the central
processing unit or adjusted automatically based on the temperature.
 Fans
 The fans perform forced heat dissipation for the entire cabinet.

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

u
A maximum of two BTS3900 cabinets can beHconfigured for a single site. The
cabinets. If there is only one cabinet at n

monitoring system described in this part is applicable to the configuration of two
o
ti is not configured at the site, neglect the device
the site, neglect cabinet 1 and its cable
a
connection. If any device in the figure
and its cable connection
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The BTS3900 cabinet (+24 V DC) is configured H uwith the DC/DC power system. The
n port through interconnection terminals. The
alarms reported include dry contact alarms. The ALM ports on the two cabinets are
o
monitoring system for the BTS3900ticabinet (+24 V DC) are shown
connected to the same dry contact alarm
ic a can be configured for a single site. The

monitoring system describedifin this part is applicable to the configuration of two
 A maximum of two BTS3900 cabinets
e rt cabinet at the site, neglect cabinet 1 and its cable

cabinets. If there is only one
C in the figure is not configured at the site, neglect the device
connection. If any device
&
and its cable connection.
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The monitoring system for the BTS3900 cabinet H u(AC) configured with the PMU is
n be configured for a single site. The
shown.
 A maximum of two BTS3900 cabinets can
o
monitoring system described in thistipart is applicable to the configuration of two
ic a at the site, neglect cabinet 1 and its cable
f figure is not configured at the site, neglect the device
cabinets. If there is only one cabinet
connection. If any device in ithe
and its cable connection. rt
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

u
The different PMU module can be installed inHthe different subrack or cabinet.

o n
The PMU 11A can be used in BTS3900(Ver.D), BTS3900L(Ver.D),
it APM30H(Ver.D_A2),
BTS3900AL(Ver.A), OMB(Ver.C), BTS3900(Ver.D_A), BTS3900(Ver.D_B),
APM30H(Ver.D), APM30H(Ver.D_A1),
ic a APM30H(Ver.D_B),
f
BTS3012(Ver.D_Z), BTS3012AE(Ver.D_Z) cabinets and IMS06 subrack.
PMU 01B can be installed t ini BTS3900(Ver.B), BTS3900(Ver.C), APM30H(Ver.B),

e r
PMU (EPMU03) can C
APM30H(Ver.C), and IMB03 cabinets.
& on a PMU 01B

 be used in OMB and IMB03 cabinets.
g
 Ports and indicators
n in (1) PMU status indicator (2) Power test ports
a i
r
(3) Circuit breaker for (4) COM port
T
storage batteries
ei
(5) COM_485 port (6) COM_OUT port
a w (7) COM_IN port (8) Backplane port
Hu
 Ports on the PMU (EPMU03)

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 A power supply unit (PSU) (R4850G2) can be H u
used in BTS3900(Ver.D),
n
BTS3900L(Ver.D), BTS3900AL(Ver.A), OMB(Ver.C), BTS3900(Ver.D_A),
o
ti BTS3012AE(Ver.D_Z) cabinets and IMS06
BTS3900(Ver.D_B), APM30H(Ver.D), APM30H(Ver.D_A1), APM30H(Ver.D_A2),
a
APM30H(Ver.D_B), BTS3012(Ver.D_Z),
subrack.
A PSU (R4850G2) performsif
ic

Converts 110 V AC r
t the following functions:

e
C against overcurrent, overvoltage, and overtemperature for its DC
Provides protection
or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC and adjusts the output voltage.
&

outputs.
n g
Dissipates heat using its built-in fans.
i unit (PSU) (PSU4850A) can be used in BTS3900(Ver.C) and


i n
A power supply
r a supply unit (PSU) (EPW30-48A) can be used in BTS3900(Ver.B),

APM30H(Ver.C) cabinets.

i T
A power
eA power supply unit
APM30H(Ver.B), and IMB03 cabinets.
a w
 (PSU) (GERM4815T) can be used in OMB and IMB03 cabinets.
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The different types of the DCDU module canH
u
be used in the specific cabinet.
 DCDU-12A can be used in
o n
ti (25A)-48 V DC outputs.
BTS3900(Ver.D),BTS3900L(Ver.D),BTS5900(Ver.A),BTS5900L(Ver.A),RFC(Ver.D),
RFC(Ver.E) cabinets. It provides ten
ic a
i f
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 IP over E1/T1 Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 IP over FE/GE Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H u fiber optic cables and single-
CPRI fiber optic cables are classified into multimode
A multimode fiber optic cable connects n

mode fiber optic cables. They transfer CPRI signals.

it o aoptic
BBU to an RRU or connects two RRUs. The
a
maximum length of the multimode fiber cable between a BBU and an RRU is
ic fiber optic cable between two RRUs has a fixed
length of 10 m (32.81 ft). if
150 m (492.12 ft), and the multimode
e rtcable can be divided into two types: single-mode fiber

Ca BBU to an RRU or connecting two RRUs (shortened to
 The single-mode fiber optic
optic cable connecting
&single-mode fiber optic cable) and single-mode fiber optic cable
directly connected
connecting angODF to a BBU or RRU (shortened to single-mode pigtail). The
i n of the single-mode pigtail between an ODF and a BBU is 20 m
n
maximum length
ai70 m (229.66 ft).

(65.62 ft). The maximum length of the single-mode pigtail between an ODF and an
RRUris
i T
e
 NOTE:
aw
 The ODF is an outdoor transfer box for fiber optic cables, which interconnects
Hu
the single-mode pigtail and trunk single-mode fiber optic cable.
 The ODF and trunk single-mode fiber optic cable are provided by the customer
and must comply with the ITU-T G.652 standard.
 A multimode fiber optic cable is used together with a multimode optical
module, and a single-mode pigtail is used together with a single-mode optical

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Exterior: Hu

o n
Multimode fiber optic cable or directly connected single-mode fiber optic cable:
ti
The cable has a DLC connector at each end, as shown in the following figure
ic a
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 NOTE: Hu

o n
If the RFUs are interconnected through the inter-RFU RF signal cable, the RF
ti
jumper is connected to the lower RF port on the RFU.

c a
The RF jumpers are lead into the cabinet through the cable holes.
i

r if
The DIN connectors of the RF jumpers are linked to the ports labeled ANT on
t
the panels of the RFUs. Figure shows the RF jumper connections in a single
Ce
cabinet, and shows the RF jumper connections in stacked cabinets.
&
 Use a torque wrench to tighten the DIN connector until the fastening torque
ng
reaches 25 N·m to 35 N·m.
ni
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 -48 V DC Power:
H u
between the DCDU and the FANnunit, P8: power cable between the DCDU
 P1-P6: power cable between the DCDU and the RFU, P7: power cable
t io input power cable (-48 V).

a
and the BBU, P11-P12: BTS3900
+24 V DC Power:
i c
if the FAN

r tand
P1-P6: power cable between the DCDU and the RFU, P7: power cable
e
between the DCDU unit, P8: power cable between the DCDU
C BTS3900 input power cable (+24 V).
and the BBU, P11-P12: power cable between the PSU (DC/DC) and the
220 V AC Power:&
DCDU, P25-P28:

n gpower cable between the DCDU and the RFU, P7: power cable

i
P1-P6:
n the BBU,
i
between the DCDU and the FAN unit, P8: power cable between the DCDU
aDCDU, L, N: BTS3900
T r and P11-P12: power Cable between the PSU (AC/DC) and the
ei
input power cable (220 V). 13: feeds AC power into
cabinets
a w
Hu
+24V DC 220 V AC

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 -48 V DC Power:
H u
between the DCDU and the FANnunit, P7.1,P7.2: power cable between the
 P0-P5: power cable between the DCDU and the RFU, P6: power cable
t io
a
DCDU and the BBU
ic
r tif
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu
+24 V DC 220 V AC

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

Hu For details about how to log in
Replacing boards involves MML command execution.
n
to the LMT, see 3900 & 5900 Series Base Station LMT User Guide.
ti o
ic a
i f
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 For an eGBTS, run the BLK GLOCELL command
H u on the eGBTS to block all cells
under the base station.
o n
ticommand on the eNodeB to block all cells under
 For a NodeB, run the BLK ULOCELL command on the NodeB to block all cells under
a
the base station.
 For an eNodeB, run the BLK CELL
i f ic
rt
the base station.
C e
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Perform the following detail operations locally: u

H
n
 Receive the instruction from the remote engineer and prepare to replace the
board.
t o
ia pair of ESD gloves.
a
 Put on an ESD wrist strap or
f ic cable from
Record all the cable connections on the panel of the module to be replaced.
ti protection transfer

r
 Remove the transmission the UMPT. If a surge protection board is
 Loosen the two

e
configured, the surge cable also needs to be removed.
C M3 screws on the panel, raise the ejector lever, and pull out
the UMPT.
&
g
in theonnewtheboard,
 Set the DIP switches on the new board to the same as the settings of the DIP
switches replaced board.
n
ipanel to 0.6 N·m (5.31lower
a
Install the ejector levers, tighten the screws on the board
r

T Check the status of the new board by observing the status of indicators.
lbf·
in.), and reconnect the cables.
ei 
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H
n
board.
t o
a
f ic from theonUBBP,
Record all the cable connections the panel of the module to be replaced.
i

Loosen the two e r t

Remove the CPRI cables as shown in the following figure.
the UBBP. C
 M3 screws on the panel, raise the ejector lever, and pull out
Install the&
new board, lower the ejector levers, tighten the screws on the board
g board starts up, wait 15 minutes. Then determine whether the board

nthe
panel to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.), and reconnect the cables.
i
iisnfunctional according to the status of the indicators on the board.
 After
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu

NodeB WCDMA V100R013 Field Operation & P-81
Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Prerequisites: Hu

o n
To confirm the type of a faulty optical module, perform the following steps:

ati
For a GBTS, run the DSP BTSOPTMODULE command on the U2000 to
c
query the type of the optical module. For an eGBTS, NodeB, or eNodeB, run
if i
the DSP SFP command on the U2000 to query the type of the optical module.
rt
e
 Identify the type of the faulty module according to the values of Rate,
C
Wavelength, and Transmission modequeried by the command, and obtain
&
an optical module of the same type as the faulty one according to the label on
ng
the new module. The following figure shows the label on an optical module.
n i
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu
(1) Maximum rate (2) Wavelength (3) Transmission mode

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H
n
board.
t o
a
f ic from theonUBBP,
i

Loosen the two e r t

Remove the CPRI cables as shown in the following figure.
the UBBP. C
 M3 screws on the panel, raise the ejector lever, and pull out
Install the&
new board, lower the ejector levers, tighten the screws on the board
g board starts up, wait 15 minutes. Then determine whether the board

nthe
panel to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.), and reconnect the cables.
i
iisnfunctional according to the status of the indicators on the board.
 After
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Replacing the UPEU disrupts the power supplyuto the BBU, and accordingly disrupts

H
services carried by the BBU. Therefore, the UPEU should be replaced within 10
minutes.
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H
n
board.
t o
a
f ic UPEU toonpower
i

r t
Turn off the switch on the off the UPEU.

Loosen the two

e
C M3 screws on the panel, and pull out the UPEU.
Remove the power cable, monitoring cable, and alarm cable from the UPEU.
Install the&

to 0.6 g
 new board, lower the ejector lever, tighten the screws on the board
n
N·m (5.31 lbf·in.), and reconnect the cables to the new board.
n i on the switch on the UPEU to power on the UPEU.

i
 Turn
r

a Check the status of the new board by observing the status of indicators.
i T
e
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Note: Hu

o n
Replacing a FAN 03C interrupts heat dissipation of the cabinet and therefore
ti
may cause overtemperature alarms. Moreover, an excessively high
ic a
temperature affects the services of the base station.
if
 It takes about 20 minutes to replace a fan box.
rt
Use the handle to replace the module. The handle is placed in the slot on the
e

C
upper right inside the cabinet door.
&
 Procedure:
ng
 Put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
ni
Remove the EPC4 connector from the LOAD6 port on the DCDU-12A.
ai

r
 Label the cables on the panel of the FAN, and remove the cables.
T
ei
 Loosen the captive screws on both sides of the adjustable cable trough, and
lift the adjustable cable trough.
a w  Remove the four M6 screws from the FAN, and use the handle to pull it
Hu outwards till one-third of its length. Support the FAN with one hand, and pull it
out of the cabinet with the other hand.
 Insert a new FAN, and tighten the four screws on the FAN.
 Reinstall the adjustable cable trough on the original position, and secure the
captive screws on both sides of it.
 Reconnect the removed cables to the ports on the panel of the new FAN
according to the cable connection record.
 Reconnect the EPC4 connector on the FAN power cable to the LOAD6 port
on the DCDU-12A.

Maintenance
 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Note:
H u
n
 This section describes the procedure for replacing a DCDU-12A (shortened to
DCDU in this section).
A DCDU supplies power to tthe o
i RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly. Replacing a
DCDU interrupts servicesacarried by these modules.

i f ic to replace the DCDU.

rt
 It takes about 20 minutes
C e
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Procedure of replacing a PSU: Hu

o n
Use a flat-head screwdriver to loosen the two M2.5 captive screws on the
ti
ejector lever of the PSU.

c a
Gently pull the ejector lever to release the buckle of the PSU from the
i
if
subrack.
rt
Hold the buckle with your palms up, and remove the PSU from the slot.
e


C
Use a flat-head screwdriver to loosen the two M2.5 captive screws on the
&
ejector lever of the new PSU.
ng
 Gently pull the ejector lever to release the buckle of the new PSU from the
i
subrack.
n
ai
Gently slide the new PSU into the corresponding subrack along the guide
r

T
rails.
ei
 Push back the ejector lever.
a w  Use a flat-head screwdriver to tighten the screws on the ejector lever of the
Hu 
new PSU until the tightening torque reaches 0.3 N·m (2.66 lbf·in.).
Check the status of indicators on the new PSU to determine whether the new
PSU is working properly. When the new PSU is working properly, the power
indicator is steady green, and the protection indicator and alarm indicator are
steady off.

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Note: Hu
 This module is hot-swappable.
o n
ti
 Replacing the PMIU does not affect the services.

ic a
Replacing the PSU (AC/DC) causes power-off of the cabinet and thus disrupts
rt if
all services carried by the base station.
e
 Replacing a PMIU takes about 5 minutes.
C
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H
Replacing an RFU interrupts the services carriedu on the RFU.
The electronic labels of boards or modules to be replaced are determined offline on
n

io an RFU, which involves disconnecting the

the M2000 or online on the LMT to determine the model of the boards or modules.
cables, removing screws, removingt the faulty RFU, inserting a new RFU, tightening
 It takes about 6 to 10 minutes to replace
ic ato the new RFU, and loading the software.

tif
the screws, connecting the cables
r
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 NOTE:
H u
n be different.
 RRUs and attachment plates in this section are only for reference. The actual
RRUs and attachment plates may
o
i the replacement but their attachment plates
RRUs are in the same type tafter
a

may be different.
i f ic the services carried on the RRU.
rt
 Replacing an RRU interrupts
C e
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 This describes the maintenance items in theH
u
MBTS equipment room. The
n protective devices, and dustproof

maintenance items consist of the environment alarm, temperature, humidity,
ti o
illumination, sockets, indoor air conditioner,
a
condition.
f ic devices is as following:
The reference standard of protective
rti pressure

 The foam extinguisher or dry powder fire extinguisher is installed in the

equipment room.eThe
requirements.C
and validity period of the extinguisher meet the
There are&
ng
 no rats, ants, flying insects, and other risks.
i
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 This describes the maintenance items of theH
u
MBTS power supply and the grounding
n
system. The maintenance items consist of power cables, voltage, PGND cables, earth
resistance, and battery.
o
ti cables is as following:
 The reference standard of the PGND
a
c connected. The power cables are not
The PGND cables are isecurely

i f
rt proper anti-corrosion
deteriorating and their
are not corrodedeand
connection points are not corroded. The ground bars
C of the storage batteries and rectifier stay is as following:

measures are applied.
& of the storage batteries meets the requirements and these

 The reference standard
g
 The capacity
n
stayi meet the requirements.
storage batteries are securely connected. The specifications of the rectifier
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 BTS5900/L cabinet maintenance items pertain H uto fans, air filters, cabinet surface,
n
locks and doors on cabinet, cabinet cleanliness, fan boxes cleanliness, board LEDs,
and ESD wrist strap.
ti o
ic a
i f
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

Hu
The reference standard of the cables is as following:

o n
The connectors of each cable are intact and properly linked without corrosion
it than 65°C
or rust. The connectors are waterproofed without condensation. The ambient
i a
temperature should not be higher
c sheaths are intact.
(149°F). The power cables are
f
not deteriorating and their
r ti
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

MBTS GUL V100R013 Software Commissioning P-0
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 For details about how to install the hardwareH
u
of a base station, see the corresponding
PPT slides.
o n
t i or limitations on a specific feature, see the
adescription.
 For details about special requirements
ic
tif data configuration, see 3900 & 5900 Series Base
corresponding feature parameter

r
For details about how to perform
Ce Guide.
Station Initial Configuration
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Compare and contrast different commissioning Huscenarios
Commissioning Scenarios Description n
io
Deploy tone or more NEs that can be managed and
Newly deployed base
i c a by the U2000.
station
f that can be managed and maintained by the U2000
ti•NEs
maintained
e r are as follows: GBTS: NE providing GSM services

C •BTS3900 WCDMA/BTS5900 WCDMA: NEs providing
& UMTS services (They are named NodeB in this slide.)
n g •BTS3900 LTE/BTS5900 LTE: NEs providing LTE services
n i (They are named eNodeBs in this slide.)
a i •BTS3900: co-MPT base station, eGBTS whose main
T r control board is a GTMUb.
ei •BTS5900: co-MPT base station.
w
In a single-mode base station or a co-MPT base station,
u a there is only one NE and therefore you are required to
H
perform only one commissioning task. In a separate-
MPT multimode base station, there may be two or more
NEs and therefore you must perform the commissioning
task for each NE.
Mode newly added to a Add NEs of one or more modes to a deployed separate-
separate-MPT multimode MPT multimode base station.
base station
Mode newly added to a Add services of another mode to a deployed co-MPT
co-MPT base station base station.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

u
Autodiscovery: The OM channel between theHbase station and U2000 is set up
n
through a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) process.
o
t i between the U2000 and base station is set
a
 Autoconfiguration: After the OM channel
up, the base station enters the c
update the configurations. if
i autoconfiguration phase to upgrade the software and
e rt quality testing: The antenna VSWR test, crossed pair


C
Installation and deployment
&
connection detection, and intermodulation interference test are performed to check
equipmentiin
g
the installation and deployment quality of the third party and ensure that the
nthe base station meets the engineering installation requirements.
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu data configuration files, and
NOTE: A USB flash drive must contain software,
n
commissioning licenses for a base station (When LTE Services are to be Enabled).
o
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 In USB+U2000-based commissioning mode,H
u
if the data configuration file is stored on
n
the USB flash drive, the base station and the U2000 are automatically bound;
o
ti
otherwise, they have to be bound manually.
a
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The UTRP or UTRPc working with the SRAN7.0 Husoftware or earlier versions cannot
n
be used in base stations to be applied with the software of SRAN8.0 or later versions.
UMPTa1 boards or UMPTb1 boardsio

a t mode, such as BTS3900 WCDMA and
loaded with the SRAN7.0 software are used only
f
for deploying NEs containing the
BTS3900. UMPTa2 boards iloaded
ic with the SRAN7.0 software are used only for
UMTS
t LTE FDD mode, such as BTS3900 LTE and BTS3900.

rthe
e
C are removed from versions later than SRAN7.0.
deploying NEs containing
&
The preceding constraints
g
If UMPT cold backup is used, ensure that both UMPT boards are correctly installed,
in check is performed, and transmission resources required by both UMPT

n
the power-on
boards iare available before starting the commissioning task.
r a

i T cold backup is used, if the software version of the UMPT board is SRAN9.0
If UMPT
eor a later version, you can configure data for UMPT cold backup during initial
a w
Hu configuration, and then commission the base station; if the software version of the
UMPT board is earlier than SRAN9.0, you need to commission the base station and
then configure data for UMPT cold backup.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 A DHCP client and a DHCP server on the same HuLayer 2 (L2) network can directly
n by Media Access Control (MAC) addresses
communicate with each other. The L2 network is a subnet in which broadcast IP
o
ti
packets can be exchanged and forwarded
and VLAN IDs. An example is theaEthernet or a VLAN of the Ethernet.
ic
The procedure is as follows:ifAfter the base station is powered on, it broadcasts a

t the BS ID. The DHCP server then sends configuration
rwith
DHCPDISCOVER packet e
C station based on the BS ID.
&
information to the base
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The procedure is as follows: The DHCP relay
u converts DHCP packets
Hagent
nunicast response packets to the DHCP relay
broadcast by the base station to unicast packets and routes the unicast packets to the
o
DHCP server. The DHCP server sends
a ti response packets on the L2 network.
ic
agent, which then broadcasts received
i f
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H u information in IPsec networking
Two procedures for obtaining transmission configuration
n
scenarios
ti o
ic a
i f
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
i
eThe
aw
 base station exchanges DHCP packets with a public DHCP server to obtain information,
Hu
such as the interface IP address for accessing the untrusted domain and the SeGW IP
address. The base station also needs to obtain the CA IP address because digital certificates
are required for identity authentication with the SeGW. This procedure is referred to as the first
DHCP procedure.
 The base station negotiates with the SeGW on the Internet Key Exchange (IKE) security
association (SA) and IPsec SA, and then establishes an IPsec tunnel. Because digital
certificates are required for identity authentication with the SeGW, the base station must apply
to the CA for digital certificates that can be identified by the SeGW.
 The base station exchanges DHCP packets with its U2000 DHCP server to obtain the OM IP
address used for accessing the trusted domain. This procedure is referred to as the second
DHCP procedure.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu from its U2000 DHCP server
When a base station obtains configuration information
n
and does not need configuration information allocated by a public DHCP server, the
o
base station sends a DHCPRELEASE
t i message to the public DHCP server. After
ic
receiving the DHCPRELEASE message, a the public DHCP server can redistribute
r t if to other NEs.
allocated configuration information

C e procedures, DHCP also supports the procedure for
In addition to the preceding
& for updating configuration information.

updating configuration information. However, base stations in SRAN8.0 do not
g
support the procedure
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The procedure for obtaining VLAN information Hisuas follows:
n
ioWith VLAN acquisition, the base station actively
 Once the DHCP function is enabled on the base station, the base station starts
a
the VLAN acquisition process.
t
acquires VLAN IDs of allcreceived
i
tif
ARP packets and records these VLAN IDs
r
in a PnP VLAN-ID table.
The base stationesends DHCP packets without VLAN IDs or DHCP packets

C
&
with VLAN IDs set to 0.
n g
The base station waits 20s. If the base station receives a DHCPOFFER packet
i 20s, it exits the DHCP procedure and enters the subsequent PnP

i n
within
r adeployment procedure. Otherwise, the base station goes to the next step.
i T The base station checks the PnP VLAN-ID table and tries to use all acquired
e

a w VLAN IDs to send DHCP packets. After that, if the base station receives a
Hu valid DHCPOFFER packet, it exits the DHCP procedure and enters the
subsequent PnP deployment procedure.
 When the preceding steps fail:
 If the base station has only one transmission port, the base station
repeats the preceding steps on this port.
 If the base station has multiple transmission ports, it repeats the
preceding steps on other transmission ports.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The U2000 or BSC sends an OMCH establishment Hu request to the OM IP address of
the base station.
n
To forward the OMCH establishmentio

a t ARP packets to obtain the MAC address
request to the correct base station, the next-hop
f ic of the request. The next-hop gateway or the L2

gateway of the base station broadcasts
i
rt to ARP packets so that correct VLAN IDs are contained in
mapping the destination IP address
network attaches VLANeIDs
C by the base station.
&
the ARP packets received
g
The base station parses all received ARP packets and records the VLAN IDs
inthe packets.

n
contained in
a i station attempts to send all DHCP packets with recorded VLAN IDs. Only

T r packets with correct VLAN IDs can reach the DHCP relay agent which is
The base
i
DHCP
einstalled
a w on the next-hop gateway of the base station.
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The U2000 or BSC sends an OMCH establishment Hu request to the OM IP address of
n
the base station. The request is forwarded to the SeGW.
o
t i the base station has not been established
a to the interface IP address of the base station.
 The SeGW detects that the IPsec SA with
ic
tf
and sends an IKE negotiation request
The request is routed to the inext-hop
r
gateway of the base station.

C e request to the correct base station, the next-hop
To forward the IKE negotiation
&
gateway of the base station broadcasts ARP packets to obtain the MAC address
g
mapping the destination IP address of the request. The next-hop gateway or the L2
n in VLAN IDs to ARP packets so that correct VLAN IDs are contained in
network attaches
the ARPi packets received by the base station.
r a

i T base station parses all received ARP packets and records the VLAN IDs
The
econtained in the packets. It may record the VLAN ID in an ARP packet destined for
a w
Hu 
another base station.
The base station attempts to send all DHCP packets with recorded VLAN IDs. Only
DHCP packets with correct VLAN IDs can reach the DHCP relay agent.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The U2000 sends a DHCPOFFER packet with Huno content to the interface IP address
n
of the base station. The packet is forwarded to the next-hop gateway of the base
o
station.
a ti to the correct base station, the next-hop gateway
 To forward the DHCPOFFER packet
f c
iARP
r t
of the base station broadcastsi packets to obtain the MAC address mapping the
C e the request. The next-hop gateway or the L2 network

destination IP address of
& by the base station.

attaches VLAN IDs to ARP packets so that correct VLAN IDs are contained in the
g
ARP packets received
n in parses all received ARP packets and records the VLAN IDs
The base station
i in the packets. It may record the VLAN ID in an ARP packet destined for

a
r base station.
contained
T
i base station attempts to send all DHCP packets with recorded VLAN IDs. Only
another
eThe
aw

Hu
DHCP packets with correct VLAN IDs can reach the DHCP relay agent.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The base station sends a DHCP packet withH
u
no VLAN ID.
n
io VLAN ID to the DHCP packet. The default
 The L2 network between the base station and the next-hop gateway of the base
t
a ID required for deploying the base station. With the
station automatically attaches the default
ic
f can be forwarded over the L2 network to the
VLAN ID is the same as the VLAN
correct VLAN ID, the DHCPipacket
DHCP relay agent and e r t
C
then reach the DHCP server.
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The next-hop gateway periodically sends ping
u to the interface IP address of
Hpackets
n
the base station or an IP address on the network segment of the base station.
o
t i
ato obtain the MAC address of the base station
 To forward ping packets to the correct base station, the next-hop gateway of the base
ic
if of the ping packets. The ARP packets received by
station broadcasts ARP packets
r t
C e VLAN IDs.
the base station carry correct

&
g
contained in the packets. It may record the VLAN ID in an ARP packet destined for
n in station.
another base

T r packets with correct VLAN IDs can reach the DHCP relay agent.
The base
ei
DHCP
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 After a base station commissioning task by PnP Hutask is created on the U2000, the
request to the base station. After aniNE o nis created on the BSC, the BSC periodically
U2000 periodically sends an SSL-based or plaintext-based OMCH establishment
a t
ic
sends a plaintext-based OMCH establishment request to the base station. In the
r
request, the source IP address
t if is the IP address of the U2000 or BSC and the
Ce receives the request, it broadcasts ARP packets to the
destination IP address is the OM IP address of the base station. After the next-hop
gateway of the base station
& the MAC address mapping the interface IP address of the base
g
base station to obtain
station.
i n
n
i station obtains VLAN information.

a
rbase station first sends DHCP packets with no VLAN ID and then DHCP packets
The base
 T
i VLAN IDs. By exchanging DHCP packets with its next-hop gateway and DHCP
The
ewith
a w
u
server, the base station obtains the OMCH configuration data and validates the data.
H  The base station responds to the OMCH establishment request from the U2000 or
BSC and then establishes an OMCH to the U2000 or BSC.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu
This networking has the following characteristics:
n
io domain, respectively. The base station
 A public DHCP server and an U2000 DHCP server are deployed in the
a t
untrusted domain and the trusted
obtains the transmissioncconfiguration
i
if to the SeGW from the public DHCP server, and
information required for establishing a
r t
temporary IPsec tunnel
obtains from theeU2000 DHCP server the formal transmission configuration
information. C
&
g
The base station in the untrusted domain cannot directly access NEs in the
in domain. Instead, packets from the base station must be encrypted over

n
trusted
a i IPsec tunnel to the SeGW before being transmitted to the U2000 or BSC in
r the trusted domain.
the
T
ei A CA is deployed. During base station deployment, the CA is accessible
aw

Hu
through IP addresses of NEs in the untrusted domain (for example, the
interface IP address of the base station).
 After the base station starts, it must apply to the CA for operator-issued digital
certificates before connecting to the SeGW. After obtaining the certificates, the
base station negotiates with the SeGW to establish an IPsec tunnel.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 In IPsec networking scenario, the base station
u configuration information as
Hobtains
follows:
o n
The base station obtains the ifollowing

a t information from the public DHCP
ic
tif IP address used for accessing NEs in the
server:

r
Temporary interface
untrustededomain.
C

&
Configuration information used for establishing a temporary IPsec
g
in configuration data and the CA configuration data.
tunnel to the SeGW. The configuration information includes the SeGW
i n
r a
T
 The base station obtains digital certificates from the CA.
ei After
 establishing the temporary IPsec tunnel, the base station obtains the
a w formal interface IP address and other OMCH configuration data from the
Hu U2000 DHCP server and then establishes a formal IPsec tunnel. The obtained
information is used for accessing NEs in the trusted domain and referred to as
formal transmission configuration information in this document.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Differences compared with the ESN-based bindingHu mode
 Added step 5.
o n

a
Print the bar code on the U2000 ti if you use a bar code to bind a base station.
Added step 7.
i f ic
rt ID to bind a base station.

 Use the deployment

e
C board is connected to the backplane or UCIU of an
If the main control
activated &

g
base station, and the deployment ID has been generated during the
inthe U2000.
data configuration on the CME, the base station does not need to be bound
n
a i
with
T r If the main control board is not connected to the backplane or UCIU of an

ei activated

base station, you must perform the ESN-based or bar-code-based
a w base station binding.
Hu  Deleted the step of ESN-based base station binding.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H u
The followings sections use the procedure for commissioning 3900 series base stations as an
n
example. Unless otherwise specified, the same operations apply to 5900 series base stations.
On the U2000 client, choose SON > Selfo

i The Auto Deployment window is displayed.
tstyle).
Planning > Auto Deployment (application style) or
SON > Auto Deployment (traditional a
ic of package to be uploaded.
Select a tab page based on the f
t i type
Click Transfer, and choose rFrom OSS Client to OSS Server from the shortcut menu. The NE

File Transfer dialog box

e
Cis displayed.
&or multi-task mode.
g
 Select the single task

n inNE File Transfer dialog box is closed, and the upload starts.
Click OK. The
The FileiTransfer Task tab page at the bottom of the Auto Deployment dialog box displays

r a operation information, including Operation, Status, Object, Progress, Start Time,

i T Time, and Information. When Progress is 100%, the upload is complete.
detailed
eNote:
End
a w

Hu  If the NE type of an NE to be deployed is BTS3900 and a GTMUb or GTMUc serves as

the main control board, you also need to obtain the software package
BTS3900V900R013C10SPXXX.zip for implementing the GTMUb or GTMUc SingleOM
reconstruction.
 If the preconfigured software of the main control board of the base station to be
deployed is earlier than SRAN8.0, upgrade the software to a version from SRAN8.0 to
SRAN12.1 and then obtain the software package BTS3900_5900
V100R013C10SPXXX_ALL(Software).7z.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu > Auto Deployment (application
On the U2000 client, choose SON > Self Planning
n
style) or SON > Auto Deployment (traditional style). The Auto Deployment window is
o
displayed.
a ti then the Commission License tab.
fic
 Click the Prepare File & Data tab and
Click Transfer, and choosetiFrom OSS Client to OSS Server from the shortcut menu.

e r License dialog box is displayed.

The Upload Commission
C
 Click
&
in the Source Path area. The Select Folder dialog box is displayed.
Select the fileg
ndisplayed.
to be uploaded, and click Open. The Upload Commission License
dialog box iis
i n
Click a

T r OK. The Upload Commission License dialog box is closed, and the upload
i
eThe
starts.
aw
 File Transfer Task tab page at the bottom of the Auto Deployment dialog box
Hu
displays detailed operation information, including Operation, Status, Object,
Progress, Start Time, End Time, and Information. When Progress is 100%, the
upload is complete.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose H u Advanced > Export Auto
n
Deployment Data (CME client mode) or CME > Export Auto Deployment Data
o
ti directory\CfgData\base station name\
(U2000 client mode）

a
icdirectory\ADList\
Data configuration files: export
i f
rt files from a remote desktop to a local PC. Otherwise,
 Deployment lists: export
Do not copy the e
C
 .xml
base station deployment will fail. You are advised to compress the required
files into a&
g
.rar or .zip file for file transfer.

Next in
i n
Select the base stations whose auto-deployment data you want to export, and click
r aa save path for the exported file and a method for verifying data, and click Next.

i T data in a base station deployment list, and click Next. The CME starts to verify
Select

edata correctness and exports the data.
View
a w
Hu  When the export is successful, set options as required:
 Select Do not switch to the Auto Deployment window to close the wizard.
 Select Switch to the Auto Deployment window. The CME automatically
switches to the auto-deployment window and creates a commissioning task.
 Select Switch to the Auto Deployment window and start Auto Deployment
task. The CME automatically switches to the auto-deployment window and
starts a commissioning task.
 Click Finish.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 On the U2000 client, choose SON > Self Planning Hu > Auto Deployment (application
n
style) or SON > Auto Deployment (traditional style). The Auto Deployment window
o
is displayed.
Upload data configuration files c
ti
toathe U2000 server.
fi& Data tab and then the Site Configuration Data tab.

t i
r choose From OSS Client to OSS Server from the
Click the Prepare File
e


C
Click Transfer, and
&
shortcut menu. The Upload Site Configuration Data dialog box is displayed.
Click g

i n in the Source Path area. Select the folder that contains the data
i n
configuration file to be uploaded, and click Select. The Upload Site
r aConfiguration Data dialog box is displayed.

i T Click OK. The Upload Site Configuration Data dialog box is closed, and the
e 
a w upload starts.
Hu The File Transfer Task tab page at the bottom of the Auto Deployment
dialog box displays detailed operation information, including Operation,
Status, Object, Progress, Start Time, End Time, and Information. When
Progress is 100%, the upload is complete.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 On the U2000 client, choose SON > Self Planning Hu > Auto Deployment (application
n
o
is displayed.
a ti server.

i f
Upload deployment list files to the
i&cData tab and then The Upload Deployment List
U2000

e rt
Click the Prepare File
C
dialog box is displayed.

&
Click Transfer, and choose From OSS Client to OSS Server from the
g
in
shortcut menu. The Upload Deployment List dialog box is displayed.
i n
Click in the Source Path area. Select the folder that contains the data
aconfiguration file to be uploaded, and click Open. The Upload Deployment

r
T List dialog box is displayed.
e i
aw
 Click OK. The Upload Deployment List dialog box is closed, and the upload
Hu
starts.
The File Transfer Task tab page at the bottom of the Auto Deployment
dialog box displays detailed operation information, including Operation,
Status, Object, Progress, Start Time, End Time, and Information. When
Progress is 100%, the upload is complete.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H u
Method 1: Contact the department in charge of the transport network to check whether the
n
transport network meets the configuration requirements of the Automatic OMCH Establishment
feature.
o
ti and network configurations of each node.

a
c If nodes in the transport network allow the ping
Method 2: Check the network connectivity

i fiport
Check the network connectivity.
packets to pass, pingtthe
r corresponding to each node to check whether the
e at each node is ready.
C
transmission channel
each node&
 Check network configurations of each node. Check whether the network equipment at
g is configured as required and ensure that the OM channel between the

n and the U2000 can be automatically setting up.
i
base station
nof parameters we can refer to the product manual Automatic OMCH Establishment

a i
For details
T r Parameter Description.
Feature
ei Non-IPSec
 Networking scenarios
aw

Hu
 IPSec does not secure Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) packets,
OMCH data, service data, signaling data, or clock data.
 IPSec
 Scenario 1 IPSec secures DHCP packets, OMCH data, and all or some of the
other data.
 Scenario 2 IPSec secures OMCH data and all or some of the other data. It
does not secure DHCP packets.
 Scenario 3: IPSec secures service and signaling data. It neither secures
OMCH data nor all or some of the other data

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 A file server saves the software package of an HuNE and provides FTP services for NEs
n
to be upgraded. During a software upgrade, the NEs download the required software
package from a specified file server.io
a t
 Procedure
i f ic Configuration > Setting > File Server Settings
 On the U2000 client,
e rort choose Software > File Server Settings (Traditional
choose
C
(Application style)
&
style). A File Server Settings dialog box is displayed.
Selectg
in list to set a file server for this NE.
 an NE type from the navigation tree. Then, select an NE in the NE
i n
Name
a
r and set the NE as the file server for transmitting files. The following table
T
 Click the File Server Name column and select an NE from the drop-down list
ei provides suggestions on setting a file server.

a w
Hu Scenario Recommended File Server
An independent file server is used for A third-party FTP server
centralized file management.
In other cases •The default file server (the U2000 server)
•The default file server (the U2000 server) for the eNodeB
 Click Apply to activate the settings.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Procedure Hu

o n
On the U2000 client, choose Alarm Monitor > Setting > NE Alarm Settings
ti
(application style), or choose Monitor > Alarm Settings > NE Alarm Settings
a
ic
(traditional style). The NE Alarm Settings window is displayed.

tif
Click the User-Defined Alarm tab and then the Alarm Definition tab. Click Edit, and
r
displayed. Ce
choose Add from the shortcut menu. The Add User-Defined Alarm dialog box is
&
ng
 In the navigation tree in the Add User-Defined Alarm dialog box, choose NE Type. In
i
the right pane, set Name, ID, and Severity as planned.
n
ai
 Each type of user-defined alarm can be assigned a unique alarm ID. The
T r value range of ID is displayed on the interface. Set the alarm ID to an
ei
appropriate value based on the displayed massage.
aw
 For all base stations, the same type of alarms must be assigned the same
Hu
alarm ID. For example, if the access control alarm ID of a base station is
65035, the access control alarm ID of any other base station must also be
65035.
 Click OK. The Alarm Definition tab shows the new user-defined alarm.
 Click Apply to save the user-defined alarm.
The Result dialog box is displayed, indicating whether the operation is successful. If
the operation is successful, click OK. The dialog box is closed, and the icon
disappears. If the operation fails, click Details to query the failure causes, and then
add the user-defined alarm again.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Procedure Hu

o n
On the U2000 client, choose SON > Self Planning > Auto Deployment
a ti
(application style) or SON > Auto Deployment (traditional style). The Auto
ic
if how to create an NE commissioning task.
Deployment window is displayed.
The following figuretshows

r
Click andethe Import Deployment List window is displayed.

C
& the deployment list of the NE to be commissioned and click OK.
Select
ngThe

i
Auto Deployment window is returned.
i n The successfully created commissioning tasks are displayed in the

Tra Auto Deployment window.
ei  Optional: Modify data on the deployment list based on site requirements.
a w  Only ESN and Software Version can be modified in the Auto Deployment
Hu window. Other data must be modified on the CME. After the modification,
export a new deployment list and data configuration files to the U2000 server,
and re-create an NE commissioning task.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Prerequisites
Hu

o n
The deployment ID has been configured in the NE configuration data and has been
ti
contained in the deployment list imported to the U2000.

c a
NE commissioning tasks have been created.
i

t if
You have obtained a bar code printer. A professional bar code printer or a common
r
e
laser printer is preferred for printing bar codes of high resolution (1200 DPI or higher).
C
This ensures bar code reading because bar codes are identified by the width of black
&
and white bars.
ng
 The printer used to print the bar codes is communicating with the U2000 client
ni
properly.

r ai
Procedure
T
ei
 Choose SON > Auto Deployment (traditional style); alternatively, double-click SON in
Application Center (application style). The Auto Deployment window is displayed.
a w  Print the bar codes on the U2000
Hu  If the communication between the printer and the U2000 client is abnormal,
save the bar code information in an .xps file and copy the file to a PC that
communicates properly with the printer. Then print the bar code. Operations
are as follows: On the General page of the Print dialog box, set Name in the
Print Service area to Microsoft XPS Document Writer. Then click Print.
 In the displayed window, save the file as an .xps file.
 Copy the saved .xps file to a PC that communicates properly with the printer
and print the bar code.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Procedure Hu

o n
Print the electronic operation guide on a piece of A4 paper to facilitate scanning of
presetting codes.
ati
ic
if
 Connect the bar code scanner to the PC through a USB port.

e rt
Scan the presetting codes printed on the A4 paper.
C Product Defaults code

Scan the Standard

& Keyboard (PC) code

g
Scan the USB

Scannthe Save code

ni the Manual Trigger code

i
ra
Scan

i T Scan the Add CR Suffix code

e

aw
 Scan the Save code
Hu
 Check whether the bar code scanner is preset correctly.
 Remove the bar code scanner and reconnect it to the PC. Create a .txt file on
the PC and open it. Scan a printed base station ID using the bar code scanner
and check whether a correct deployment ID is displayed in the file. If an
incorrect deployment ID is displayed, contact Huawei for technical support.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Huoperations at the commissioning
This operation can be performed with other local
phase.
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Procedure Hu

o n
Connect the scanner to the USB port on the main control board of the base
station.
a ti
ic
tif connect the scanner to the USB port on any one of
 If the base station has multiple main control boards and these boards are
r
connected to each other,
e boards are not connected to each other, perform this
C
the boards. If these
&
procedure on each of the boards individually.
g
in whether the scanning is successful. If the scanner emits a tone and the
Use the
 scanner to read the deployment ID in the bar code.
i n
Check
a

Tr scanning laser turns off, the scanning is successful.
ei  Remove the scanner.
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Procedure Hu

o n
The local engineer reports the site position and ESN of each base station to
the remote engineer.
a ti
ic
if to be deployed according to the device panel drawing,
 If there are multiple BBUs in a base station, find the BBU that houses the main
control board of thetNE
record the ESN e
r
C of this BBU, and report it to the remote engineer.
&
The remote engineer performs the following tasks:

g
in Deployment (application style) or SON > Auto Deployment
On the U2000 client, choose SON > Self Planning > Auto

n
i (traditional style). The Auto Deployment window is displayed.
r a
i T
e  Select the commissioning task on the deployment list and double-click
aw
the ESN cell to modify the ESN to the ESN reported by the local
Hu
engineer.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Procedure Hu

o n
On the U2000 client, choose SON > Self Planning > Auto Deployment (application
ti
a
is displayed.
ic
f as shown in the following figure.
 Start the NE commissioning
r titask,
①
Ce commission tasks and right-click these commissioning
Select one or multiple
tasks.
&
Click g
inStep Parameters as planned.
② Start. The Task Parameter Settings window is displayed.
i n
a
③ Set
T r Click Extended Parameters.

ei
④
Set Extended Parameters as planned.

w
⑤
u a ⑥ Set Site Verification as planned.
H ⑦ Click OK.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Start the NE commissioning task, as shown in
u following figure.
Hthe
n
io
① Select one or multiple commission tasks and right-click these commissioning
tasks.
a t
②
f ic
ti as planned.
Click Start. The Task Parameter Settings window is displayed.
r
CeParameters.
③ Set Step Parameters
④ Click Extended
& Parameters as planned.
g
⑤ Set Extended
Setn
⑥
n i Site Verification as planned.

a iClick OK. Tip : After the start of an NE commissioning task is confirmed, the
r U2000 checks the required data configuration file, If the data configuration file
⑦
T
ei is available, the U2000 starts commissioning and the corresponding task is in
a w the Running state.
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Procedure Hu

o n
Observe the Status column. If Running is displayed, the commissioning task is in process.

a ti
Observe the Current Phase column to view the current phase of the commissioning task.
ic
if
 In the autodiscovery phase: Ensure that the base station automatically establishes an
r t
OM channel with the U2000 after the base station binding succeeds. After the OM
Ce
channel setup succeeds, OM channel connected is displayed in the Description
column, as shown in the following figure.
&
i ng
n
r ai  If the state of an OM channel is Running for a long time, check the state of and
T
ei
descriptions about DHCP and TCP&SSL during the OM channel
establishment, and perform troubleshooting based on the preceding
a w information.
Hu  In the autoconfiguration phase: Ensure that the base station automatically downloads
the software packages, data configuration files, and the commissioning license
(optional) from the U2000, restarts, and activates the downloaded files.
 In the installation and deployment quality test phase: Ensure that the following
steps are performed in sequence: RF module monitoring, manual intervention, and
installation and deployment quality test.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Procedure Hu

o n
The remote engineer checks that the area where the local engineer has entered has
ati
no radiation and is safe for operation.
ic
if
 The remote engineer runs MML commands to unblock all cells of newly deployed NEs.

e rt
For eGBTS cells, run the MML command UBL GLOCELL.

C run the MML command SET GCELLADMSTAT.
For GBTS cells,
For UMTS&
g
 cells, run the MML command UBL ULOCELL.

n in cells, run the MML command UBL CELL.

For LTE
a i on next page
r
 Continued
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 On the U2000 client, a remote engineer chooses H u SON > Self Planning > Auto
n
Deployment (Application style) or SON > Auto Deployment (Traditional style). The
o
tiitem to be manually confirmed, chooses manual
Auto Deployment window is displayed.
The remote engineers right-click a
ic and clicks OK.
 the
i f
rt VSWR, crossed pair connections, and
confirm from the shortcut menu,

C e
The U2000 checks for abnormal
intermodulation interference.
& 30 minutes.
g
 The test takes about

i n
After the U2000 completes the tests, the remote engineer checks the commissioning
i n If the status is confirm completion, the base station has passed the test.
a
task status.
If therstatus is Abnormal, the remote engineer checks the commissioning report to
i Twhich RF ports have problems and contacts the local engineer for
etroubleshooting.
see
a w
Hu  The local engineers check the faulty RF ports and troubleshoot the faults. After
troubleshooting the faults, the local engineers ask the remote engineer to continue
with the commissioning task.
 The remote engineer resumes the commissioning task. After the commissioning task
is completed, the remote engineer performs 6 again.
 If the installation and deployment quality test does not pass due to unqualified site
conditions, remote engineers must deselect Installation and deployment quality
test when continuing with the commissioning task.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Procedure Hu

o n
Log in to the U2000 client. Choose Alarm Monitor > Browse Alarm >
a ti
Browse Current Alarms (application style) or Monitor > Browse Current
ic
tif
Alarms (traditional style) to open the Browse Current Alarms tab page. The
r
Filter dialog box is displayed.
C e box, click the Alarm Source tab and select Custom. Then,
In the Filter dialog

&
choose Add > NE on the bottom of this tab page. The Select NE dialog box is
g
displayed.
n inleft Available Objects area, select NEs that are being commissioned in
i navigation tree.
In the

r athe
i T
e
 In the Filter dialog box, click OK to return to the Browse Current Alarms tab
aw
page. All alarms reported by the selected NEs are displayed on this tab page.
Hu
 The remote engineer check whether the alarms displayed on the Browse
Current Alarms tab page is related to the newly deployed NE. If yes, handle
the alarms according to the instructions in Alarm Reference.
 The remote engineer obtains the current commissioning report.
 The remote engineer check whether the commissioning report contains any
active alarms. If yes, handle the alarms according to the instructions in Alarm
Reference and contact local engineers for alarm handling if necessary.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Procedure Hu
 Bind environmental alarms to an NE.
o n

a ti
ic
rt if
e
Select a bindingCrecord, and click Apply to apply the binding relationship to the NE.
 Click the User-Defined Alarm tab and then the Alarm Binding tab.
&provides a success or failure prompt. If the operation is successful, click


OK. n
g
The system
n iThetodialog box is closed, and the icon disappears. If the operation fails, click
aialarms to the NE again.

Details query the failure causes, rectify the problems, and then try to bind the
T r

ei
Check environmental alarms as follows: (Manually trigger an external environment alarm. If the
a w alarm is reported normally, the configuration of external environment monitoring devices is
Hu correct.)
 The local engineer performs a loopback test on an alarm port of the UPEU using a
twisted pair. The remote engineer checks whether the U2000 receives an
environmental alarm from the alarm ports.
 The local engineer stops the loopback test. The remote engineer checks whether the
alarm on the U2000 is cleared.
 Both local and remote engineers repeat the preceding steps until all eight of the alarm
ports on the UPEU pass the tests.

• .
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Procedure Hu

o n
Choose Maintenance > Network Health Check > NE Health Check from the
ti
main menu (traditional style); alternatively, double-click Trace and
a
ic
Maintenance in Application Center and choose Monitor > NE Health Check
rt if
from the main menu (application style).

e
In NE Health Check tab page, click
.
C from the Scenario drop-down list in the Create Task. dialog
Select a scenario
&

g
box.
n in
a i
Tr Optional: Change the name of the task in Task name as required.
i

e
w
 In Available NEs, move NEs to Selected NEs.
u a  In Execution Type, select a task execution mode.
H
 Click Next.
 If NE extension parameters do not need to be set for the required NE,
skip this step.
 In the NE List navigation tree, click an NE node, and set NE extension
parameters in the right pane.
 Click Finish.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Prerequisites Hu

o n
Prerequisites for GSM and UMTS service testing:
The base station is poweredtion and working correctly.
a on the U2000 is complete.

ic
tif the base station and the controller is ready.
 The remote commissioning
r
Cefeeder system has been connected to the cabinet.
 The transmission between
The antenna and
&station (MS) / user equipment (UE) has been defined on the HLR.

g
 The mobile

n in for LTE service testing:
Prerequisites
a i transmission between the eNodeB and the MME/S-GW is ready. MME

T r stands for mobility management entity, and S-GW stands for serving gateway.
 The
ei The data negotiated for the eNodeB has been added to the MME and S-GW.
aw

Hu
 The UE has been defined on the HSS.
 An FTP server is ready.
 A WWW server is ready.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 To ensure the accuracy of the test results: Hu

o n
Perform dialing testing within an area where the signal strength is from -70
dBm to -30 dBm.
ati
ic
if
 Perform more than five dialing tests.
rt
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 To ensure the accuracy of the test results: Hu

o n
Perform dialing testing within an area where the signal strength is from -70
dBm to -30 dBm.
ati
ic
if
 Perform more than five dialing tests.
rt
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w

u
This verification report needs to be submittedHto the customer.
 Procedure :
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Procedure Hu

o n
Choose SON > Auto Deployment (traditional style); alternatively, double-click
a ti
SON in Application Center (application style). The Auto Deployment
ic
tiftask list, select one or multiple commissioning tasks for
window is displayed.
which you want e


r
In the commissioning
C to confirm completion. Right-click the tasks and choose
&
Confirm Completion from the shortcut menu to confirm the completion.
n
Open theg commissioning report of a completed task to view the details.
ni

i
Tra
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Procedure Hu

o n
Choose Maintenance > Maintenance Mode (traditional style); alternatively, double-
tia
click Configuration in Application Center and choose Settings > Maintenance
ic
tifCurrent NE Maintenance Mode is NORMAL.
Mode (application style).
 Click
r
and check whether
e

C
If Current NE Maintenance Mode is NORMAL, no further operation is
required.
&
n g
i
 If Current NE Maintenance Mode is not NORMAL, click , set the NE to
i n the NORMAL mode.

enter
a not allowed to set the maintenance mode of a separate-MPT base. You need
You rare

i Tset it based on each single-mode NE that comprises the separate-MPT base. If you
erestore NEs of only a single mode to the NORMAL mode, the setting will not affect
to
a w
Hu NEs of other modes and common modules of the separate-MPT base station.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu and a GTMUb or GTMUc serves
If the NE type of an NE to be deployed is BTS3900
BTS3900V900R013C10SPXXX.zip ifor o nimplementing the GTMUb or GTMUc

as the main control board, you also need to obtain the software package
a t
ic
SingleOM reconstruction.
If the preconfigured softwareifof the main control board of the base station to be
rt

deployed is earlier thane

C
SRAN8.0, upgrade the software to a version from SRAN8.0 to
&
SRAN12.1 and then obtain the software package BTS3900_5900
g
V100R013C10SPXXX_ALL(Software).7z.
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Data configuration files and deployment listsH
u
exported from the CME are saved in the
n
following paths. Do not modify any exported files or the directory structure of any
o
exported files.
a ti
Data configuration files: exportcdirectory\CfgData\base
i
tif
 station name\

r
Deployment lists: export directory\ADList\
e from a remote desktop to a local PC. Otherwise, base
 Do not copy the .xml files
C
&
station deployment will fail. You are advised to compress the required files into a .rar
n g
or .zip file for file transfer.
i ni
r a
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

o n
The data copy right has been obtained for the PC that is used to make a USB
ati
flash drive. If this right is not obtained, the PC for making a USB flash drive
ic
tf
cannot copy data from the USB flash drive. In this case, obtain the data copy
right by following theicorresponding
r
procedure.

C e are available.
The following files
&
Item Description
Upgrade files
g Software package Obtain the software package
n in from Huawei engineers and
a i decompressed the software
T r package on a local PC.
ei
NOTE: Please decompress
the software package to an
a w empty folder.
Hu Pre-configuration script
(Precfg.ini)
Precfg.ini can only be
prepared manually.
Configuration files Deployment lists and data Export deployment lists and
configuration files data configuration files from
the CME and save these files
on a local PC. NOTE: The
.xml data configuration files
exported from the CME must
be used.
License file Get ready the LTE
commissioning license before
enabling LTE services.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 NOTICE:
o n
i
Data configuration files andtdeployment
a
 lists exported from the CME are saved
f ic not modify any exported files or the directory

ti files. Data configuration files: export
in the following paths. Do
r
structure of any exported
e
C
directory\CfgData\base station name\

&
Do notg
instation deployment will fail. You are advised to compress the required
 copy the .xml files from a remote desktop to a local PC. Otherwise,
i n
base
r a
T
files into a .rar or .zip file for file transfer.

eiThe following tools are available.
a wItem Description
Hu USB flash drive •The USB flash drive meets the following requirements: Has a capacity larger than
or equal to 4 GB.
•(Recommended not mandatory) Has a data transmission indicator.
•Has no additional functions such as encryption, virus killing, self-booting, MP3,
MP4, and smartphone.
•Has passed the compatibility check conducted by Huawei engineers using Huawei
internal tools. The USB flash drive can be normally written, read, and formatted.
USB making The tool is saved in U2000 client installation
and protection directory\client\client\USBProtector.
tool

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 When making different types of directories on HauUSB flash drive, specify items listed in
n
the Information to Set column only and do not set items that are not listed in this
o
column.
Item Information to Set
a ti save path of the files decompressed from a specified
icpackage.
Directory for •Software Path: mandatory,
upgrading the
i f
•Cold PatchtPath: optional, save path of the files decompressed from a specified
version software
software and
e rpackage.
•HotC
updating cold patch
configuration files Patch Path: optional, save path of the files decompressed from a specified
&
hot patch package.
ng list,
Based on different version combinations of NEs to be deployed in the deployment
n i select Software Path, Cold Patch Path, or Hot Patch Path. Then, click Add to
a i add the path to the software version list. Based on the target version information
T r in the deployment list, the USB making and protection tool copies different
i
versions to the corresponding directories of the NEs to be deployed. If an
e unnecessary software version is added, you can click Delete to remove this
a w software version.
Hu Auto Deployment List: mandatory. Select the deployment list exported from the
CME.
The exported deployment list is saved in export path/ADList/ by default.
Engineers must select the only .xml file in this directory.
NodeB/eNodeB/BTS3900/BTS5900 Precfg file: recommended. Select the created
Precfg.ini file.
If Precfg.ini is not selected, base station software is downloaded based on the
latest configurations that take effect. After the software and data configuration
files are loaded from the USB flash drive and the base station is restarted, the
software version of the newly added board will be automatically added. If
Precfg.ini is selected, the base station downloads the software based on the
board type specified in the Precfg.ini file.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Compare and contrast in different modes Hu
Item
o n Description
One USB for One Site
ati In this mode, save the information about
ic
if
each NE to an independent USB flash drive.
One USB for Multiple Sites
e rt In this mode, save the information about all
C
NEs to a USB flash drive.
This mode requires that each NE be
& configured with its ESN. This mode also
ng
requires that the ESN and the main control
ni board's slot number of an NE cannot be
ai
both the same as those of another NE.
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Huby default and can be cleared. The
Encryption Algorithm is optional. It is selected
n is recommended.
values of Encryption Algorithm include DES3_CBC, AES192_CBC, and
o
ti
AES256_CBC. The default value DES3_CBC
a
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 If you want to save on the local path: Hu
on
Item Description
Local Path
ti •Save all the information to the specified
ic a directory on a local PC. One USB for One Site:
ti f In this mode, a folder is created in this

r
Ce
directory for this NE and named based on the
NE name. In addition, NE information is saved
&
in this folder.
•One USB for Multiple Sites: In this mode, save
i ng the information about all NEs to a specified

n
ai
directory. The software package is shared by
r
all NEs and the data configuration files are
i T distinguished by ESN-named directories.
eThe
aw
 existing data configuration files may be damaged when being copied, encrypted,
Hu
or integrity protected. To prevent any damages, USB Flash Drive Path and Local
Path must not contain any files or directories.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 When making the USB directories, the USB H
u
making and protection tool automatically
performs the following operations:
o n

t
Applies integrity protection and i encryption protection to files under the USB
c a
fi files to the USB directories of corresponding NEs
directories according to manual settings.

t i
Copies the configuration
r path of configuration files in the deployment list.
NOTICE: Ce
according to the saving
After a file&

tog
 is copied from a computer to a USB flash drive, the file may change
due n
ni you can copy the file from another computer, to another USB flash drive,
faults on hardware or the Window OS, but this seldom occurs. In this
i
aor restart the OS and copy the file again.
case,
r
T After the folders are copied to the USB flash drive, eject or safely remove the
ei 
a w USB flash drive from the Windows operating system. You can only remove the
Hu USB flash drive from the PC after either of the preceding operations. If the
USB flash drive is forcibly ejected, the files in the USB flash drive may be
damaged. As a result, software and data configuration files cannot be loaded
by using the USB flash drive.
 When transferring files for a making USB flash drive, do not copy the .xml files
from a remote desktop to a local PC. Otherwise, base station deployment will
fail. You are advised to compress the required files into a .rar or .zip file for file
transfer.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H u
Method 1: Contact the department in charge of the transport network to check whether the
n
transport network meets the configuration requirements of the Automatic OMCH Establishment
feature.
o
ti and network configurations of each node.

a
c If nodes in the transport network allow the ping
Method 2: Check the network connectivity

i fiport
Check the network connectivity.
packets to pass, pingtthe
r corresponding to each node to check whether the
e at each node is ready.
C
transmission channel
each node&
 Check network configurations of each node. Check whether the network equipment at
g is configured as required and ensure that the OM channel between the

n and the U2000 can be automatically setting up.
i
base station
nof parameters we can refer to the product manual Automatic OMCH Establishment

a i
For details
T r Parameter Description.
Feature
ei Non-IPSec
 Networking scenarios
aw

Hu
 IPSec does not secure Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) packets,
OMCH data, service data, signaling data, or clock data.
 IPSec
 Scenario 1 IPSec secures DHCP packets, OMCH data, and all or some of the
other data.
 Scenario 2 IPSec secures OMCH data and all or some of the other data. It
does not secure DHCP packets.
 Scenario 3: IPSec secures service and signaling data. It neither secures
OMCH data nor all or some of the other data

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Procedure Hu

o n
ti
a
ic

tif
Click the User-Defined Alarm tab and then the Alarm Definition tab. Click Edit, and
r
displayed. Ce
choose Add from the shortcut menu. The Add User-Defined Alarm dialog box is
&
ng
 In the navigation tree in the Add User-Defined Alarm dialog box, choose NE Type. In
i
the right pane, set Name, ID, and Severity as planned.
n
ai
 Each type of user-defined alarm can be assigned a unique alarm ID. The
T r value range of ID is displayed on the interface. Set the alarm ID to an
ei
appropriate value based on the displayed massage.
aw
 For all base stations, the same type of alarms must be assigned the same
Hu
alarm ID. For example, if the access control alarm ID of a base station is
65035, the access control alarm ID of any other base station must also be
65035.
 Click OK. The Alarm Definition tab shows the new user-defined alarm.
 Click Apply to save the user-defined alarm.
The Result dialog box is displayed, indicating whether the operation is successful. If
the operation is successful, click OK. The dialog box is closed, and the icon
disappears. If the operation fails, click Details to query the failure causes, and then
add the user-defined alarm again.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Procedure Hu

o n
a ti
ic

r

C
Select
ngThe

i


n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Procedure Hu

o n
a ti
ic

r

C
Select
ngThe

i


n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Prerequisites
Hu

o n
The deployment ID has been configured in the NE configuration data and has been
ti
contained in the deployment list imported to the U2000.

c a
NE commissioning tasks have been created.
i

t if
You have obtained a bar code printer. A professional bar code printer or a common
r
e
laser printer is preferred for printing bar codes of high resolution (1200 DPI or higher).
C
This ensures bar code reading because bar codes are identified by the width of black
&
and white bars.
ng
 The printer used to print the bar codes is communicating with the U2000 client
ni
properly.

r ai
Procedure
T
ei
 Choose SON > Auto Deployment (traditional style); alternatively, double-click SON in
Application Center (application style). The Auto Deployment window is displayed.
a w  Print the bar codes on the U2000
Hu  If the communication between the printer and the U2000 client is abnormal,
save the bar code information in an .xps file and copy the file to a PC that
communicates properly with the printer. Then print the bar code. Operations
are as follows: On the General page of the Print dialog box, set Name in the
Print Service area to Microsoft XPS Document Writer. Then click Print.
 In the displayed window, save the file as an .xps file.
 Copy the saved .xps file to a PC that communicates properly with the printer
and print the bar code.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Procedure Hu

o n
Print the electronic operation guide on a piece of A4 paper to facilitate scanning of
presetting codes.
ati
ic
if
 Connect the bar code scanner to the PC through a USB port.

e rt
Scan the presetting codes printed on the A4 paper.
C Product Defaults code

Scan the Standard

& Keyboard (PC) code

g
Scan the USB

Scannthe Save code

ni the Manual Trigger code

i
ra
Scan

i T Scan the Add CR Suffix code

e

aw
 Scan the Save code
Hu
 Check whether the bar code scanner is preset correctly.
 Remove the bar code scanner and reconnect it to the PC. Create a .txt file on
the PC and open it. Scan a printed base station ID using the bar code scanner
and check whether a correct deployment ID is displayed in the file. If an
incorrect deployment ID is displayed, contact Huawei for technical support.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w

o n
The USB flash drive has been prepared.
i
The base station is workingtcorrectly.
a

i f
The USB port on the main ic control board has been enabled.
rt main control board is enabled by default before delivery.


e
The USB port on the
C can run MML commands (DSP LOCALUSBPORT for the
Local engineers
&
NodeB/eNodeB/BTS3900/BTS5900) to query the status of the USB port on the
n g board. If the value of Enable Flag is Enable, the USB port is

i
main control
i n If the value of Enable Flag is DISABLE, the USB port is disabled. To

enabled.
T raenable the USB port, run MML commands (SET LOCALUSBPORT for the
ei NodeB/eNodeB/BTS3900/BTS5900) to set Enable Flag to ENABLE.
aw
 If a WLAN adapter has been inserted into the USB port, remove the WLAN
Hu
adapter and then insert the USB flash drive.
 If each BBU is configured with a main control board and these boards work in
master/slave mode, connect the USB flash drive to the master board.
 If the ACT indicator on a main control board is steady on, this board is a master
board. If the ACT indicator on a main control board is steady off, this board is a slave
board.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Context Hu

o n
After the USB flash drive is connected to the main control board, the board
ti
automatically detects the USB flash drive and installs the driver. After the installation,
a
ic
the base station automatically reads the files in the fixed directories on the USB flash
tif
drive and checks the file names and formats. Then the base station checks whether
r
e
the software version and data configuration files on the USB flash drive are the same
C
as those on the base station. If no, the base station automatically loads the software
&
package and data configuration files from the USB flash drive. If yes, the base station
ng
does not load the software package or data configuration files.
n i
i
 If the USB flash drive stores only the software, the base station loads only this software.
r a flash drive stores only data configuration files, the base station loads only these
If the USB
T

i
files.
eThe base station does not load the software or data configuration files from the USB flash drive
aw

Hu
and the RUN indicator on the main control board indicates a loading failure (steady on) in the
following conditions:
 The base station finds out that the USB flash drive is not intended for it.
 The expected directories or files do not exist.
 The expected directories or file formats are not correct.
 Data in the USB flash drive is not encrypted or integrity-protected.
 Data configuration files loaded from a USB flash drive last time are the same as that on
the current USB flash drive.
 If the USB flash drive contains the license file, the LTE main control board will read this license
file.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The local engineer can determine the loading
u of the software and data
Hstatus
nWhen a GTMUb or GTMUc is to be
configuration files by observing the status of the RUN indicator on the main control
o
ti
board, as provided in the following table.
configured, this step takes abouta
ic this step takes about 15 minutes for single-mode
20 minutes for single-mode data. When other main
i f
rt25 to 30 minutes for multimode data.
control boards are to be configured,
e
data. This step takes about
C
&
 NOTE:
g
After the loading process is completed, the software activation and base
in restart take about 3 minutes. You do not have to observe the status of

n
station
a i RUN indicator during this time.

r After the restart, the base station checks new data configurations and
the
T
ei determines whether the target software for all boards is obtained. If yes, the

a w
Hu base station enters The loading succeeds status. If no, the base station
performs supplementary loading for the newly added board from the USB flash
drive. After the supplementary loading, the base station enters The loading
succeeds status.
 Do not remove the USB flash drive when the base station is still in the
Loading... status.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Procedure Hu

o n
Connect the scanner to the USB port on the main control board of the base
station.
a ti
ic
tif connect the scanner to the USB port on any one of
 If the base station has multiple main control boards and these boards are
r
connected to each other,
e boards are not connected to each other, perform this
C
the boards. If these
&
procedure on each of the boards individually.
g
in whether the scanning is successful. If the scanner emits a tone and the
Use the
 scanner to read the deployment ID in the bar code.
i n
Check
a

Tr scanning laser turns off, the scanning is successful.
ei  Remove the scanner.
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Procedure Hu

o n
The local engineer reports the site position and ESN of each base station to
the remote engineer.
a ti
ic
if to be deployed according to the device panel drawing,
 If there are multiple BBUs in a base station, find the BBU that houses the main
control board of thetNE
record the ESN e
r
C of this BBU, and report it to the remote engineer.
&
The remote engineer performs the following tasks:

g
in Deployment (application style) or SON > Auto Deployment
On the U2000 client, choose SON > Self Planning > Auto

n
i (traditional style). The Auto Deployment window is displayed.
r a
i T
e  Select the commissioning task on the deployment list and double-click
aw
the ESN cell to modify the ESN to the ESN reported by the local
Hu
engineer.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Procedure Hu

o n
On the U2000 client, choose SON > Self Planning > Auto Deployment (application
ti
a
is displayed.
ic
f as shown in the following figure.
 Start the NE commissioning
r titask,
①
Ce commission tasks and right-click these commissioning
Select one or multiple
tasks.
&
Click g
inStep Parameters as planned.
② Start. The Task Parameter Settings window is displayed.
i n
a
③ Set
T r Click Extended Parameters.

ei
④
Set Extended Parameters as planned.

w
⑤
u a ⑥ Set Site Verification as planned.
H ⑦ Click OK.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Start the NE commissioning task, as shown in
u following figure.
Hthe
n
io
① Select one or multiple commission tasks and right-click these commissioning
tasks.
a t
②
f ic
ti as planned.
Click Start. The Task Parameter Settings window is displayed.
r
CeParameters.
③ Set Step Parameters
④ Click Extended
& Parameters as planned.
g
⑤ Set Extended
Setn
⑥
n i Site Verification as planned.

a iClick OK. Tip : After the start of an NE commissioning task is confirmed, the
r U2000 checks the required data configuration file, If the data configuration file
⑦
T
ei is available, the U2000 starts commissioning and the corresponding task is in
a w the Running state.
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Procedure Hu

o n
Observe the Status column. If Running is displayed, the commissioning task is in process.

a ti
Observe the Current Phase column to view the current phase of the commissioning task.
ic
if
 In the autodiscovery phase: Ensure that the base station automatically establishes an
r t
OM channel with the U2000 after the base station binding succeeds. After the OM
Ce
channel setup succeeds, OM channel connected is displayed in the Description
column, as shown in the following figure.
&
i ng
n
r ai  If the state of an OM channel is Running for a long time, check the state of and
T
ei
descriptions about DHCP and TCP&SSL during the OM channel
establishment, and perform troubleshooting based on the preceding
a w information.
Hu  In the autoconfiguration phase: Ensure that the base station automatically downloads
the software packages, data configuration files, and the commissioning license
(optional) from the U2000, restarts, and activates the downloaded files.
 In the installation and deployment quality test phase: Ensure that the following
steps are performed in sequence: RF module monitoring, manual intervention, and
installation and deployment quality test.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Procedure Hu

o n
Log in to the U2000 client. Choose Alarm Monitor > Browse Alarm >
a ti
Browse Current Alarms (application style) or Monitor > Browse Current
ic
tif
Alarms (traditional style) to open the Browse Current Alarms tab page. The
r
Filter dialog box is displayed.
C e box, click the Alarm Source tab and select Custom. Then,
In the Filter dialog

&
choose Add > NE on the bottom of this tab page. The Select NE dialog box is
g
displayed.
n inleft Available Objects area, select NEs that are being commissioned in
i navigation tree.
In the

r athe
i T
e
 In the Filter dialog box, click OK to return to the Browse Current Alarms tab
aw
page. All alarms reported by the selected NEs are displayed on this tab page.
Hu
 The remote engineer check whether the alarms displayed on the Browse
Current Alarms tab page is related to the newly deployed NE. If yes, handle
the alarms according to the instructions in Alarm Reference.
 The remote engineer obtains the current commissioning report.
 The remote engineer check whether the commissioning report contains any
active alarms. If yes, handle the alarms according to the instructions in Alarm
Reference and contact local engineers for alarm handling if necessary.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Procedure Hu
 Bind environmental alarms to an NE.
o n

a ti
ic
rt if
e
Select a bindingCrecord, and click Apply to apply the binding relationship to the NE.
 Click the User-Defined Alarm tab and then the Alarm Binding tab.
&provides a success or failure prompt. If the operation is successful, click


OK. n
g
The system
n iThetodialog box is closed, and the icon disappears. If the operation fails, click
aialarms to the NE again.

Details query the failure causes, rectify the problems, and then try to bind the
T r

ei
Check environmental alarms as follows: (Manually trigger an external environment alarm. If the
a w alarm is reported normally, the configuration of external environment monitoring devices is
Hu correct.)
 The local engineer performs a loopback test on an alarm port of the UPEU using a
twisted pair. The remote engineer checks whether the U2000 receives an
environmental alarm from the alarm ports.
 The local engineer stops the loopback test. The remote engineer checks whether the
alarm on the U2000 is cleared.
 Both local and remote engineers repeat the preceding steps until all eight of the alarm
ports on the UPEU pass the tests.

• .
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Procedure Hu

o n
Choose Maintenance > Network Health Check > NE Health Check from the
ti
main menu (traditional style); alternatively, double-click Trace and
a
ic
Maintenance in Application Center and choose Monitor > NE Health Check
rt if
from the main menu (application style).

e
In NE Health Check tab page, click
.
C from the Scenario drop-down list in the Create Task dialog
Select a scenario
&

g
box.
n in
a i
Tr Optional: Change the name of the task in Task name as required.
i

e
w
 In Available NEs, move NEs to Selected NEs.
u a  In Execution Type, select a task execution mode.
H
 Click Next.
 If NE extension parameters do not need to be set for the required NE,
skip this step.
 In the NE List navigation tree, click an NE node, and set NE extension
parameters in the right pane
 Click Finish.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w

u
This verification report needs to be submittedHto the customer.
 Procedure :
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Procedure Hu

o n
Choose SON > Auto Deployment (traditional style); alternatively, double-click
a ti
SON in Application Center (application style). The Auto Deployment
ic
tiftask list, select one or multiple commissioning tasks for
window is displayed.
which you want e


r
In the commissioning
C to confirm completion. Right-click the tasks and choose
&
Confirm Completion from the shortcut menu to confirm the completion.
n
Open theg commissioning report of a completed task to view the details.
ni

i
Tra
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Procedure Hu

o n
Choose Maintenance > Maintenance Mode (traditional style); alternatively, double-
tia
click Configuration in Application Center and choose Settings > Maintenance
ic
tifCurrent NE Maintenance Mode is NORMAL.
Mode (application style).
 Click
r
and check whether
e

C
If Current NE Maintenance Mode is NORMAL, no further operation is
required.
&
n g
i
 If Current NE Maintenance Mode is not NORMAL, click , set the NE to
i n the NORMAL mode.

enter
a not allowed to set the maintenance mode of a separate-MPT base. You need
You rare

i Tset it based on each single-mode NE that comprises the separate-MPT base. If you
erestore NEs of only a single mode to the NORMAL mode, the setting will not affect
to
a w
Hu NEs of other modes and common modules of the separate-MPT base station.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

LTE eRAN13.1 Automatic OMCH Establishment P-0
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The advantage： Hu

o n
With the Automatic OMCH Establishment feature, a base station can establish
ati
OMCHs by network communication without requiring operations at the local
ic
if deployment and reducing the deployment cost and
end. This implements remote base station deployment by PnP, thereby
r t
facilitating base station
Ce
time
&
g
n in
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 During base station deployment by PnP, if the
u station needs to use digital
Hbase
n CA information, including the CA name,
certificates issued by the operator's CA to perform identity authentication with other
o
ti
devices, it also needs to obtain the operator's
CA address, CA port number, CAapath, and transmission protocol (HTTP or https)
i f ic
rt the base station also needs to obtain SeGW
used by the CA
e
information, includingC
 In IPsec networking scenarios,
&
the SeGW IP address and SeGW local name
i ng
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 A DHCP relay client must be deployed between Hua DHCP server and a DHCP client
that are in different broadcast domains
o n
t i and the DHCP relay agent listen to DHCP
a port number is 67, and the DHCP client listens
 During the exchange, the DHCP server
packets in which the destinationcUDP
i
r
to DHCP packets in which the
tif destination UDP port number is 68

C e the following logical NEs:
The DHCP procedure involves

&
DHCP client: a host that uses DHCP to obtain configuration parameters
g
in
 DHCP server: a host that allocates and distributes configuration parameters to
an
a i DHCP client
T r DHCP relay agent: an NE that transmits DHCP packets between a DHCP

ei server and a DHCP client.

a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 When creating a base station commissioningH
u
task by PnP, operators must specify the
n configuration file if the U2000 uses the

ESN if the U2000 uses the combination of the ESN and slot number as the BS ID.
o
The DID must be included in the base
a tiand slot number as the BS ID.
station
icidentifier planned by the operator. DID is scanned into

combination of the subrack topology
i f
rt scanner connected to the USB port of the main
 Deployment ID (DID) is the site
the base station using aebarcode
C station deployment. After being scanned into the base
station, the DID is&
control board during base
g broadcast in all BBUs. All main control boards will record the DID
n
and use it as
inthe BS ID in the DHCP procedure.
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 After the DHCP client starts, it broadcasts a H
u
DHCPDISCOVER packet to search for an
n
available DHCP server. The DHCPDISCOVER packet carries the identification
information about the DHCP client io
The DHCP server responds to c a tDHCPDISCOVER packet with a DHCPOFFER
fi
 the
packet
r t i
The DHCP client sendsea DHCPREQUEST packet to the DHCP server, requesting

C
&sends a DHCPACK packet to the DHCP client to assign
parameters such as an IP address
g
parametersin
 The DHCP server
i n such as an IP address
If the a

r
T used by other DHCP clients, the DHCP client sends a DHCPDECLINE packet to
assigned parameters cannot be used, for example, an assigned IP address has
i
enotify the DHCP server
been
a w
Hu  If the DHCP client does not need the assigned parameters any more, it sends a
DHCPRELEASE packet to notify the DHCP server so that the DHCP server can
assign these parameters to other DHCP clients

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 When the DHCP client and DHCP server areH
u
not in the same broadcast domain, they
n domain of the DHCP client to ensure the

cannot receive broadcast packets from each other. In this case, the DHCP relay agent
o
ticlient and DHCP server. Generally, the DHCP
function must be enabled in the broadcast
a
icon the gateway. When the DHCP relay agent function
communication between the DHCP
t i f
is enabled, the IP addressr of the corresponding DHCP server must be configured so
relay agent function is enabled
e
C can forward the DHCP packets from the DHCP client to
that the DHCP relay agent
the correct DHCP&
g
server.
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu is powered on, it broadcasts a
The procedure is as follows: After the base station
nthe BS ID.
DHCPDISCOVER packet with the BS ID. The DHCP server then sends configuration
o
information to the base station based
a ti on
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu of a DHCP client, a DHCP relay
If a DHCP server is not deployed on the L2 network
non the same L2 network as the DHCP client,

agent must be installed on the next-hop gateway of the DHCP client to forward DHCP
o
packets. The DHCP relay agent must
ti be
and the DHCP server must be onathe Layer 3 (L3) network in which packets are
forwarded by IP addresses ifi
c
e rt The DHCP relay agent converts DHCP packets
Cstation to unicast packets and routes the unicast packets to the
 The procedure is as follows:
&DHCP server sends unicast response packets to the DHCP relay

broadcast by the base
g
DHCP server. The
n
agent, which
inthen broadcasts received response packets on the L2 network
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The procedure for obtaining VLAN information Hisuas follows:
Once the DHCP function is enabled onn
ioacquisition, the base station actively acquires
 the base station, the base station starts the
VLAN acquisition process. With VLAN
t
a and records these VLAN IDs in a PnP VLAN-
ic
if DHCP packets without VLAN IDs, with VLAN ID
VLAN IDs of all received ARP packets
r t
ID table. The base station sends
C
being 0, or with VLAN IDe being 1.

&
The base station waits 20s. If the base station receives a DHCPOFFER packet within
n g
20s, it exits the DHCP procedure and enters the subsequent PnP deployment
procedure.iOtherwise,
n
the base station goes to the next step.
i
a station checks the PnP VLAN-ID table and tries to use all acquired VLAN

r
The base
Tto send DHCP packets. After that, if the base station receives a valid
i
IDs
eDHCPOFFER packet, it exits the DHCP procedure and enters the subsequent PnP
a w
Hu 
deployment procedure.
When the preceding steps fail:
 If the base station has only one transmission port, the base station repeats the
preceding steps on this port.
 If the base station has multiple transmission ports, it repeats the preceding
steps on other transmission ports.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The U2000 sends an OMCH establishment request Hu to the OM IP address of the base
station
n
To forward the OMCH establishmentio

a t ARP packets to obtain the MAC address
request to the correct base station, the next-hop
f ic of the request. The next-hop gateway or the L2

gateway of the base station broadcasts
i
rt to ARP packets so that correct VLAN IDs are contained in
network attaches VLANeIDs
C by the base station
&
the ARP packets received
g
inthe packets

n
contained in

T r packets with correct VLAN IDs can reach the DHCP relay agent that installed
The base
eoni the next-hop gateway of the DHCP client

DHCP
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 After a base station commissioning task by PnP Hutask is created on the U2000, the
n the source IP address is the IP address of
U2000 periodically sends an SSL-based or plaintext-based OMCH establishment
o
ti
request to the base station. In the request,
the U2000 and the destination IPaaddress is the OM IP address of the base station.
f c base station receives the request, it broadcasts
ithe
t i
ARP packets to the base rstation to obtain the MAC address mapping the interface IP
After the next-hop gateway of
C e
address of the base station
The base station &

g obtains VLAN information
n in first sends DHCP packets with no VLAN ID and then DHCP packets
The base station
i IDs. By exchanging DHCP packets with its next-hop gateway and DHCP

a
r the base station obtains the OMCH configuration data and validates the data
with VLAN
T
i base station responds to the OMCH establishment request from the U2000 and
server,
eThe
aw

Hu
then establishes an OMCH to the U2000

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu of a DHCP client, a DHCP relay
If a DHCP server is not deployed on the L2 network
non the same L2 network as the DHCP client,

agent must be installed on the next-hop gateway of the DHCP client to forward DHCP
o
packets. The DHCP relay agent must
ti be
and the DHCP server must be onathe Layer 3 (L3) network in which packets are
forwarded by IP addresses ifi
c
e rt The DHCP relay agent converts DHCP packets
Cstation to unicast packets and routes the unicast packets to the
 The procedure is as follows:
&DHCP server sends unicast response packets to the DHCP relay

broadcast by the base
g
DHCP server. The
n
agent, which
inthen broadcasts received response packets on the L2 network
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The base station exchanges DHCP packets H
u
with a public DHCP server to obtain
nalso needs to obtain the CA IP address

information, such as the interface IP address for accessing the untrusted domain and
o
the SeGW IP address. The base station
a ti for identity authentication with the SeGW.
icthe first DHCP procedure
because digital certificates are required
This procedure is referred toifas
e rt with the SeGW on the Internet Key Exchange (IKE)

C and IPsec SA, and then establishes an IPsec tunnel.
 The base station negotiates
&
security association (SA)
g
Because digital certificates are required for identity authentication with the SeGW, the
base stationnmust apply to the CA for digital certificates that can be identified by the
SeGW in
i
r a station exchanges DHCP packets with its U2000 DHCP server to obtain the

i
TheT base
e IP address used for accessing the trusted domain. This procedure is referred to
w
OM
u a as the second DHCP procedure. The second DHCP procedure varies depending on
H IPsec networking scenarios

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The U2000 sends an OMCH establishment requestHu to the OM IP address of the base
n
station. The request is forwarded to the SeGW
o
t i the base station has not been established
a to the interface IP address of the base station.
 The SeGW detects that the IPsec SA with
ic
tf
and sends an IKE negotiation request
The request is routed to the inext-hop
r
gateway of the base station

C e request to the correct base station, the next-hop
To forward the IKE negotiation
&
gateway of the base station broadcasts ARP packets to obtain the MAC address
g
mapping the destination IP address of the request. The next-hop gateway or the L2
n in VLAN IDs to ARP packets so that correct VLAN IDs are contained in
network attaches
the ARPi packets received by the base station
r a

i T base station parses all received ARP packets and records the VLAN IDs
The
econtained in the packets. It may record the VLAN ID in an ARP packet destined for
a w
Hu 
another base station
The base station attempts to send all DHCP packets with recorded VLAN IDs. Only
DHCP packets with correct VLAN IDs can reach the DHCP relay agent

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The U2000 sends a DHCPOFFER packet with Huno content to the interface IP address
n
of the base station. The packet is forwarded to the next-hop gateway of the base
o
station
a ti to the correct base station, the next-hop gateway
 To forward the DHCPOFFER packet
f c
iARP
r t
of the base station broadcastsi packets to obtain the MAC address mapping the
C e the request. The next-hop gateway or the L2 network

destination IP address of
& by the base station

attaches VLAN IDs to ARP packets so that correct VLAN IDs are contained in the
g
ARP packets received
n in parses all received ARP packets and records the VLAN IDs
The base station
i in the packets. It may record the VLAN ID in an ARP packet destined for

a
r base station
contained
T
i base station attempts to send all DHCP packets with recorded VLAN IDs. Only
another
eThe
aw

Hu
DHCP packets with correct VLAN IDs can reach the DHCP relay agent

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The base station sends a DHCP packet withH
u
no VLAN ID
n
io VLAN ID to the DHCP packet. The default
 The L2 network between the base station and the next-hop gateway of the base
t
a ID required for deploying the base station. With the
station automatically attaches the default
ic
f can be forwarded over the L2 network to the
VLAN ID is the same as the VLAN
correct VLAN ID, the DHCPipacket
DHCP relay agent and e r t
C
then reach the DHCP server
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The next-hop gateway periodically sends ping
u to the interface IP address of
Hpackets
n
the base station or an IP address on the network segment of the base station
o
t i
ato obtain the MAC address of the base station
 To forward ping packets to the correct base station, the next-hop gateway of the base
ic
if of the ping packets. The ARP packets received by
station broadcasts ARP packets
r t
C e VLAN IDs
the base station carry correct

&
g
contained in the packets. It may record the VLAN ID in an ARP packet destined for
n in station
another base

T r packets with correct VLAN IDs can reach the DHCP relay agent
The base
ei
DHCP
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu
n
io domain, respectively. The base station
 A public DHCP server and an U2000 DHCP server are deployed in the
t
a server the transmission configuration
untrusted domain and the trusted
i c
f establishing a temporary IPsec tunnel to the SeGW
obtains from the public DHCP
information required ifor
r t
and obtains fromethe U2000 DHCP server the formal transmission
C
&
configuration information
g
in domain. Instead, packets from the base station must be encrypted over

n
trusted
a i IPsec tunnel to the SeGW before being transmitted to the U2000 in the
r trusted domain
the
T
ei A CA is deployed. During base station deployment, the CA is accessible
aw

Hu
through IP addresses of NEs in the untrusted domain (for example, the
interface IP address of the base station
 After the base station starts, it must apply to the CA for operator-issued digital
certificates before connecting to the SeGW. After obtaining the certificates, the
base station negotiates with the SeGW to establish an IPsec tunnel

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The base station obtains VLAN information H
u
n
ioused for establishing a temporary IPsec tunnel.
 Using the DHCP procedure, the base station obtains from the public DHCP server the
transmission configuration information
t
a IP address of the base station, CA
ic
tif
The information includes the interface
r
configuration data, SeGW configuration data, and U2000 DHCP server IP address
Using CMPv2, the baseestation applies to the CA for an operator-issued device

C
&
certificate。The base station then adds the obtained certificate to the default trusted
g
certificate list for subsequent IPsec tunnel establishment
n in establishes a temporary IPsec tunnel to the SeGW

i
 The base station
r a
T
 With protection from the temporary IPsec tunnel, the base station obtains formal
i
edepending on whether the IP address used for accessing the trusted domain and the
transmission configuration information from the U2000 DHCP server in different ways,
a w
Hu U2000 DHCP server IP address are available
 The base station releases the temporary IPsec tunnel and uses formal transmission
configuration information to establish a formal IPsec tunnel to the SeGW
 After the formal IPsec tunnel is established, the base station waits for the OMCH
establishment request from the U2000 and then establishes an OMCH to the U2000.
If an OMCH is not established between the U2000 and base station within 10 minutes,
the base station restarts the automatic OMCH establishment procedure

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu
n
secure DHCP packets. Usingio
 An U2000 DHCP server in the trusted domain is deployed. IPsec does not
base station obtains its c a t a DHCP procedure in the untrusted domain, the
i
if the CA IP address. From the U2000 DHCP server, the
temporary IP address and the OM IP address, the
r
SeGW IP address, and
t
C e the formal transmission configuration information
base station obtains
&
g
trusted domain. Instead, packets from the base station must be encrypted over
n tunnel to the SeGW before being transmitted to the U2000 in the
the iIPsec
n
i domain.
a
r A CA is deployed and provides digital certificates for the base station to
trusted
T
ei perform mutual authentication with other NEs. During base station deployment,

a w
Hu 
the CA can be accessed by NEs' IP addresses in the untrusted domain
After the base station starts, it must apply to the CA for operator-issued digital
certificates before connecting to the SeGW

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
u

o n
The base station obtains required configuration information from the U2000 DHCP
server. The information includes theiinterface
t
a and the SeGW address
IP address and the OM IP address of
ic
if
the base station, the CA IP address,
By using the configuration t

r information obtained from the U2000 DHCP server, the
e CA for an operator-issued device certificate .The base
C
base station applies to the
&
station establishes a temporary IPsec tunnel to the SeGW. The base station then
g
adds the obtained certificate to the default trusted certificate list for subsequent IPsec
n in
tunnel establishment
a i the configuration information obtained from the U2000 DHCP server, the

T rstation establishes a formal IPsec tunnel to the SeGW

By using
i
base
eAfter
aw
 the formal IPsec tunnel is established, the base station waits for the OMCH
Hu
establishment request from the U2000 and then establishes an OMCH to the U2000

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu
n
io
 An U2000 DHCP server is deployed. The base station obtains the OMCH
t
a packets
configuration data and CA configuration data from the U2000 DHCP server.
ic
tif OMCH data. The base station uses the OM IP address
IPsec does not secure DHCP

r
IPsec does not secure
to access NEs inethe untrusted domain. IPsec tunnels established between the
C
&
base station and the SeGW are used to secure signaling and service data.
Either g
in the other party
 party involved in IPsec negotiation uses digital certificates or PSK to
i n
authenticate
a
r station starts, it must apply to the CA for operator-issued digital certificates
T
 A CA is required if digital certificates are used for authentication. After the base
ei before connecting to the SeGW. During base station deployment, the CA is

a w
Hu accessible through IP addresses of NEs in the untrusted domain (for example,
the interface IP address of the base station)

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
u
n
io If the base station uses the PSK for
 The base station obtains the OMCH configuration data and CA configuration data
(optional) from the U2000 DHCP server.
authentication, the base stationcdoes
t
a not need to obtain the CA configuration data. If
f i
the base station uses digitalicertificates
r t for authentication, the base station must
C e data
obtain the CA configuration

&
The base station applies to the CA for an operator-issued device certificate if it has
g
obtained CA information
n in configuration information obtained from the U2000 DHCP server, the

i establishes an OMCH to the U2000
 Based on the
r a
base station
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
MBTS GUL V100R013 Operation and Maintenance
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Alarms: refer to those generated when faultsH
u
occur to devices or exception occurs to
n
key functions, such as a board fault. Alarms can be cleared. Alarms are more severe
o
ti generated during the equipment running. They
than events.
 a
ic equipment at a certain time point. The system
Events: refer to the event occasionally
indicate only the status of thefrunning
rt i
C
not need manual handling. e
generates some events periodically to notifying you of the equipment status. They do
 & an alarm and an event are described as follows:

The differences between
n g is a special type of event. If the U2000 raises an alarm, it indicates

i
 An alarm
i n
that a fault occurs on the U2000 or its managed object. The fault must be
r arectified in time. Otherwise, the U2000 services cannot run properly because
i T the fault affects the functions of theU2000 or its devices.
e
aw
 An event indicates that the status of a managed object changes. The change
Hu
may not affect services of the U2000.
 For example, Central Processing Unit (CPU) busy, hard disk failure, or network cable
disconnection are alarms.
 For example, succeeded in periodic export of operation logs is a events.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Alarm severity : Hu
o n
ti
 Critical

c a
The device or resource may be no longer available. The fault must be
i
rt if
removed immediately.
 Major
C e

&Proper measures must be taken to recover the service.
The Quality of Service (QoS) of the device or resource decreases
g
in
greatly.
i n
a
 Minor
Tr The QoS of the device or resource decreases slightly. Proper

ei

w
measures must be taken or further observation need to be done to
u a avoid more severe faults.
H  Warning
 The QoS of the device or resource may be affected. Proper measures
must be taken.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Choose Monitor > Synchronize NE AlarmsH
u
(traditional style); alternatively, double-
n
click Fault Management in Application Center and choose Browse Alarm >
o
Synchronize NE Alarms (application
a
In the Synchronize NE Alarmscdialog
ti box, set the NEs whose alarms you want to
style).

synchronize and click OK. if

i
t
r click Yes.

C e
In the Confirm dialog box,
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Choose Topology > Main Topology (traditional Hustyle); alternatively, double-click
n
Topo View in Application Center and choose Topology > Main Topology
o
(application style) .
a ti the icon of an NE that generates alarms.
In the Main Topology window,cright-click
fi choose menu items such as Query Alarm/Event

From the displayed shortcutimenu,

t
r Alarm/Event > Alarm Logs.
Ce
> Current Alarm or Query

&
NOTE: In the window such as Browse Current Alarm-Alarm Source or
g
Alarm Logs-Alarm Source, all alarms generated by the NE are displayed.
n in view, the color of an NE icon depends on the alarm severity. If an NE

i multiple alarms at the same time, its icon displays the color of the highest
 In the topology
a
r among these generated alarms.
generates
i T
severity
eWhen
aw
 you move the pointer to the icon of the NE that generates alarms, a tip is
Hu
displayed, prompting the alarm state, severity, and count.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Choose System > NE Monitor (traditional style);Hu alternatively, double-click
n
Configuration in Application Center and choose Browser > NE Monitor
o
(application style) . i
tthe
ic a
tif
 NOTE: In the NE Monitor window, details of the NEs that are managed by the
r
U2000 are displayed.
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu style); alternatively, double-click
Choose Monitor > Display Alarm Panel (traditional
nthe icon on the toolbar to open the alarm

Fault Management in Application Center and choose Browse Alarm > Display
o
ti
Alarm Panel (application style) or click
a
ic
panel.
i f
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 Choose Monitor > Query Alarm Bar Chart (traditional style); alternatively, double-click
Fault Management in Application Center and choose Browse Alarm > Query Alarm Bar
n
Chart (application style).

ti o
The statistical results of the added current alarms templates are displayed in the Query
Alarm Bar Chart window.
ic a

if
rt
The U2000 provides the default bar chart named All objects. The default bar chart is used to

e
monitor all the alarms in the current alarms and cannot be deleted.
C Alarm Bar Chart window correspond to the template displayed
The bar charts in the Query
on the alarm panel. & you add or delete an alarm bar chart in the Query Alarm Bar
When
Chart window, g
i n the corresponding alarm template is automatically added to or deleted from
in
the alarm panel. Similarly, when you perform the add or delete operation on the alarm panel,
the bara
T r chart in the Query Alarm Bar Chart window is modified accordingly.
eSeti the contentsTask Operations
a w displayed and outlook to be Click Options. In the Options dialog box, set the contents
u
and outlook to be displayed as required. Click OK.
H Add an alarm list template a.Click Add.

b.In the Choose dialog box, select an alarm list template
and click OK.
Delete a bar chart a.Select one bar chart that does not belong to All objects,
and click Delete to delete alarm list templates.
b.In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes.
Locate a bar chart to the alarm list Select one bar chart, and then click Locate to Alarm List to
display the Browse Alarm List window.
Set as the monitoring template a.Select one bar chart and click Show on Alarm Lamp.
b.In the Confirm dialog box, click Yes.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Choose Monitor > Browse Current AlarmsH
u
n or click on the toolbar.

o
Browse Current Alarms (application
a ti style),
In the Filter dialog box, set filterccriteria.
fi template, or have specified that the Filter dialog

 t i
r displayed by following the procedure described in
If you have set the default
C e
box is not automatically
&
Alarm/Event Filtering, you need to click Filter to open the Filter dialog box.
Click OK. Thegresult is displayed in the Browse Current Alarms window.
in

i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Choose Monitor > Query Alarm Logs (traditional Hu style); alternatively, double-click
n on the toolbar.
Fault Management in Application Center and choose Browse Alarm > Query
o
In the Filter dialog box, set the c a ti filter criteria.
Alarm Logs (application style), or click
fi in the Query Alarm Logs window.

 alarm

r t i
Click OK. The result is displayed
C e
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 Choose Monitor > Alarm Settings > Template Management (traditional style); alternatively, double-click Fault Management in Application Center and choose Alarm Settings > Template Management (application style).
 In the Template Management window, click Add.
n
 In the Add Template dialog box, enter a template name and description, select a template type and template sharing, and then click Next.
o
 In the Add Template dialog box, set filter criteria.
ti
 Click Finish.
ic a
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Collecting Statistics on Alarm Logs
Hu

o n
Choose Monitor > Alarm Log Statistics (traditional style); alternatively, double-click Fault
ti
Management in Application Center and choose Browse Alarm > Alarm Log Statistics
(application style).
ic a

rt if
In the Filter dialog box, set the statistical criteria of alarm logs, and click OK.
e
 Collecting Statistics on Event Logs

C
Choose Monitor > Event Log Statistics (traditional style); alternatively, double-click Fault
&
Management in Application Center and choose Browse Alarm > Event Log Statistics
g
In the Filterin
n
dialog box, set the statistical criteria of event logs, and click OK.
i

r a
T
ei
a w
H u

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu Locate in Topology from the
In the query result, right-click a record and choose
shortcut menu.
o n on the client.
ti on the toolbar, and select Display alarms
The NE that generates the alarm is identified
a
 Optional: In the Main Topology,
i f ic click
rt the alarms of the selected objects only.

of selected objects.
The alarm browse areae
C
displays
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
u
n
iostyle).
t
a and click OK.
In the Filter dialog box, set filterccriteria,
i
tif the default template, or have specified that the Filter


r
dialog box is noteautomatically displayed by following the procedure described
NOTE: If you have set
C
&
in Alarm/Event Filtering, you need to click Filter to open the Filter dialog box.
Select one or g
in dialog box, click Yes.
 more alarms and click Acknowledge.
i n
a
 In the Confirm
T r
eiSelect All
Operations
Task
a w Right-click one or more alarms in the window and choose
Hu Select All to select all the alarms.

Acknowledge Right-click one or more alarms in the window and choose
Acknowledge.
After an alarm is acknowledged, the alarm is concerned
by the user who acknowledges this alarm. Other users do
not need to concern about this alarm. NOTE: You can
also select one or more alarms and click Acknowledge.
Unacknowledged Right-click one or more alarms in the window and choose
Unacknowledged. The Acknowledgement Status of the
alarm is set to Unacknowledged, the Acknowledgement
User of the alarm is set to the current user.
Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
u
n
o
a ti and click OK.
style).
In the Filter dialog box, set filterccriteria,
fithe default template, or have specified that the Filter

NOTE: If you have set

r t i
dialog box is noteautomatically displayed by following the procedure described

C
&
in Alarm/Event Filtering, you need to click Filter to open the Filter dialog box.
Select one or g
in dialog box, click Yes.
 more uncleared alarms, and then click Clear.

i n
In the Confirm
r a

T
Result
ei Ifagain.
 the fault related to the alarm has been rectified, the alarm will not be reported
a w
Hu  If the fault related to the alarm persists, the alarm may be reported again.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Choose Monitor > Alarm Settings > Experience Hu (traditional style); alternatively,
n
double-click Fault Management in Application Center and choose Alarm Settings
> Experience (application style). io
a t In the Search Range dialog box, specify a

search range and click OK. if

ic
In the Experience window, click Range.
rt
Enter an alarm or eventename, group name, or handling experience in the Filter by

C
name text box.
&
g
In the Alarm/Event Name navigation tree, alarm or event names with the specified
n
keyword are inlisted.
In thea i

r Alarm/Event
T Modify.
Name navigation tree, select an alarm or event name, and then
i
click
eIn the Experience dialog box, enter alarm or event handling experience. Click OK.
aw

Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 In the rack view of the device panel, you can queryH u
information about a board or perform
n
operations on the board. The board information and operations on boards vary according to
o
ti using the following methods:
the board types.
 You can open the Device Panel window
a
ic Panel (traditional style); alternatively, double-click
i f
Choose Maintenance > Device
rt

C e
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
Trace and Maintenance in Application Center and choose Monitor > Device Panel
 You can open the Device Panel window through the main topology for an NE that
supports the device panel.
 For GBTS groups:
 Choose Topology > Main Topology and select GBTS Group View from the
Current View drop-down list. Then, in the topology navigation tree or topology
view, right-click a GBTS group and choose Device Maintenance from the
shortcut menu.
n
 For other NEs:
it o
 Choose Topology > Main Topology and select Physical Root or Electronic
ic a
if
rt
View from the Current View drop-down list. Then, in the topology navigation
Ce
tree or topology view, right-click an NE and choose Device Maintenance from
the shortcut menu.

&
You can activate the Device Maintenance window in the main topology view for NEs
ng
that support the device panel function. The Device Panel, MML Command, and
i
in
Signaling Trace tab pages are available in the Device Maintenance window, allowing
a
you to perform operations such as observing the panel, issuing MML commands, and
creating or managing trace tasks.
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Query Board Inventory Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu scenarios:
A health check may be performed in the following
n
io maintenance inspection, or device recovery
 In the case of daily network maintenance, safeguard for significant festivals
t
a system engineers and network management
and holidays, quarterly preventive
after faults are rectified,cthe
i
if about the potential threats to NEs on the network and
r t
engineers need to learn
C e
rectify them in time.

&
In the case of an NE upgrade, system engineers and network management
g
engineers need to verify the upgrade by learning about the status of the NE
n in and after the upgrade based on the health check results. In addition,
before
a i can use the NHC in the case of a patch upgrade or preventive

r maintenance inspection (PMI).
you
i T
eChoose
aw
 Maintenance > Network Health Check > NE Health Check from the main
Hu
menu (traditional style); alternatively, double-click Trace and Maintenance in
Application Center and choose Monitor > NE Health Check from the main menu
 In NE Health Check tab page, click .
 Select a scenario from the Scenario drop-down list in the Create Task dialog box.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The menu bar : Hu
n
Configure Emergency Click Configure Emergency OM Channel on the LMT. On the displayed Configure Emergency OM
o
ti
OM Channel Channel dialog box, select and configure the target base station that requires emergency
a
maintenance.
Obtain
ic
Choose Obtain Documentation List on the LMT. The documentation packages of the corresponding
if
Documentation List product version are listed in the displayed dialog box.
FTP Tool
r t
Used to download the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) tool.
Ce
1.Click FTP Tool. A File Download - Security Warning dialog box is displayed.
2.Click Save to save the FTP server software SFTPServer.exe to the computer where the LMT is
&
installed.
ng
Command Group Some MML commands, GUI commands, and virtual commands are added to comprise a command
i
Settings group, command group is used to add commands to a specified command group so that an admin
n
user can add operation authorities for authority-limited users.
ai
1.Click Command Group Settings. The Command Group Settings dialog box is displayed.
T r 2.Select a customized command group (G_22 to G_31) from Command group drop-down list.
ei
3.Select the MML command or GUI command to be added from the left pane, and click . The added
MML command or GUI command is displayed in the right pane. Then, click Apply.
w
4.Select the MML command or GUI command options to be removed from the right pane, and click
u aPassword
. The removed MML command or GUI command is displayed in the left pane. Then, click Apply.
Used to change the password.
H 1.Click Password. A Password dialog box is displayed.
2.Enter the old password in the Old Password text box and the new password in the New Password
and Confirm Password text boxes.
3.Click OK. The password is changed.
About Displays the version information.
Lockup Locks the LMT window.
System Settings Used to set the automatic lockup time and specify the path to save trace files.
1.Click System Settings. A System Settings dialog box is displayed.
2.Enter the automatic lockup time and the path in the Auto lock if no operation within (s) and Save
path text boxes, respectively.
3.Click Submit. The system setting is complete.
Logout Used to log out of the LMT.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The boards supporting block include the BBP,
u RFU, UBRI, AARU and GTMU.
HRRU,
n
io the command is executed.
 IMMEDIATE (Immediate) means that the board is blocked and services carried on the
t
athat the board is blocked when no service is carried
board are interrupted immediately after
ic
tif
 SHUTDOWN (Shutdown) means
on the board.
DELAY (Delay) means e
r

C that the board is blocked when no service is carried on the
&
board or after the time specified by the Duration of the shutting down state parameter
is reached. g
n in all the three block types are supported.


a i mode, only the IMMEDIATE type is supported, and the IMMEDIATE type
In LTE mode,

T r
In UMTS
eIni GSMeffect
takes even when this parameter is set to SHUTDOWN or DELAY.
a w
 mode, only the IMMEDIATE type is supported, and the board is blocked 10s
Hu after the system tries to hand over traffic on this board when this parameter is set to
SHUTDOWN or DELAY.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 This command cannot be used to reset an unavailable Hu board.
The reset of a board causes interruptionnof services carried by the board.
ioboard to become unavailable before initialization.

 The reset of a board also causes the t

acomponents of the other mode can be reset through
ic
tifcarried on those components are accordingly interrupted.
 In a dual-mode BS, the common
r
Ceof the mode at the peer end will be interrupted after a multi-
this command. The services
 For an MBTS, services
&
mode RF unit is reset.
g

n inboard of the local mode or the baseband processing board that

For a multi-mode BS in CPRI MUX, if the local mode aggregates data, resetting the
a i data will interrupt the services of the peer mode.

main control
T r
aggregates
 i the software is being supplemented or activated on the base station, reset the main
eIfactive
a w board after the software supplementation or activation is complete.
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 If the cabinet number, subrack number, or slot
u is not specified, the information
Hnumber
n
about boards contained in all cabinets, subracks, or slots is displayed.
o
t i
a is displayed as NULL.
 The standby status of an UMPT or an LMPT can be queried by running this command.
The standby status of any othercboard
i
r tif
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 After the execution of DSP CPUUSAGE command, Hu the usage of the master CPU,
n
slave CPU, and DSP (if any) is displayed. If a board works properly, its CPU usage is
lower than 75%. If the CPU usage isio
a t constantly higher than 75%, an ALM-26202
ic
Board Overload alarm is reported.
i f
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Use LST RRUCHAIN command to query theH
u
configuration of the RRU chain.
n
io to query the topology and hardware
 Use DSP RRUCHAIN command to query the physical information of the RRU chain.
 Use DSP RRUCHAINPHYTOPO command t
aor ring connected to a CPRI port.
ic
tif
information about the RRU chain
r
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H u
Install Status: Indicates the in-position state of the CPRI port. If the base station uses CPRI
n If the base station uses CPRI MUX, the queried

MUX, the queried value of this parameter is NULL on the converged party side.

value of this parameter is UNKNOWN ton
o
i the converged party side.
Port Type: Indicates the type of the CPRI port.
a

i
Administrative Status: Indicates the
ficadministrative
state of the CPRI port can be tblocked
state of the CPRI port, the administrative
e rconfiguration of the RRU or RFU. If the base station uses CPRI

or unblocked. The queried value of this parameter is
MUX, the queried valueC

unblocked when quering the
& the mode of the CPRI port. There are two modes: Maser and Slave.
of this parameter is NULL on the converged party side.

g
CPRI Port Mode: Indicates
in the CPRI port connected to a baseband processing board works in slave mode
All CPRI ports on a baseband processing board work in master mode. On the first-level RRU in
n
i
an RRU chain,
a
T rand the baseband processing boards are in dual-star topology, the two CPRI ports on the
and the other CPRI port connected to the second-level RRU works in master mode. When an
i work in slave mode.

RRU
eRRU
a w
u
 CPRI Port Mux Status: Indicates the multiplexing status of a CPRI port. When the backplane
H
fails, "UNKNOWN" is displayed if you query the status of a CPRI port of the aggregated party
and "NULL" is displayed if you query the status of a CPRI port on an RRU.
 Availability Status:Indicates the availability state of the CPRI port, the availability state of the
CPRI port can be normal, in breakpoint, or NULL, when the CPRI port is in breakpoint, it
indicates that a breakpoint is configured on the RRU chain/ring. At this moment, although the
optical cables are connected, the CPRI link is disconnected. The breakpoint is configured to
prevent temporary alarms from being reported during network operations. When the CPRI port
is normal, it indicates that there is no breakpoint on the RRU chain/ring. If the base station
uses CPRI MUX, the queried value of this parameter is NULL on the converged party side.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu entity of the control link is the
The control link is a logical concept. The physical
topology between the interconnected BBUs.
o n
t i be executed on all sides to ensure that all
a
 In a multi-mode BS, this command must
ic
ifa UCIU, the value of the Upper Port No. parameter
control links have the same configuration.
When the upper-level nodetis

must range from 0 to 4.e

r
C When the upper-level node is a UMPT, the value must be 8.

The statisticalg
&
DSP CTRLLNKSTAT: Use this command to query the bit error rate of a control link.
n total packet receiving time, and total erroneous packet receiving

information mainly includes the number of received packets, number of
erroneous ipackets,
n
i reflects the transmission quality of the link.For the UCIU, this command can
r a
time and
beTused to display the bit error rates (BERs) of ports 0 to 4 and port 8. For the UMPT,
i command can only be used to display the BER of port 8.
ethis
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Software Types
H u
n It provides basic device drive function and can be
 BootROM All the boards on the base station is equipped with the BootROM. The BootROM
o
ti medium, which is used to store binary data, that is, the
refers to the software bound with hardware.
started and updated manually.
a
fic is the version software of a base station.
 The BootROM is a re-writable storage
i
machine codes.
BTS software The BTS t

r
Cold patch The BTSecold patch is also known as the patch. It can upgrade a specific board or
software

Cfunctions or to fix some problems.

&systempatchoperation
module to improve
g
 Hot patch The hot is also known as the online patch. It supports the upgrade without
File Types i n
disrupting the and rectify some function defects.
in configuration file A data configuration file contains parameter settings for each module of


a
r the base station.
Data
T
ei about the maintenance and operation of the base station.
 Maintenance and operation log A maintenance and operation log file records the information
a w
u
 Main control log A main control log file is a collection of logs including the original,
H
commissioning, or user alarm log, running log, call log, cell log, maintenance log, and operation
log.
 Board log A board log file is a collection of logs including the log of active and standby central
processing unit (CPU) breakdown, the detailed breakdown log, and the digital signal processor
(DSP) memory log.
 Routine received total wideband power (RTWP) test log After a routine RTWP test is started, the
system keeps a real-time RTWP log.
 device archive file records information about each board of the BTS such as the manufacturing
information and running time.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 BTS Node: provides infrastructure and application Hu platforms for a base station to
nand multimode base stations according to the
deploy GBTS Service, NodeB Service, and eNodeB Service. BTS nodes are
o
classified into single-mode, dual-mode,
a ti
types and amount of services deployed.
f c
icontrol
 Itf_Platform-Service: service
r t i interface provided by BTS nodes, including the
C e version upgrade interface, starting and restarting

service deployment interface,
&
interface, and status monitoring interface.
g
Itf_Node-RAT: interface provided by BTS nodes to control the common resources in
in including resource application, releasing, activation, and

n
a base station,
a i
r
reconfiguration interfaces. Common resources in a base station include transmission
i T
resources, carrier resource, and universal resources such as SCTP links, RF TX and
eRX channels, and CPU progress. SCTP is short for Signaling Control Transmission
a w
u
Protocol.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu on software, including version,
Software management refers to all the operations
n
patch, as well as related settings to software.
There are two areas inside MBTS toio

a t store version software and configuration file. The
area where current version andcconfiguration
i
tf
is stored is called main area, while the
other area is called standby iarea.
Main area and standby e
r

C area can be switched over by the command ACT SOFTWARE
&
in upgrading scenario or by the command RBK SOFTWARE in roll back scenario.
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu command specifies the time
The activate time in the output of the LST SOFTWARE
n
when the current software is activated after the software upgrade. If the software
upgrade fails or is not performed in aio
a t normal way, the activate time is displayed as
ic
NULL.
If the query result shows thatifthe version of an application is located in the main area,

t and corresponds to this application has been
rversion
e
activated. If the queryCresult shows that the version of an application is not located in
the software that is in this
&software that is in this version and corresponds to this application

g
the main area, the
n An application has a maximum of two versions. If the two versions are
n i
is not activated.
a i the query result shows that they are located in the standby area.
r
not activated,
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 You can download the base station software, data H u
configuration file, and license from an File
n
Transfer Protocol (FTP) server to the local maintenance terminal (LMT).
o
 Procedure
Download the FTP server software. a
ti

server at the LMT computer.) fi

c (Optional. Perform this step only when there is no FTP
i
rt of the LMT main window, click FTP Tool. The File

e
C Warning dialog box is displayed.
In the upper right corner
Download-Security
Click Save&
g
 to save the FTP server software SFTPServer.exe to the LMT computer.
Double-click n

n i SFTPServer.exe. SFTPServer.exe is decompressed into an SFTPServer folder.

a i
r on the right side of the taskbar after the FTP server is started.
 Open SFTPServer. Double-click SFTPServer.exe to start the FTP server. The icon is
i T
displayed

eOptional: If the FTP server starts for the first time, an FTP password config dialog box is
a w prompted, indicating to modify the password of the FTP server, enter the initial password
Hu hwbs@com, and enter and confirm the new password. Then, click OK.
 Configure the FTP server.
 Double-click .
 Set User name, Password, Working directory, the default user name is admin. Set
Working directory to the root directory of the FTP server, which is D:\FTP, and retain
default values for other parameters.
 Click OK. The FTP server is successfully configured.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Procedure Hu

o n
In the LMT main window, click Device Maintenance.
a ti BTS Maintenance > Common Maintenance >

In the navigation tree, choose

Software Management.cDouble-click Software Management.

t i fi tab page is displayed.
e r
The Software Management

Set parameters

Crelated to FTP Server Configuration on the Software
Management & tab page.
Selectg

i n tasks based on scenarios.
a in Execute. The base station performs the selected tasks from top to
Click
r bottom as required. The operation results are displayed in Information.

i T
e Clear Clear Message to clear all contents displayed in Information.
w

u a  MML mode
H  Run the DLD SOFTWARE command to download software from the FTP to
server the base station.
 Directory structure of the software package :

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 This section describes how to download the H
u
BTS extra configuration file from the FTP
n
server to the base station. The downloaded extra configuration files take effect after
o
activating.
a tifile requires that the FTP server be used to

f ic Therefore, this operation is available when you log
Downloading the extra configuration
i
rtthe LMT.
download files to the base station.
C e
in to the base station using
 Procedure
&main window, click Device Maintenance.
g
innavigation tree, choose BTS Maintenance > Common Maintenance.
 In the LMT
Innthe

a i
T r Double-click Extra Configuration File Transfer.
ei The Extra Configuration File Transfer tab page is displayed.
a w  Set related parameters on the Extra Configuration File Transfer tab page.
Hu  Click Activate or Preactivate. The operation results are displayed in

Information.
 Clear Clear Message to clear all contents displayed in Information.
 NOTE:
 To enable the configuration data to take effect on the base station, click
Activate. To only check the correctness of the configuration data, click
Preactivate.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 This section describes how to download the H
u
data configuration file from the File
n Protocol (FTP) server. The downloaded

Transfer Protocol (FTP) server to the base station, or upload the data configuration
o
ti
file from the base station to the File Transfer
data configuration file takes effectaafter the base station restarts.
i f ic
rt
 Procedure
Graphical user interfacee(GUI) mode

C

&
n g
i
 In the navigation tree, choose BTS Maintenance > Common Maintenance.
i n
Double-click Data Configuration File Transfer.
r aThe Data Configuration File Transfer tab page is displayed.

i T Set related parameters on the Data Configuration File Transfer tab page.

e 
a w Click Start.
u

H  Man-machine language (MML) mode

 Run the ULD CFGFILE command to upload the file from the base station to
the FTP server.
 Run the DLD CFGFILE command to download the file from the FTP server to
the base station.
 Run the BKP CFGFILE command to back up the current configuration of the
BS.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Files backed up using the BKP CFGFILE command H u and uploaded using the DLD
nfile name.
CFGFILE command are saved in the same directory on an NE. An existing file will be
o
overwritten by a new file with the same
i this command is not activated within 24
tusing
 If a configuration file generated by
ic a
hours, it will be automaticallyfdeleted.
i
rtcommand be not executed when ALM-26242
 It is recommended that this
e
C is reported.
Configuration File Damaged
Execution of this &
g
 command will increase the CPU usage, and CPU overload may
ina light load.

affect UE access. Therefore, it is recommended that you run this command when the
system has n
i configuration file is encrypted, you need to decrypt the file before running
r a
T
 If a backup
i
e[Co-MPT]Configuration
the ACT CFGFILE command to activate the file.
aw
 files backed up on the U2000 and LMT are both named
Hu
CFGDATA.XML.
 [NodeB]Configuration files backed up on the U2000 and LMT are both named
NodebCfg.XML.
 [eNodeB]The backup file is automatically named according to the OM terminal type
(LMT or U2000) after you run this command. For example, after you run this
command on the LMT to back up an XML-format configuration file, the name of the
backup file is LMT.XML; after you run this command on the U2000 to back up an
XML-format configuration file, the name of the backup file is M2000.XML.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Manually Backing Up NE Data
Hu

o n
Choose Maintenance > Backup Management > NE Backup (traditional style);
ti
alternatively, double-click Software Management in Application Center and choose
c a
NE File > NE Backup (application style). The NE Backup window is displayed.
i

rt if
Select an NE type from the drop-down list.
e
 In the navigation tree, select the NEs whose data needs to be backed up.

C
Click Backup. Click Yes in the displayed Confirm dialog boxes, respectively.

&
Backing Up NE Data on Schedule
ChoosegMaintenance > Task Management (traditional style); alternatively, double-
clickin

i n System Management in Application Center and choose Task Schedule >
r aTask Management (application style). The Task Management window is displayed.
i T Click New. The New Task dialog box is displayed.


e
w
Set the basic information about the task.
u a  Type the name of a scheduled task in the Task Name field.
H 

Select NE Backup from the Task Type area.
Select One-time or Periodic from the Execution Type area.
 Click Next to set the time for performing the task.
 Click . In the displayed Select Time dialog box, specify the time for starting the
task.
 Perform relevant operations according to the task type.
 Click Next, set encryption options of NE backup files and select the backup mode.
 Click Finish.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 PLL status indicates the working mode of theH
u
clock. It also indicates whether the
n
system clock is stable. The working mode of the clock can be Fast tracking, Locked,
o
Holdover, or Free running.
a tito query the status of an IP clock link. If the link
 Use the DSP IPCLKLINK command
f ic of all IP clock links is displayed.
number is not specified, the istatus
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Huthe Task from Device Panel.
For performance GBTS RF Test ,you can select
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Huand period for scanning frequencies of
This section describes how to set the start time
a cell.
n
Graphical user interface (GUI) modeio

a t
f ic Device Maintenance.
ti choose BTS Maintenance > GSM Maintenance.
 In the LMT main window, click
r
Ce Frequency Scan.
 In the navigation tree,
Double-click Configure
& Frequency Scan dialog box is displayed.

The Configure
ng parameters in the Configure Frequency Scan dialog box.



i
Set related
a in Start.
Click
r


i T
Man-machine language (MML) command mode
eRun the SET GCELLFREQSCAN command.
w

u a
H

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 This section describes how to query the maximum Hu and average of the main level and
n
diversity level. By checking whether the signal strength of a frequency is greater than
0, you can determine whether there iisointerference to the uplink frequency.
This task is specific to GSM. ca
t

i i
fchannels.

r
Each carrier has two receive t One is the main receive channel and the other
C e
is the diversity receive channel. The main level is the uplink signal level on the main
&
receive channel, and the diversity level is the uplink signal level on the diversity
g
receive channel.
Procedurein
in

r a
T
 In the LMT main window, click Device Maintenance.
ei InDouble-click
 the navigation tree, choose BTS Maintenance > GSM Maintenance.
a w Query Frequency Scan. The Query Frequency Scan tab page
Hu is displayed.
 Set related parameters in the Query Frequency Scan dialog box.
 Click Start.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Graphical user interface (GUI) mode Hu

o n

a ti BTS Maintenance > GSM Maintenance.

In the navigation tree, choose
f ic Status. The Monitor Channel Status tab

page is displayed. ti
Double-click Monitor Channel
e r on the Monitor Channel Status tab page.


C
Set related parameters
&
Click Start.
g

NOTE:
n in A dot under a channel indicates a sub-channel. The standalone
a i
r

i T dedicated control channel (SDCCH) has eight sub-channels, and the
e traffic channel (TCH) has one sub-channel.
a w The * mark to the upper right side of a carrier number indicates that the
u

H 
carrier works in mutual-aid mode.
The channel status monitoring window is fixed in size and does not
change with the web page.
 Man-machine language (MML) command mode
 Run the DSP GTRXCHNSTAT command.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 BTS Speech Loop Test Hu

o n
The BTS voice loopback test is performed on the TCHs to check the
a ti
connection status of the TRX speech channel between the Um interface and
ic
ifto be tested. If the MS that occupies the tested speech
the DBUS of the BTS. During the test, the TMU loops back the DBUS timeslot
r t
of the speech channel
C
channel can heareits own voice, it indicates that the speech channel among the
& the speech channel is not properly connected.
Um interface, the TRX, and the DBUS is properly connected; otherwise, it
g
indicates that
n
TRX Speechin Loop Test
i TRX voice loopback test is performed on the TCHs to check the

a
r connection status of the TRX speech channel between the Um interface and
The
T

ei the DSP is normal. During the test, the DSP encodes and then sends the data.
a w
Hu If the MS that occupies the TCH can hear its own voice, it indicates that the
speech channel between the Um interface and the TRX is properly connected;
otherwise, it indicates that the speech channel is not properly connected.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 BIU Loop Test Hu

o n
The BIU Loop Test tests the timeslot transmission of the TRX service channel
ati
on the BTS DBUS. The TRX sends the service channel data to the service
ic
ifby the TRX itself. The TRX compares the data with the
timeslot of the BTS DBUS. After the loopback through the TMU, the TRX
r t
receives the data sent
C ethen reports the error ratio to get link quality of the service
original data, and
&
channel on the BTS DBUS.
g
TRX RF Self Loop Test
Thein

i n TRX RF Self Loop Test tests the quality of the RX and TX channels. The
r aTRX RF self loop starts from the DSP, passes the BBU, loops back from the
i T RRU, and then passes the BBU again to come back to the DSP. The DSP
e
a w then compares the data from the original data to learn the RX and TX channel
Hu quality of the BTS.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 BIU loopback test:
Hu
The BIU loopback test is used to test the transmission of the TRX channels over the timeslots of the DBUS of the BTS.
n

During the test, the TRX sends the data of the service channel to the service timeslot of the DBUS. The TMU loops back
ti o
the data so that the TRX can receive the data that is sent. The TRX compares the data and reports BER. From the BER,
the testing technicians know the quality of the service channel of the DBUS.
 RF self-loopback test
ic a
if
This test is used to check the quality of the receiving and sending channels of the TRX. This test is initiated by the signal
t

r
process of the TRX, passes the baseband unit, is looped by the RF unit, passes the baseband unit again, and returns to the
e
signal process. The signal process compares the data and reports BER. From the BER, the testing technicians know the
C
quality of the receiving and sending channels of the BTS.
 BTS voice loopback test

&
The BTS voice loopback test is used to test the transmission of the voice service from the air interface to the DBUS of the
ng
BTS. During the test, the TMU loops back the DBUS timeslot that carries the service channel. If the user who occupies the
channel can listen to the voice, it indicates the channel is good; otherwise it indicates the channel is disconnected.

n i
TRX voice loopback test
ai
 The TRX voice loopback test is used to test the transmission of the voice service from the air interface to the signal process.
r
During the test, the signal process directly codes and sends the decoded data. If the user who occupies the channel can
T
listen to the voice, it indicates the channel is good; otherwise it indicates the channel is disconnected.
ei
 Graphical user interface (GUI) mode
aw

 In the navigation tree, choose BTS Maintenance > GSM Maintenance. Double-click Test Channel Loopback.
Hu
 The Test Channel Loopback tab page is displayed.
 Set related parameters on the Test Channel Loopback tab page.
 Click Start.
 Run the following commands to perform a channel loopback test:
 Run the STR GBTSTST command to start the test.
 Run the STP GBTSTST command to stop the test.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 BIU loopback test: This task is used to test the
u
Htimeslots of the TRX channel over the
nTMU loops back the data so that the TRX can

DBUS of the BTS. During the test, the TRX sends the data of the signaling channel to
o
ti
the signaling timeslot of the DBUS; the
receive the data that it sent. The a
ic the quality of the signaling channel of the DBUS.
TRX compares the data and reports BER. From the
i f
rt mode
BER, the testing technician knows
Graphical user interfacee(GUI)
C


& tree, choose BTS Maintenance > GSM Maintenance.
g
in Test TRX Loopback.
 In the navigation
i n
Double-click
r a
T
 The Test TRX Loopback dialog box is displayed.
ei Set related parameters in the Test TRX Loopback dialog box.
a w  Click Start.
Hu  Man-machine language (MML) command mode

 Run the following commands to perform a TRX loopback test:

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Huin the network to maximize
This section describes how to test idle timeslots
interference in the network.
o n
t i interference level in the network during
acan maximize the interference purposely. To achieve
 To obtain information about the maximum
ic
if idle channels under the condition that normal
network optimization phase, you
r t
this, transmit bursts on downlink
C
services are not affected.e The transmission of bursts on idle channels maximizes the
&
downlink interference and the uplink interference stimulated by downlink signals.
Procedure
g
in interface (GUI) mode


i n
Graphical user
r a
T
 In the LMT main window, click Device Maintenance.
ei InDouble-click
 the navigation tree, choose BTS Maintenance > GSM Maintenance.
a w Test Idle Timeslot.
Hu  The Test Idle Timeslot dialog box is displayed.

 Set related parameters in the Test Idle Timeslot dialog box.
 Click Start.
 Run the following commands to test idle timeslots:

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hustanding wave ratio (VSWR) of a
This section describes how to check the voltage
n is installed correctly. The U2000 can check

base station. The VSWR, also referred to as standing wave ratio, is the standard used
o
ti and centralizedly. This helps check whether the
for checking whether the antenna system
a
ALD is installed properly. ifi
c
the VSWR of a base station remotely
e rt into single-frequency VSWR check and multi-frequency

C
 The VSWR check is classified
&
VSWR check.
g
Single-frequency VSWR check: uses the center frequency to check the VSWR.
in

i n
Multi-frequency VSWR check: concurrently checks VSWRs of multiple
r afrequencies based on the frequencies set by users.

i T VSWRs may shorten transmission distances of signals and cause damage to
epower amplifiers, affecting the communication network negatively. The normal value
 Large
a w
Hu range of VSWR is 1 to 1.5. The U2000 provides the default threshold plan. You can
set the threshold plan before VSWR check as required.
 Testing VSWR leads to interruption of base station services. Therefore, you need to
perform this operation during non-busy hours or after base station services are
segregated.
 Choose Maintenance > Antenna Management > VSWR Test (traditional style);
alternatively, double-click Trace and Maintenance in Application Center and
choose Maintenance > Antenna Management > VSWR Test (application style). The

Permission
VSWR Test window is displayed.
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 VSWR, Voltage Standing Wave Ratio
 This is a high-risk MML command.
o n
ti
 Use this command to start the VSWR test on the TX channel to check whether the antenna
a
system is properly installed. If the numbers of the cabinet, subrack, slot, and antenna port are
ic
if within different frequency bands. Therefore, use the
not specified, the VSWR information of all the RRUs or RFUs are queried in batch.
Different types of RF module t

r operate
frequency specified duringethe configuration of the cell as the frequency for the VSWR test.
C

&
Ensure that no operation is performed on the RRU or RFU during the test.
g
in to get the detailed reason of the failure.
 If the VSWR test result of a RF module is NULL, you can start the VSWR test on this RF
n
i is greater than the value required by the engineering quality, the connection of the
module separately

a
r is abnormal. In this case, you need to check the antenna connection and the ALD.
If the VSWR
T
i VSWR queried by the DSP VSWR command is the result of the test that uses the current
antenna
eThe
w

u a power of the RF module as the test power, and the VSWR test started by the STR
H VSWRTEST command is based on single tone and uses the maximum power of the RF unit as
the test power. The precision of the two kinds of VSWR tests is different and so the test results
are different.
 The VSWR is displayed in the result of this command and is not used to light the VSWR
indicator or report a VSWR alarm.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 This section describes how to perform interference Hu detection to locate faults on RF
ninterference detection on RF devices every
devices. Generally, RF interference detection is performed during device cutover or
o
routine maintenance. You can perform
a tthei application scenario.
ic Maintenance > Antenna Management >
few days or months depending on
f
In the U2000 main window, ichoose
rt (traditional style); alternatively, double-click Trace and

e
C Center and choose Maintenance > Antenna
Interference Measurement
&
Maintenance in Application
g
Management > Interference Measurement (application style).
n inleft area of the Interference Measurement window, select a detection

In the upper
type. i

r a
In T

i the navigation tree below the area of detection types, select the objects to be
edetected.
a w
Hu  Click Parameter Settings in the right pane of the Interference Measurement
window. The window for setting parameters is displayed.
 Set NE Type based on the objects to be detected and set detection parameters.
 After setting parameters, click Test to start RF interference detection.
 During the detection, you can stop a detection task as required.
 The detection result is displayed after the detection is complete.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 This is a high-risk MML command.
H u
n in a sector are incorrectly connected to different
 Use this command to detect a crossed pair connection. Crossed pair connection is a wiring error in
i o
twisted pair cabling where both the main and diversity
tprecision
a
antennas at both sides.
 The VSWR test has a great impact on the
f ic of this test because the VSWR will cause a gain loss.
t i
r to run this command.
You are advised to perform a high-precision VSWR test before running this command. If the VSWR is
This command applies to thee

greater than 2.5, you are not advised

C scenario where RF modules are in 2T2R mode. If this command is
&
executed in other scenarios, the result may be incorrect.
g
indoes not apply to the scenario where all antennas of one sector are connected to another
 This command does not apply to a multi-RRU/RFU cell or a distributed cell.
sector. in
 This command
a two sectors in the same frequency band support this test, this test returns failure.
If lessrthan

i Ttest is an offline test and the execution of this command interrupts services. If this command is

eexecuted on a multi-mode RF module, the services of the peer mode carried by this RF module are also
This
a w
u
interrupted.
H  In the scenario where a filter is configured in the antenna system, the STFREQ and ETFREQ parameters
in this command must be set to the start frequency and end frequency of the filter, respectively. If the
bandwidth between the start frequency and end frequency is smaller than 10 MHz, the execution output
is not reliable.
 If crossed feeder connections are detected, you need to check whether an external filter or narrowband
filter equipment exists in the antenna system first.
 Running this command on a multi-mode RF unit of a multi-mode BS or on RF units of different modes
that share the antenna system will interrupt services of both modes.
 The result of this command is "Unknown" means that can not judge if crossed feeder connected or not.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 This is a high-risk MML command. Hu

o n
If an RF module's output power is controlled by the output power locking and the
ati
output power of a single TX channel is less than 40, when the Test Type parameter is
ic
becomes ineffective and theif
set to PIMON2TONE_2TONE or PIMON2TONE_SWEEP, the output power locking
r t output power of a single TX channel can reach 2x20 W.
C e the output power locking becomes effective again.

After the test is completed,

&
a. The values of Freq1 and Freq2 or Start Freq and End Freq must supported by the
RF module.
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The PING, TRACERT, CFMTRACE, CFMPING, Huand UDPECHO commands cannot
be executed simultaneously on one board.
o nCtrl+Q to terminate the PING command.
 If CONTPING is set to ENABLE, press
a ti of the PING command must be set to NO.
ic is set to YES(Yes), the Port Type parameter
 If IPSec networking is used, APPTIF
f
When the Appoint Interface iparameter
rt only for the WMPT and UMPT boards.

e
can be set to TUNNEL(Tunnel)
[NodeB,eNodeB]If theCroute corresponding to the destination IP address is a tunnel
route, the source&

g
IP address must be specified.

i n the local IP address of a remote maintenance channel is the same
[NodeB,eNodeB]If
a in IP address and is used as the source IP address for a ping operation, the
as a device
T r for the ping operation must be the same as that of the board where the
slot number
i IP address is configured.
edevice
aw An example of PING
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Traceroute sends a sequence of Internet Control Hu Message Protocol (ICMP) packets
nProtocol parameter. Routers decrement this
addressed to a destination host. Tracing the intermediate routers traversed involves
o
ti the TTL value has reached zero, returning an
control of the time-to-live (TTL) Internet
a
ic Exceeded) to the sender.
parameter and discard a packet when
ICMP error message (ICMPiTime f
e rt the TTL value of each successive batch of packets
C sent have a time-to-live (TTL) value of one, expecting
 Traceroute works by increasing
that they are not &

sent. The first three packets
g forwarded by the first router. The next three packets have a TTL
n that the second router will send the error reply. This continues until the
n i
value of 2, so
a i host receives the packets and returns an ICMP Echo Reply message.
rtraceroute utility uses the returning ICMP messages to produce a list of hosts that
destination
 T
i packets have traversed in transit to the destination. The three timestamp values
The
ethe
a w
u
returned for each host along the path are the delay (aka latency) values, typically
H measured in milliseconds for each packet in the batch.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w

Hu command.
You can press Ctrl+Q to stop running the TRACERT

o
be executed simultaneously on one iboard.
n
The PING, TRACERT, CFMTRACE, CFMPING, and UDPECHO commands cannot
a t it must be the configured device IP address


ic maintenance channel. You can run the LST
If the source IP address is not specified,
or the local IP address of theifremote
e
DEVIP and LST OMCH commandsrt to query these two types of IP addresses,
respectively. C
If a destination IP&
g
 address elicits no response during route tracing but can be pinged,
in as the planned IP address.

check and remove redundant IP addresses on the egress port, which are on the same
network n
a i packets, "*" indicates that the detection expires, "!" indicates that the
segment

T r
In TRACERT
i IPis address
ethe
port unreachable, "!N" indicates that the network is unreachable, "!Y" indicates that
a w is unreachable, "!P" indicates the protocol is unavailable, "!S" indicates
Hu 
that the source route fails, and "!H" indicates that the host is unreachable.
If the destination IP address is used to search for the outbound interface or next hop,
TRACERT detection is not performed.
 [NodeB,eNodeB]If the route corresponding to the destination IP address is a tunnel
route, the source IP address must be specified.
 [NodeB,eNodeB]If the source IP address is not specified or it is 255.255.255.255, in a
routing domain the BS uses the IP address of the egress port closest to the
destination IP address as the source IP address for the route tracing.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 IP PM Hu

o n
The transmitting end periodically sends FM packets indicating number of local
ti
a
packets and the receiving end responds to the FM packets with a BR packet
ic
tif on the BR packets.
indicating the number of received packets and delay, Then the sending end
r
calculates the QoS based

C e monitoring.
FM is short for forwarding

&
BR is short for backward reporting.
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu sends FM packets indicating the
For the IP PM on the RNC side, the RNC periodically
nBR packet indicating the number of received

number of local packets and bytes and local transmission duration. After receiving the
o
FM packets, the NodeB responds with
a ti FM packets, and BR response duration. The
a
ic delay, and delay variation based on the BR

packets and bytes, duration for receiving
f
RNC measures packet loss irate,
e rt number of packets and bytes contained in FM and BR

response from the RNC. The
packets is for serviceC
packets and does not include FM and BR frames.
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Bind IP Path Meaning
Hu

o n
Indicates whether to bind the IP PM session to an IP path. If the IP PM session is
ti
bound to an IP path, the IP PM session uses the local and peer IP addresses of the IP
c a
path in data transmission. In addition, if TXBWASW or RXBWASW is set to ON and
i
if
TCSW is set to ENABLE in the algorithm for the transmission resource group
rt
associated with the IP path, the system dynamically adjusts the TX or RX bandwidth of
e
C
the transmission resource group based on the IP PM detection result.
&the activation direction of the IP PM session. For this parameter to be

 Activate Direction Meaning

g
Indicates that
insession initiated by the BS is activated. If this parameter is set to BIDIR, the IP

valid, the peer must also support the IP PM session. If this parameter is set to UP, the
IPnPM
a i
T r Trip Time(ms)
PM sessions initiated by BS and the peer are activated.
ei Indicates the round-trip delay calculated by an IP PM session detection. The round-trip

 Round
aw

Hu
delay is the time that is consumed to transmit IP PM detection packets to and fro
between the local and peer ends.
 RX Jitter(ms)
 Indicates the DL jitter calculated by an IP PM session detection.
 TX Jitter(ms)
 Indicates the UL jitter calculated by an IP PM session detection.
 RX Loss Rate(per mill)
 Indicates the DL packet loss rate calculated by an IP PM session detection.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
TWAMP measurement includes negotiation Huand testing. Negotiation is
nuses the fixed port : port 862. Testing is
conducted between the Control-Client and Server using Transmission Control
o
Protocol (TCP) packets. The Server
a ti
ic
conducted between the Session-Sender and Session-Reflector based on the
UDP. Ports used by the UDP
r t if are assigned and managed internally among NEs
e
and negotiated during the negotiation process.
C
& starting test sessions, and testing, as outlined below:
The measurement process includes four phases: TCP connection setup,
g
creating test sessions,
n connection setup
Phase 1: iTCP

n
i Control-Client opens a TCP connection to the Server on the fixed
a
r port 862 on the Server.
The
T

ei The Server responds with a Server-Greeting message, indicating its

aw

Hu
supported mode of communication.
 The Control-Client responds with a Set-Up-Response message with its
chosen mode of communication. However, if the Server does not
respond or responds with an unexpected mode of communication, the
Control-Client closes the connection.
 The Server responds with a Server-Start message, indicating the test
start time. The connection setup is complete.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Huawei-private IP PM is used to monitor theH
u
QoS of transmission links for online
services on the user plane (UP).
o n
t i
anot rely on service packets. Huawei-private IP PM
 TWAMP employs active testing by inserting test packets to test the QoS of E2E
ic
if the base station and base station controller, while
transmission links. The test does
r t
tests E2E connections between
Ce between the base station and base station controller,

TWAMP tests the connections
&
or those between the base station/base station controller and transmission devices in
g
the transport network.
n in IP PM measurement is based on four-tuples (source IP address,

Huawei-private
i IP address, UDP, and DSCP) or three-tuples (source IP address,

a
r IP address, and UDP). TWAMP measurement is based on quintuples
destination
i T
destination
e(source
w
IP address, destination IP address, source UDP port number, destination
u a UDP port number, and DSCP).
H  TWAMP actively simulates service packets to measure the following:

 Transmission counters when a base station fails to provide services but the
connection between the base station and transport network is in good
condition
 Transmission counters when there is no traffic or the traffic is light
 Connections between devices that support TWAMP Table 4-2 Application
differences between TWAMP and Huawei-private IP PM

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Principle Hu

o n
After the IP loopback test is started, the DSP sends loopback packets to the
a ti
BTS in a specified period and then the BTS returns the loopback packets to
ic
if connectivity and link quality according to the received
the DSP
You can determine tthe

e r
C
loopback packets

&
MBTS support IP loopback operation, but don’t support IP loopback test.
g
in
 BSC support IP loopback test only.
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Use this command to set the UDP-type IP packetHu loopback. The UDP-type IP packet
n
loopback can be used to check the connectivity and quality of the network based on
o
the UDP packets sent by the peer end.
a ti
ic
t f loopback configuration.
 Only one loopback mode can be configured for IP packets. The new loopback
configuration overwrites the iexisting
r
e Indicates the UDP loopback mode.
 Loopback Mode Meaning:
C

from ag
&
If this parameter is set to SPECIALIPUDPPORTREMOTE, the UDP packets
in
BS that meet the specified conditions are looped back to the peer
i n
device.
a
r BS are looped back to the peer device.
T
 If this parameter is set to ALLIPREMOTE, all the UDP packets received on a
ei If this parameter is set to SPECIALIPREMOTE, the UDP packets received on

aw

Hu
a BS, whose local and peer IP addresses are the same as the specified
address couple, are looped back to the peer device.
 [eNodeB]If LM is set to SPECIALIPUDPPORTREMOTE or
SPECIALIPUDPPORTLOCAL, the services in the same routing domain carried by the
IP addresses and UDP ports specified in this command are interrupted.
 DSP UDPLOOP command to query the parameters of the User Datagram Protocol
(UDP) loopback.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Use this command to start the IP loopback test.HuThe function is to check the
n
connectivity between DSP and the interface boards or the peer equipment.This
command is applicable to the FG2a,io
a t GOUa, FG2d, FG2c, GOUd, GOUc and GOUe
boards.
f c
ibe

r
Only one IP loopback test can i
t started for one DSP.
This command is used e

C to start the IP loopback test on the Iub or Abis interface. When
&
the parameter LOPT is set as REMOTE_LOOP, you need to enable the IP remote
g
loopback function by setting IP address and port number on the NodeB or BTS.
n function is unavailable.
Otherwise,ithe
i n

r a
The quaternary group information (Local IP address, Peer IP address, Src Port NO.
i
and T Dst Port NO.) set in each IP loopback detection cannot be the same.
eIf the subrack No. of the interface board is not specified, the interface board is
aw

Hu
considered to be in the same subrack as the DSP.
 An IP loopback test can be started on a UMTS DPU that functions as UUP logically or
a GSM DPU that functions as GPCU logically.
 The parameter PEERIP need to be negotiated with the peer end.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Use this command to query the result of the H
u
loopback test at the IP layer. This
n
command is applicable to the FG2a, GOUa, FG2d, FG2c, GOUd and GOUc boards.
o
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 LOCALIP: The IP address of the local maintenanceHu channel. The IP address refers to
n
the IP address of the local commissioning Ethernet port on the board. Generally it is
same for every site, the default valueio
a tremote maintenance channel.
is 192.168.0.49.
 OMCH：The local IP address of
i f ic FE/GE ports.
a

r t
ETH: The IP for specific physical

C e
ETHTRK: If the FE/GE ports are combined as an Ethernet trunk, then it can be used
&
to define the trunk IP.
LOOPINT: theglogic IP.
in

i n
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu
LOCALIP: 192.168.0.49

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
on
Item Instance Remarks
i
Device IP address of the BSC 10.10.10.10/32 -
at
Port IP address of the BSC 21.21.21.1/24 -
ic
IP address of the port on the router that 21.21.21.254/24 -
i f
rt
is connected to the BSC
Ce
IP address of the port on the router that 11.11.11.254/24 -
is connected to the RNC
P address of the port on the router that 20.20.20.1/24 -
&
is connected to the UMPT_GUL
ng
IP address of the port on the 20.20.20.188/24 Device IP address during configuration on the CME. This IP
ni
UMPT_GUL address is configured on the co-transmission port.
a i
OM IP address 30.30.30.1/24 GSM&UMTS&LTE: Management plane IP address. This is a
T r logical IP address and is configured on the UMPT_GUL.
ei In this scenario, only one OM IP address is configured
w
because the multimode base station is configured with one
a
OM channel.
Hu Signaling/service IP address of the

NodeB
32.32.32.1/24 UMTS: control plane/user plane IP address. This is a logical
IP address and is configured on the UMPT_GUL.
Device IP address of the RNC 15.15.15.15/24 -

Port IP address of the RNC 11.11.11.11/24 -
IP address of the U2000 60.60.60.60/24 GSM&UMTS&LTE: Peer IP address for the OM channel
Signaling/service IP address of the BTS 35.35.35.188/24 GSM: control plane/user plane IP address. This is a logical IP
address and is configured on the UMPT_GUL.
IP address of the MME 40.40.40.40/24 LTE: peer IP address for the SCTP link
IP address of the S-GW 50.50.50.50/24 LTE: peer IP address for the IP path
Signaling/service IP address of the 33.33.33.188/24 LTE: control plane/user plane IP address. This is a logical IP
eNodeB address and is configured on the UMPT_GUL.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 the UMPT board shared by the Abis, Iub andH
u
S1/X2 interfaces is responsible for
n transport link layer (UDP). The protocols at

protocol processing at the physical layer, data link layer, network layer (IP), Stream
o
Control Transmission Protocol(SCTP)
ti and
other layers are processed on theacontrol plane processing boards and user plane
f
processing boards of GSM, iUMTSic and LTE separately.
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Use LST ETHPORT command to list the Ethernet Hu port configuration, including the
speed, duplex mode, and port attribute.
o n
t i the status of an Ethernet port, including the
a address, duplex mode, physical layer status, and
 Use DSP ETHPORT command to query
maximum transfer unit, speed, c
i
tif
MAC
r
traffic information.

C e the status of the Ethernet port.
Port Status: Indicates

&
Physical Layer Status: Indicates the physical layer status of the Ethernet port.
n g
i
 ARP Proxy: Indicates whether to enable the proxy ARP function. If this function
isnenabled, the BS serves as an ARP proxy for the IP address of a loopback
a i
T r disabled, an external device can access a loopback interface in the BS or a
interface on the BS or a port IP address of a lower-level BS. If this function is
ei lower-level BS on the same subnet only by using a route. After the Ethernet
a w
Hu port is added to an Ethernet trunk, this parameter stops taking effect and
whether the proxy ARP function is enabled for the Ethernet port depends on
the setting of the same parameter in the Ethernet trunk.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Use this command to query the active Address HuResolution Protocol (ARP) table
naddress.
entries of the system. An ARP table entry records mapping from the IP address of the
o
peer port acquired by the BS to a MAC
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 VLAN Mode Hu

o n
Indicates the VLAN mode. When this parameter is set to SINGLEVLAN, the
ti
a
configured VLAN ID and VLAN priority can be directly used to label the VLAN
ic
tif to VLANGROUP, the next hop IP addresses are
tag.

r
If this parameter is set
e groups, and then mapped to the VLAN tags in the VLAN
C
mapped to the VLAN
&
groups according to the DSCPs of the IP packets. In VLAN group mode,
g
ensure that the VLAN groups have been configured by running the ADD
n in
VLANCLASS command.
i
a Priority

r
Set VLAN
T Indicates whether to set priority of a single VLAN. When this parameter is set
ei 
a w to DISABLE, the default DSCP-VLAN priority mapping is applied if the
Hu mapping is not configured by running the SET DSCPMAP command.

Otherwise, the configured mapping is applied. When this parameter is set to
ENABLE, the DSCP-VLAN priority mapping configured by the ADD VLANMAP
command is applied even if the SET DSCPMAP command is executed.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Preference Hu

o n
Indicates the priority of the routing table entry. A smaller parameter value
indicates a higher priority.
a ti
ic
if
 Route Type
r t
e
 Indicates the type of route. If this parameter is set to NEXTHOP, all the IP
C
packets that meet the route direction are first forwarded to the specified next
& are first forwarded to the specified egress port.

hop IP address. If this parameter is set to IF, all the IP packets that meet the
g
in
route direction
i n
r a
i T
e
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hube modified or deleted by the system.
Control Mode: Indicates whether the object can
n
The value MANUAL_MODE means that only the user can modify or delete the object.
The value AUTO_MODE means thatio
a t both the system and the user can modify or
ic the object is created by the system.

delete the object.
i f
rt that the object is configured by the user manually.
 Auto Config Flag: Indicates whether
MANUAL_CREATED means e
C that the object is created by the system.
&
AUTO_CREATED means
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Transport Resource Type Hu

o n
Indicates the type of transport resource for the IP path. The value HQ indicates
a ti
high-quality transport resources, and the value LQ indicates low-quality
ic
if the default value of this parameter is used. The
transport resources. This parameter must be set in the hybridtransmission
r t
scenario. In other scenarios,
parameter takeseeffect only in LTE.
C

&
IPMUX Switch Flag
Packetgmultiplexing is adopted to enhance the transport efficiency. Using FP
infeature, multiple FP packets with same source IP, destination IP and

n
i (DiffServ Code Point) are packed into one UDP/IP packet, with
MUX
a
r compressed UDP information. Since less packet head, higher transport
DSCP
T
ei efficiency is achieved.
a w
Hu  Path Type
 Indicates the type of the IP path. FIXED indicates that this IP path is used to
carry the service with specified Quality of Service (QoS), that is, with a
specified DSCP. ANY indicates that this IP Path can be used to carry services
of any QoS and hence is used to carry the service without a specified DSCP.
 IP Path Check Result
 Indicates the check result for the GTP-U static detection of an IP path. The
parameter takes effect only in LTE.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Auto Config Flag Hu

o n
Indicates whether the object is created by the system. MANUAL_CREATED
ati
means that the object is configured by the user manually. AUTO_CREATED
ic
if
means that the object is created by the system.
 Flag Meaning:
r t

C e
Indicates whether the transport channel carried on the CP bearer is a master
&
or slave channel.
Control Modeg
in whether the object can be modified or deleted by the system. The
 Meaning:
n
i MANUAL_MODE means that only the user can modify or delete the
a
 Indicates
T r value
ei object. The value AUTO_MODE means that both the system and the user can
a w modify or delete the object.
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Control Port Bearing Status Hu

o n
Indicates the transmission bearing status of the control port: AVAILABLE and
a ti
UNAVAILABLE. When this parameter is set to AVAILABLE, the control port
ic
t f port cannot bear control data transmission.
can bear control data transmission. When this parameter is set to
UNAVAILABLE, the icontrol
r
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Port Type Hu

o n
Indicates the type of Iub control port. The control port type is classified into
a ti
NodeB Control Port (NCP) and Communication Control Port (CCP). The NCP
ic
signaling channel of iafcell. There is only one NCP and multiple CCPs in the
carries a common signaling channel, while the CCP carries a dedicated
e rt
C
system.
&
g
n in
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Control Mode
Hu

o n
Indicates the control mode of the S1 interface, which determines the control policies of
ti
users and the SON function on the S1 interface. When it is set to MANUAL_MODE,
c a
only users can control the S1 interface. When it is set to AUTO_MODE, both users and
i
if
the SON function can control the S1 interface. The control policies set in this
r t
parameter also apply to the MmeFeatureCfg MO. When the SON function
Ce
automatically sets up an S1 interface, this parameter is set to AUTO_MODE by default.
When users add or modify an S1 interface, users can set this parameter to
&
AUTO_MODE or MANUAL_MODE.

i
Auto Config Flag
ng
n
ai
 Indicates whether the S1 interface is created automatically or manually. This
T r parameter is set by the system. Users cannot modify the parameter setting. The
ei
system sets this parameter to AUTO_CREATE when the S1 interface is created
w
automatically using the SON function and to MANUAL_CREATE when the S1 interface
u a is created manually by using the CME or running an MML command.
H
 MME Selection Priority
 Indicates the priority of an MME to which the eNodeB is connected through the S1
interface. A large parameter value indicates a high priority. After this parameter is set
for MMEs, the eNodeB can select a high-priority MME for UEs attempting to access
the network.
 BLK S1INTERFACE command is a high-risk MML command. After an S1 interface is blocked,
new admission requests will be rejected over this interface. However, the blocking does not
affect the transmission of messages for admitted users or messages irrelevant to users.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 GSM and UMTS control plane support only link Humode;
n
ioand endpoint;
 GSM and UMTS user plane support link mode and endpoint;
 Two planes of LTE support link modet
a and Maintenance based on link mode are same as
i c
if listed on this part.
 The MML commands of Operation
preceding part, so they aretnot
r
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Operation for SCTPLNK, CPBEARER, S1INTERFACE Hu and X2INTERFACE are same
n
as link mode. The difference is that the SCTPLINK, CPBEARER, S1INTERFACE and
o
X2INTERFACE are created automatically.
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 LST IUB is used to list a transmission objectH
u
on the Iub interface.
LST S1 command is used to list the S1n
o object information.
 object information.
LST X2 command is used to list thetiX2
a

ic
r tif
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu and a sub-area of a cell. Each
A sector is a geographical area with radio coverage
n
sector is served by one or multiple radio carriers. Each radio carrier occupies either
o
single or multiple frequencies.
ti
Sectors and radio carriers formcaacell, the fundamental unit for MS access.
fi of RF channels in a sector.


r t i
sector equipment is a combination
The SectorEqm defineseantenna channels and their working modes in a sector. An

C
&
antenna channel can work in Tx mode, Rx mode, or Tx/Rx mode, or serve as the
g
equipment.in
master or slave channel.A sector can be equipped with multiple pieces of sector
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Note : If Sector Equipment ID is not specified,
u basic information about all sector
Hthe
o n information about the sector equipment
equipment is displayed, but the information about sector equipment antennas is not
displayed. If Sector Equipment ID isispecified,
a tdisplayed.
ic
and sector equipment antennas is
i f
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Maximum Power(0.1dBm) Hu

o n
Indicates the maximum power provided for the TRX group by the sector
a ti
equipment which needs to share the antenna system with the logical cell in the
ic
t f provided by the sector equipment.
same mode provided by other operators. 65535 indicates that the maximum
allowed transmitting ipower
r
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Max Output Power(0.1dBm) Hu

o n
Indicates the maximum output power of the sector equipment, in units of 0.1
dBm.
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Baseband equipment ID Hu

o n
Indicates the ID of the baseband device that serves the cell. The value 255
ati
indicates that the ID of the baseband device that serves the cell is not
ic
if
specified. In this case, the cell can use any baseband device of the eNodeB.
rt
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Work Mode Hu

o n
If each sector equipment serving the TRX group meets the requirements for
a ti
the frequency and power of TRXs in the TRX group, this parameter is set to
ic
if frequency set in the TRX group exceeds the maximum
INDEPENDENT.
If the bandwidth of tthe

r
e of its serving sector equipment and all sector
C
transmitting bandwidth
&
equipment serving the TRX group need to cooperate with each other, this
g
parameter is set to INTERPARFFH.
n inpower of the TRXs in the TRX group exceeds the power specification for
i sector equipment and all sector equipment serving the TRX group need
If the

r asingle
i T to cooperate with each other, this parameter is set to INTERPAPS.

e
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Use this command to query the status for local Hucells, such as local cell status, local
n
cell administration status, status of the logical cell corresponding to the local cell, cell
o
Cell Status: Indicates the statuscof a tailogical cell: AVAILABLE and UNAVAILABLE. If
baseband deployment, and cell aid status.

i
the local cell is not bound toiaf logical cell, this parameter displays as NULL. Note:
t
r the logical cell is normal. UNAVAILABLE indicates that
e
users cannot access C
AVAILABLE indicates that
&
the logical cell.
ngIf no logical cell is bound to the local cell, this parameter displays as
 Cell Administration Status: Indicates the administration status of a logical cell: LOCK
i
in LOCK indicates that the logical cell is blocked and unavailable, and MSs
and UNLOCK.
a
rhave accessed the cell are forcibly handed over to other normal cells. UNLOCK
NULL. Note:
i T
that
eindicates
w
that the logical cell is available.
u a  Baseband Deployment: Indicates the actual baseband deployment in the local cell. It
H falls into two types: embedded baseband deployment and baseband equipment
deployment.
 License Authorized: Indicates whether the specified TRX has an authorized license.
The values of this parameter are LICENSED and UNLICENSED.
 Effective Status: Indicates the actual effective status of TRXs: EFFECTIVE and
INEFFECTIVE. When the TRX is not licensed or the DSS TRX is deactivated, the
parameter displays as INEFFECTIVE.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 DSP ULOCELL is used to display the status H
u
of a specified local cell and logical cell or
n
all ones, diversity characteristic, and cell setup date.
o
 Local Cell Administration Status
a ti
f ic
tiand the cell is unavailable. Shutting down: Non-high-
 Indicates the local cell administration status. Blocked: The previous services in
the cell are released
priority cells are e
r
C selected but the cells do meet the blocking condition.

executing thisg
&
BLK ULOCELL is a high-risk MML command, and therefore execise caution when
inblocked successfully, the Local Cell Blocked alarm appears.

command.
After then

If thera
i cell

i TBlock PRI must be set to "HIGH". Otherwise, the execution of this command fails.
Local Cell ID is not specified, all the local cells in the NodeB will be blocked, and
eIf the local cell is not bearing any logical cell, you can block the local cell immediately
the
a w

Hu no matter which block priority is applied to the cell. Otherwise, the local cell can be
blocked only after the RNC responds a block message.
 If you set the Block PRI to "HIGH", immediately the local cells shall be blocked no
matter whether the local cell bears the logical cell.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Reason for latest state change Hu

o n
Indicates the reason that causes the latest state change of the cell, which can
a ti
be a cell activation success or a cell setup failure.
ic
if
 Cell power save state
r t
e
 Indicates the energy conservation and emission reduction mode of the cell.
C
The energy conservation and emission reduction mode of the cell can be set
& mode, automatic power-off at a specified time mode, inter-RAT

to: RF intelligent shutdown mode, cell intelligent shutdown mode, low power
n g
consumption
cellishutdown
i n mode, or dynamic voltage adjustment mode.
T ra
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Message tracing traces interfaces, signaling H
u
links, and UEs. It applies to routine
equipment maintenance and fault location.
n
By tracing messages, you can verifyio

a t can be browsed and saved.
data and identify faults. After a message tracing
fic
task is created, the traced messages
Only when the OM channeltiis established between the U2000 and the base station,

e r
C
and the correct data configuration file is downloaded from the U2000 to the base
& terminal (LMT), common tracing tasks and GSM, UMTS,

station, the tracing task can be performed on the LMT.
g
in tracing tasks can be performed.
 On the local maintenance
i n
and LTE-specific
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 In the LMT main window, click the Trace tab.H
u
n
io
 In the navigation tree, choose Trace > Common Services. Double-click *** Trace.
 t
aTrace dialog box.
The *** Trace dialog box is displayed.
ic
tif
 Set related parameters in the ***
r
Ce
 Click Submit.
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 In the LMT main window, click Monitor. Hu

o n
In the navigation tree, choose Monitor > Common Monitoring. Double-click ***
Monitoring.
ati
ic
if
 The *** Monitoring dialog box is displayed.
rt
e
 Set related parameters in the *** Monitoring dialog box.
 Click Submit. C
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Local user: Account of local user (including the Hudefault admin user) is managed by the
n
LMT. Local user can use the LMT to log in to the base station when he is
o
disconnected from the U2000 server.
a tiare centrally managed by the U2000 server. EMS
 EMS users: Accounts of EMS users
i f ic authenticated, and authorized by the U2000
rt users are permitted to use the LMT to log in to the base
user accounts are created, modified,
server. Only authorizede
C users can also log in to the U2000 server from the U2000
EMS
client to manage &

station. Authorized EMS
g the base station. To directly log in to the base station as an EMS

user, ensurenthat the base station is connected to the U2000 server.
n i
i
a multiple users to perform operations at the same time. To ensure system
r
 The local maintenance terminal (LMT) operation and maintenance (OM) subsystem
i T
enables
e
w
security, user rights are controlled in the following aspects:
u a  User identity: A user must enter the correct user name and password when
H logging in to the LMT.
 User rights: Users of different levels are allowed to use different graphical user
interface (GUI) operations and man-machine language (MML) operations.
 Operation time limit: It specifies the time during which a user can perform
operations.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 managing command groups Hu

o n
Run the ADD CCG command to add commands to a command group.
Run the RMV CCG command

a ti to remove commands from a command group.

i f ic to view a command group
Run the LST CCG command
rt command to view the name of a command group.



e
Run the LST CCGN
C command to name a command group.
Run the SET CCGN
&

g
n in
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 LMT user accounts are classified into internal
u accounts and external user
Huser
n account. The super user name is admin
accounts. Different accounts have different rights, which are described as follows: The
o
internal user account includes a super
a ti A super user has all rights.
user
ic are provided, and each level is allocated

and the default password is hwbs@com.
i f
rt
 Five levels of external user accounts
different rights.
C e
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 If the added operator belongs to the CustomH
u
user group, the operator cannot have
n
more rights than the user who adds the account.
G_0 is a group of commands that allio

a t users are permitted to use by default. It cannot
be removed.
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu account.
Use MOD OP command to modify a local operator
n
io account.
 For a customer account, the MOD OP command cannot be executed to make other
t
athe password can be changed and the password
accounts have more rights than a customer
ic
tif In addition, the administrator cannot run the MOD OP
 For a default admin account, only
r
must be changed on the U2000.
command to change itse
C own password.
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Operation log: Hu

o n
The operation log is mainly used to analyze the relationships between device
ati
faults and performed operations.
ic
if
 Security log:
r t
e
 The security log is used for auditing and tracing security events.
 Running log: C
&
g
 The running log helps you in fault location, routine inspection, and device
in
running monitoring.
n
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 LST OPTLOG Hu

o n
Source: Indicates the source of the log record.

a ti LMT(LMT), INVALID(INVALID),
Value Range: EMS(EMS),
OTHER(OTHER)c
t i fi of the operator

e r
Operator: Account
 Domain Name: CDomain name of the operator to be queried
& Range: LOCAL(Local), EMS(EMS), EMSOP(U2000)
g
 Value
 LST SECLOG
n in
a i Type: Indicates the event type that triggers the security log.
r
 Event
i T Value Range: AUTHENTICATION(Log on and Authentication),

e

w
ACCOUNT_MANAGEMENT(Account Management),
u a ACCESS_CONTROL(Access Control), OTHER(Other),
H NETWORKATTACK(Network Attack)
 Event Level: Indicates the event level that triggers the security log.
 CRITICAL(Critical), MAJOR(Major), MINOR(Minor)

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 You need to run the LST LOGFILE command Htouquery the log file name before
uploading a log file.
n
This command uploads only one logio

a tFILE command.
at a time. If logs need to be uploaded in batches
f ic to the base station are exclusive.

based on the log type, run the ULD
i

e rt
The operations of uploading files
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu operators provide for users with a
The license is a contract that Huawei and telecom
nfor a certain stage by purchasing a specific

specific function, application scope, and duration of a product. Telecom operators can
o
ti The U2000 provides the function of managing
select the network function and capacity
a
ic activating, and allocating the license.
license. This protects the investment.
i f
rt
the NE license, including uploading,
Controller license: BSCe
C
 (GBTS)/RNC

&
eGBTS license: co-MPT base stations involving the eGBTS technology
g
inlicense: eNodeBs and co-MPT base stations involving the LTE
 NodeB license: NodeBs and co-MPT base stations involving the UMTS technology

i
Standalone n
r a
T
technology
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w

u
An eGBTS license is generated based on theHelectronic serial number (ESN) of the
nbe modified between eGBTSs.

BSC to which the eGBTS belongs, and is shared by all eGBTSs managed by this
o
BSC. The license allocation values can
a toni the U2000 server.

f
The eGBTS license files are saved c
iallocated

r t
The total number of resources i to all eGBTSs managed by a BSC cannot
C e
exceed the number of resources specified in the corresponding eGBTS license. In
&
addition, the resources of one BSC cannot be allocated to eGBTSs managed by
another BSC.
g
n in are classified into the following types:
i
 eGBTS licenses
a
r Huawei. After the purchase, the eGBTSs of this user can use all resources
T
 Commercial license: Users need to purchase commercial licenses from
ei within a time period specified in the commercial license.

a w
Hu  Trial license: Users can obtain trial licenses from Huawei for free. After a user
has obtained a trial license, the eGBTSs of this user can use certain resources
within a time period specified in the trial license during BSC commissioning.
The default validity period of a trial license is three months.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 eGBTS License Operation Scenaario Hu
 Creating an eGBTS
o n
Scenario: Creating a BSC ti
a

ic
tif
Changing the BSC ESN

e
Upgrading an eGBTSr
Expanding anC eGBTS
Scenario:&

g
 Reparenting an eGBTS
n in a GBTS into an eGBTS

Evolving
i Operations on the eGBTS License


a
r Querying the BSC ESN
Common
T
ei Uploading the eGBTS License to the U2000 Server

aw

Hu
 Modifying eGBTS License Allocation Values
 Viewing Detailed eGBTS License Information
 Synchronizing an eGBTS License
 Manually Downloading an eGBTS License

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu serial number (ESN) of an
A NodeB license is generated based on the electronic
n
RNC, and is shared by all NodeBs managed by this RNC.
NodeB license files are saved on theio

a t and the allocated NodeB licenses take effect
U2000 server instead of on NodeBs. The U2000
f ic to U2000 NodeBs.
allocates NodeB licenses to NodeBs,
i
rt allocated to all NodeBs managed by an RAN cannot
immediately after they are delivered

C e
The total number of resources
&
exceed the number of resources specified in the corresponding NodeB license. In
g
addition, the resources of one RNC cannot be allocated to the NodeBs managed by
n
another RNC.in
a i license is classified into the following types: Commercial license:

T r Users need to purchase commercial licenses from Huawei. After a user has
The NodeB
ei purchased a commercial license, the NodeBs of this user can use all

a w
Hu resources and provide all functions within a time period specified in the
commercial license.
 Trial license: Users can obtain trial licenses from Huawei directly and do not
need to pay for them. After a user has obtained a trial license, the NodeBs of
this user can use trial resources and provide trial functions within a time period
specified in the trial license. The default validity period of a trial license is three
months.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 eGBTS License Operation Scenaario Hu
 Creating an eGBTS
o n
Scenario: Creating a BSC ti
a

ic
tif
Changing the BSC ESN

e
Upgrading an eGBTSr
Expanding anC eGBTS
Scenario:&

g
 Reparenting an eGBTS
n in a GBTS into an eGBTS

Evolving
i Operations on the eGBTS License


a
r Querying the BSC ESN
Common
T
ei Uploading the eGBTS License to the U2000 Server

aw

Hu
 Synchronizing an eGBTS License
 Manually Downloading an eGBTS License

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Default Hu

o n
When the license file does not exist, the integrity check of the license file fails, or the
ti
grace period of the license expires, the NE is in Default state. In Default state, the NE
a
ic
cannot provide the resources and functions specified in the license and can provide
rt if
only the most basic resources and functions.
 Commissioning
CommissioningC
e
an NE requires dedicated license. After the dedicated license is
& is switched to Commissioning state. The NE in Commissioning state

gnormal services based on the validity of the license.

installed, the NE
i n
provides
Normal n

a i the commercial license is installed, the NE is switched to Normal state. The NE in

T r After
i this state provides the resources and functions specified in the license.
eGrace
aw
 Period
Hu
 After the NE license expires, you have a grace period of certain days to apply for new
license. During this period, the control items in the NE license are still effective.
 Emergency
 In emergencies such as disasters, you can set the license state of an NE to
Emergency. In this state, the NE license control is canceled, and the device capacity is
set to the maximum. This protects NE services from being affected.
 To set the license state of an NE to Emergency, contact Huawei technical support
engineers.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu from the LMT to query the e-
Before replacing the faulty board, run DSP ELABEL
label of the board.
o n
t i online, query the board information offline
a
 If the board is faulty and cannot be queried
ic
tif > Inventory Management (traditional style);
on the U2000.

e r
Choose Configuration
C
alternatively, double-click Trace and Maintenance in Application Center and
&
choose Monitor > Inventory Management (application style) . The Inventory
g
Management window is displayed.
n in inventory data:
i Select a node of which inventory data needs to be queried from the
 Query
r a
T

e i navigation tree. The table in the middle of Inventory Management
a w displays the inventory information about the specified node.
Hu  Click any row in the inventory information master table. The inventory
information about the selected MO is displayed in the table on the right
side.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
eNodeB LTE V100R013C10 Parameter Introduction for Initial Configuration P-0
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Components of the MML command window H
u
No. Field
o n Description
Radio access technology ti
1
(RAT) selection area a
ic Displays the output of an MML command.
You can choose Common or a specific RAT.
Common Maintenanceiftab
2
r t
3
C e
Operation Record tab
Displays information about all the commands
that have been executed by the user.
Help tab &
g
4 Displays the help topics for an MML command.
i n
Command output handling You can click Save ResultSave Result, Auto
n
5
i
options Scroll, or Clear All.
aPane for manual input of an Displays the manually entered command and
6 r
i T MML command parameter values.
e 7 Command History text box Records all the commands and parameters a
a w
u
user enters during one session.
H 8 Command text box

Displays all the MML commands of the system.
You can select an MML command from the
drop-down list or enter the command directly.
Displays all parameters that can be set in an
Area for settings parameters MML command entered in the Command text
9
of an MML command box. The parameters in red are mandatory.
The parameters in black are optional.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu prepare the data negotiated with
Before you perform the initial eNodeB configuration,
n in advance if these templates are

peer NE or the required data provided by telecom operators. Prepare custom eNodeB
o
ti only exists in the external template.
templates, radio templates, or cell templates
a
ic configuration based on an external template, you
required for creating eNodeBs. Parameter
i f
rtexternal template of the corresponding version in
 To perform initial eNodeB
need to preparee
advance. YouC
the
&
can obtain the external template from the released version
ng about the configuration parameters related to initial eNodeB

package of the eNodeB.
Foridetails
in

r aconfiguration, see the eNodeB MO References and eNodeB Parameter
i T References.
e
aw
 You can download the documents from support.huawei.com.
Hu
 You can obtain the documents from the released version package of
the eNodeB.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

eNodeB LTE V100R013C10 Parameter Introduction for Initial Configuration
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu in SET NE?
What is the use of parameter Deployment Identifier
n
io physical site with OMIP planned. The other
 For LO or co-MPT SRAN site, this parameter can be used as one option
a t
during PnP deployment for binding
ic
tif site, besides the above usage, another important
option is ESN of backboard.

meaning of this e
r
For separate MPT SRAN
C parameter is to bind different MPT boards that operates
&
different RATs in one site as one maintenance object in M2000, by executing
g
SET NE in different MPT board with the same value.
n into ADD ENODEBFUNCTION for an LO site during initial data

i
 Do we need
a
r No. This command is necessary for SRAN site with multiple RATs versions
configuration?
T
ei being installed.

a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu that the port type is CPRI and
CPRI Interface Type: The value CPRI_SFP indicates
and the QSFP module is supported.iThe o nvalue CPRI_QSFP indicates that the port
the SFP module is supported. The value XCI_QSFP indicates that the port type is XCI
a t is supported.
ic
type is CPRI and the QSFP module
i f
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

Hu
Backup Mode: the backup mode of the RRU chain/ring.

o n
There are two modes: cold backup and hot backup. Cold backup indicates that
t
when the link on one end of the i chain/ring fails, the service is disrupted for a short
ic a
period of time, and then re-established on the other end of the chain/ring. Hot
t f the link on one end of the chain/ring fails, the service

backup indicates that iwhen
is taken over by ther other end of the chain/ring immediately.
CeRRU on the chain/ring in hot backup mode. In the RRUCHAIN
&set to RING and BM is set to HOT, the head CPRI port and the tail
 There is only one
g
MO, if TT is
i n
CPRI port of the RRU ring must be on different baseband boards.
n
Access iType: the access type of the RRU.

r aWhen AccessType is set to the local port, the LBBP is connected to the RRU/RFU
i T through the CPRI port.

e
a w
u
 When AccessType is set to the peer port, the peer LBBP is directly connected to
H the RRU/RFU, and the local LBBP is connected to the peer LBBP through the
IDX2 port on the backplane. Usually, this setting is configured for CPRI MUX
scenario in SRAN project.
 CPRI-related alarms will be generated when the negotiated CPRI line rate differs from the
current rate. If the whole ring/chain supports the negotiated CPRI line rate, the line rate
will be synchronized in 2 minutes and the CPRI-related alarms will be cleared. If not, DSP
CPRIPORT command can be run to check the negotiated result. If the negotiated result is
not the expected rate, optical modules, baseband processing boards, and RRU capability

need to be checked.
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Time synchronization is also known as phase
u
Hsynchronization.
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu are GPS (for TDD) and IEEE
In LTE eNodeB, the common clock source applied
1588v2 (for FDD).
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu
In eNodeB (FDD+TDD) scenarios, run the SET CLKSYNCMODE command to set the clock
synchronization mode to TIME.
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 What are the common device data that needH
u
to be configured?
n
time data and clock data. io
 The common device data include cabinet data, BBU boards data, RF unit data,
a t
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 In the common data parameters introductionH
u
to transport data part, only data in non-
n configuration scenario to give the trainees a

secure network is introduced. Data for secure network will be introduced in the next
o
i
tconfiguration.
chapter with secure network as a special
ic
easier way to understand transport a
i f
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
u

o
i
tconfiguration.
ic
i f
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ti
Radio
a
Control Plane User Plane
Network
ic
Layer User Plane
if
X2-AP PDUs
rt
e
Transport Transport Network Transport Network
C
User Plane
Network User Plane
Layer
&
ng
GTP-U
ni
SCTP
UDP
i
IP (IPv6 and/or IPv4)
a
IP (IPv6 and/or IPv4)
r
Data link layer
T
Data link layer
i
Physical layer
Physical layer
e
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
u

o
i
tconfiguration.
ic
i f
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 VRF Background Hu

o n
VRF is newly brought in since eRAN6.0, and is customized for specific
a ti
customer. This feature is only applied in TDD mode.
ic
if result in IP address conflicts.
 When multiple operators share a network, operators may plan IP addresses
independently. Thistmay
To address this e
r

C issue, network planning personnel must create different
& do not conflict with each other in a network, network planning

routing instances for operators based on network requirements. To ensure that
g
in must assign conflicting IP addresses to different route domains. The
IP addresses
n
i process is known as virtual routing and forwarding (VRF).
personnel
r aentire
i T
e
 VRF Implementation
aw
 The VRF number identifies the routing table on the eNodeB. Upon the setup of
Hu
a VRF instance, a routing table is set up. The VRF instance numbered 0
functions as the default VRF instance and has no difference from other VRF
instances in terms of implementation. If packets have no VRF number
specified, they are transmitted in the default VRF instance.
 For FDD mode, only VRF with number 0 is applied.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
u

o
i
tconfiguration.
ic
i f
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu let’s get to know the basic
Before introducing data configuration in link layer,
n
knowledge about VLAN in LTE network first, to help us understand VLAN
o
configuration.
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 DMAC: Destination Media Access Control Hu
 SMAC: Source Media Access Control
o n
 FCS: frame check sequence
ati
ic
if
rt


e
Ethernet type: with fixed value “0x8100” to indicate the frame is carrying 802.1Q tag.
CVLAN priority. There are 8 priorities with 0~7 valued. A large
Priority: It specifies the
value indicates a&
g
high priority.

n in format indicator
CFI: canonical
a i It indicates which VLAN the frame belongs to. Maximum 2 -2=4094 VLAN
r supported.
 VLAN ID: 12
T
ei
IDs is
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Example for VLAN planning Hu

o n
If a VLAN is configured for the peer device, the VLAN must be configured for
a ti
the eNodeB. Otherwise, no VLAN needs to be configured for the eNodeB.
ic
tif Otherwise, no VLAN needs to be configured for the
 If the eNodeB communicates with the switch through a router, a VLAN must be
r
configured for the eNodeB.
e
eNodeB.
C

&
Reason for eNodeB attach VLAN tags:
n g
i
 The eNodeB can identify Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) values at
i n network layer. In general, the eNodeB maps traffic types to DSCP values
the
r aat the network layer and then maps these DSCP values to VLAN priorities at
i T the data link layer. Unlike the eNodeB, the switch cannot identify DSCP
e
a w values. Therefore, the switch cannot map DSCP values to VLAN priorities.
Hu  The switch attaches VLAN tags to traffic flows based only on the ingress port
information. The eNodeB specifies different VLANs for different traffic flows,
but the switch cannot attach VLAN tags to these traffic flows.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Huthe same VLAN priority, set “Set
• If all traffic flows in a VLAN need to be assigned
n
VLAN Priority” to be “ENABLE”, and the value set for “VLAN Priority” is for traffic flows
with the same next-hop IP address. io
a t
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
i
• eWhen “Set VLAN Priority” is set to be “DISABLE”, the configuration result in VLAN
aw single mode is the same as in VLAN group mode.
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
u

o
i
tconfiguration.
ic
i f
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 For end point mode, there are two configurationHumodes: complete configuration and
n
simplified confirmation. For details, see the configuration guide.
o
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ti
ID Name Description
ic a
if
This parameter indicates the remote ID and takes effect when X2
t
interface is set up automatically. The REMOTEID which is configured
r
REMOTEID Remote ID
Ce
automatically is composed of MCC, MNC and X2eNodeB ID(ENODEBID)
when X2 interface is set up automatically and it is used to identify the
& peer base station. If this parameter is manually configured, the
ng
system may fail to automatically modify or delete the MO.
i
nControl
a i Indicates whether the object can be modified or deleted by the
T r
CTRLMODE
system. The value MANUAL_MODE means that only the user can
ei
Mode modify or delete the object. The value AUTO_MODE means that both
the system and the user can modify or delete the object.
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

u
Set the global transport parameters using theHSET GTRANSPARA command, and
n
then set S1 and SCTPHOST MOs. The eNodeB then automatically generates
USERPLANEHOST and EPGROUPio
a t MOs, and adds them to the EPGROUP MO.
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Why does VLAN need to be planned for LTEH
u
networking?
n
io but in L3 network, not all equipment in the
 In LTE network, VLAN is designed mostly for service isolation. Service is
guaranteed by QoS mechanism,
t
aSo through mapping DSCP and VLAN priority,
ic
if by switch can make treat different service with
network can support QoS.
r t
isolate service in L2 network
C e practical.
different policy more

Yes. g
&
Can single VLAN mode replace VLAN group mode? Why?
in configuring VLANMAP in single mode, disable “Set VLAN Priority”,


i n
When
a

T r command. If there is no SET DSCPMAP configuration, default DSCP-VLAN

DSCP-VLAN priority mapping will be applied based on SET DSCPMAP
ei priority mapping is applied. In VLANCLASS setting, the target is also for

a w
Hu mapping DSCP and VLAN priority. So single VLAN mode can replace VLAN
group. The reason for VLAN group MO still exist is to inherit old MO, when
VLAN single mode can only support all traffic flows in a VLAN assigned the
same VLAN priority, with setting “Set VLAN Priority” to be “ENABLE” in new
MO VLANMAP.
 Why do you think end point configuration mode is brought in?
 Which MOs need to be configured for link configuration mode?
 Which MOs need to be configured for end point configuration mode?

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu the cell and the sector have the
One cell can have only one sector. In this situation,
same coverage.
o n
t i purpose is to reduce inter-cell handovers.
a TWO_RRU_COMBINATION and
 One cell can have multiple sectors. The
ic
tif
Common multi-sector cells include
r
DIGITAL_COMBINATION cells.
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 “ Hu a link with the direction from A to
“ is one of the relationships between MOs.For
n
B, it means one or more attributes in MO class A uniquely identify a B MO.
o
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The number of antennas for an AAU is always
u to 0.
Hset
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu in the ADD SECTOR command is
If the Create Default Sector Equipment parameter
n
set to FALSE, run the ADD SECTOREQM command to add sector equipment and
o
corresponding antennas.
a ti
ic
tif
 For massive MIMO, the antenna configuration mode is set to BEAM.
r
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu MO has been configured.
Before adding a cell, ensure that the eNodeBFunction
n
ioof a cell can be set to 64T64R.
 The number of CRS ports cannot exceed the number of physical antennas of the cell.
 For massive MIMO, the TX/RX mode
a t
ic
r tif
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu
When adding a sector, operators can set CREATESECTOREQMas required. The
n mode and is configured as a master

default sector equipment contains all existing antennas in the sector. Each antenna in
o
the sector equipment works in TX and
a ti RX
ic
antenna.
To understand sectorifequipment well, we choose “FALSE” here, to configure
rt manually to get to know the parameters included in

e
SectorEqm. C
the sector equipment
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu the UL EARFCN equals the sum of
For an FDD cell, if no UL EARFCN is configured,
n
the DL EARFCN and 18000 by default. For a TDD cell, the UL EARFCN equals the
o
DL EARFCN.
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
• The answer is 2105 Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
H
The particular sequences which are transmitted
 u for the PSS and SSS in a given cell
n
are used to indicate the physical layer cell identity to the UE.
ti o
ic a
i f
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu code to identify the different cell
PCI: Physical Cell ID, is used to generate scrambling
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Besides the reuse distance needs to be ensuredHuin PCI planning, 3GPP protocols
n
require that the value of PCI/3 should be 0, 1, or 2 in each eNB.
o
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
a5ti
ic
2
rt if
C0e 1 4
& 3
n g 8
ini
r a 7
i T 6
e
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Time dispersion on the radio channel may cause Hu ISI
n
io
 To deal with this problem, cyclic-prefix insertion is typically used in case of OFDM
transmission
t
aoutput block of length N is copied and inserted at
ic
if
 The last N samples of the IFFT
CP
the beginning of the block, tincreasing

e r the block length from N to N +N . At the
CP
C
receiver side, the corresponding samples are discarded before OFDM demodulation

&
Subcarrier orthogonality will then be preserved also in case of a time-dispersive
n
channel, as longg as the span of the time dispersion is shorter than the cyclic-prefix
length.
i ni
r a
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The symbol energy that can be captured by the HuOFDM receiver depends on the CP
length:
o n
If the CP is longer than the imultipath

receiver can capture all c

t
a of the symbol.
delay of an OFDM symbol, the OFDM
f i energy
If the CP is shortertithan the multipath delay of an OFDM symbol, the OFDM
r
Ce only some energy of the symbol.

receiver can capture
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 PCI: Physical Cell ID Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The basic format of a random access preamble Huis shown in the figure above.
n
io for UEs to select randomly. They are
 To reduce the probability of preamble conflicts (for example, multiple UEs select the
t
a through cyclic shift.
same preamble), there are 64 preambles
ic
tif with different root sequence indexes, to prevent the
generated based on the root sequence

preamble sent by a UE e
r
Adjacent cells must be configured
C from being received by an adjacent cell.


& delayed signals. In this way, preamble sequences sent by UEs
The uplink round trip time (RTT) is uncertain. Therefore, the guard interval must be
g
in can fall within the time window when arriving at the eNodeB.
reserved for receiving
i n
at the cell edge
r a
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Calculations: Hu
o n
Preamble
a ti Max Delay
Max Cell Radius Max Cell Radius
c
ZeroCorrZone Ncs T_GT (ms) (according to T_GT) (according to Ncs)
i
Format Spread [ms]
if
[km] [km]
rt
0 839 3 715.625 16.666 107.344 117.214
1
2
13
15
Ce 0
0
96.875
96.875
5.208
5.208
14.531
14.531
0.792
1.078
&
3 18 0 96.875 5.208 14.531 1.507
4 22 0 96.875 5.208 14.531 2.079
ng
5 26 0 96.875 5.208 14.531 2.651
n
6
i 32 0 96.875 5.208 14.531 3.510
ai
7 38 0 96.875 5.208 14.531 4.368
r
8 46 0 96.875 5.208 14.531 5.512
T
9 59 0 96.875 5.208 14.531 7.371
ei
10 76 0 96.875 5.208 14.531 9.803
11 93 0 96.875 5.208 14.531 12.234
a w 12 119 2 196.875 5.208 29.531 15.953
u
13 167 2 196.875 5.208 29.531 22.818
H
14 279 1 515.625 16.666 77.344 37.119
15 419 1 515.625 16.666 77.344 57.143

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 HuIf the cell radius is 10 km, the Ncs
The Ncs value is determined by the cell radius.
value is 76
o n
t i 11, that is, each index can generate 11
a six root sequence indexes are required to generate
 The value of 839/76 is rounded down to
ic
64 preamble sequences. if
preamble sequences. In this case,
rt
The number of availableeroot sequence indexes is 139 (0, 6, 12…828)

C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Neighboring cell classification Hu
o n
ti
ica
EUTRANINTRAFR
f
EQNCELL
r ti LTE N Cell
Ce EUTRANINTERFR
&
EQNCELL
g
n in
Neighboring Cell
i
CDMA2000HRPD
r a NCELL
T
ei
aw
Inter System N
UTRANNCELL
cell
Hu
GERANNCELL

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Complete MML command for switch on coverageHu based handover
MOD ENODEBALGOSWITCH: n
io
 HoAlgoSwitch=IntraFreqCoverHoSwitch-
a t
1&InterFreqCoverHoSwitch-1&UtranCsfbSwitch-0&GeranCsfbSwitch-
ic
if
0&Cdma1xRttCsfbSwitch-0&UtranServiceHoSwitch-
r t
0&GeranServiceHoSwitch-0&CdmaHrpdServiceHoSwitch-
C e
0&Cdma1xRttServiceHoSwitch-0&UlQualityInterRATHoSwitch-
&
0&InterPlmnHoSwitch-0&UtranFlashCsfbSwitch-0&GeranFlashCsfbSwitch-
g
0&ServiceBasedInterFreqHoSwitch-0&UlQualityInterFreqHoSwitch-
n
n i
0&CsfbAdaptiveBlindHoSwitch-0&UtranCsfbSteeringSwitch-
a i
r 0&Cdma1XrttEcsfbSwitch-0&EmcBlindHoA1Switch-
0&GeranCsfbSteeringSwitch-0&CSFBLoadInfoSwitch-
T
ei 0&EmcInterFreqBlindHoSwitch-0;
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Huand the local cell are not served by
(Optional) If an intra-frequency neighboring cell
n
the same eNodeB, run the ADD EUTRANEXTERNALCELL command to add an E-
o
UTRAN external cell.
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 For example, the interval is 45 MHz for GSMH
u
and CDMA 1X and 190 MHz for
WCDMA.
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 DBS3900 LampSite is composed of baseband Huunit (BBU), pico remote radio unit
n can be flexibly combined to meet different
(pRRU), RRU HUB (RHUB), and auxiliary devices (such as Extender and pRRU
o
ti
external antenna system). These modules
radio coverage requirements. a
i f ic
e rt of BBU, distributed control unit (DCU), pRRU,

C
DBS5900 LampSite is composed
&
RHUB, and auxiliary devices (such as Extender, optical module, and lightning
g
arrester). These modules can be flexibly combined to meet different radio coverage
n in
requirements.
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hubetween the RHUB and BBU consists
In the LampSite solution, the CPRI networking
of a star topology and a chain topology.
o n
t i of 24 RHUBs over multiple CPRI links.
amaximum of four levels of RHUB cascading.
 A BBU can connect to a maximum
Each CPRI link supportsca
i
tif

r
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 If the physical bandwidth of a CPRI port on aH
u
pRRU is insufficient to support a cell, the
branch load sharing topology can be used.
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

 //Add RRU chains for RHUBs.

 ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=10, TT=CHAIN, BM=COLD, HSRN=0, HSN=3, HPN=0;
 //Add RHUBs.
 ADD RHUB: SRN=60, RCN=10, PS=0, RN="RHUB60";
 ADD RHUB: SRN=61, RCN=10, PS=1, RN="RHUB61";
n
it o
 //Add RRU chains for pRRUs.
ic a
if
rt
 ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=20, TT=CHAIN, BM=COLD, HSRN=60, HSN=0, HPN=0;
Ce
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=21, TT=CHAIN, BM=COLD, HSRN=60, HSN=0, HPN=1;
&
g
in HPN=1;
n
ai HSN=0, HPN=2;
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=31, TT=CHAIN, BM=COLD, HSRN=61, HSN=0,
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=32, TT=CHAIN, BM=COLD, HSRN=61, r
T HSN=0, HPN=3;
e i
ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=33, TT=CHAIN, BM=COLD, HSRN=61,
a w
 //Add pRRUs.
Hu
n
 ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=71, SN=0, TP=BRANCH, RCN=20, PS=0, RT=MPMU,
i o
tTP=BRANCH,
RS=LO, RN="RRU71", RXNUM=0, TXNUM=0;

i
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=72, SN=0,
c a RCN=21, PS=0, RT=MPMU,
r t if TXNUM=0;
RS=LO, RN="RRU72", RXNUM=0,

Ce SN=0, TP=BRANCH, RCN=22, PS=0, RT=MPMU,
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=73,
&
g
ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=74, SN=0, TP=BRANCH, RCN=23, PS=0, RT=MPMU,
in

i n

r a CN=0, SRN=81, SN=0, TP=BRANCH, RCN=30, PS=0, RT=MPMU,
ADD RRU:
i T RN="RRU81", RXNUM=0, TXNUM=0;

RS=LO,
eADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=82, SN=0, TP=BRANCH, RCN=31, PS=0, RT=MPMU,
aw

Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Intra-BBU CA configuration: Hu

o n
Configure two CA cells as the inter-frequency neighboring cells of each other.
 Add a CA group and add CA
a ticells to the group.
Bilateral blind configuration: ic

f
tiand

e r
Set the SCellPriority SCellBlindCfgFlag parameters of candidate SCells.
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 If a dual-carrier RRU (AAU3920 or AAU3940) is used, Hu only one sector needs to be configured.

o n
Assume that a common RRU and an inter-frequency mutual aid module RRU3632m are used,
i Then, the configuration command can be as

tRRU.
a total of one sector is configured, and the inter-frequency mutual aid module must share its
two receive channels with the common
ic a
i f
rt
follows:

C e
ADD SECTOR: SECTORID=0,
ANT1N=R0A, ANT2CN=0,
ANTNUM=4, ANT1CN=0, ANT1SRN=60, ANT1SN=0,
ANT2SRN=60, ANT2SN=0, ANT2N=R0B, ANT3CN=0,
ANT3SRN=61,& CREATESECTOREQM=FALSE;
ANT3SN=0, ANT3N=R0A, ANT4CN=0, ANT4SRN=61, ANT4SN=0,
n g
ANT4N=R0B,
i

in equipment need to be configured. Then, the configuration command can be as
If a common RRU and an inter-frequency mutual aid module RRU3632m are used and two
sets ofasector
T r
ei ADD SECTOREQM: SECTOREQMID=0, SECTORID=0, ANTNUM=4, ANT1CN=0,
follows:
aw

Hu
ANT1SRN=60, ANT1SN=0, ANT1N=R0A, ANTTYPE1=RXTX_MODE, ANT2CN=0,
ANT2SRN=60, ANT2SN=0, ANT2N=R0B, ANTTYPE2=RXTX_MODE, ANT3CN=0,
ANT3SRN=61, ANT3SN=0, ANT3N=R0A, ANTTYPE3=RX_MODE, ANT4CN=0,
ANT4SRN=61, ANT4SN=0, ANT4N=R0B, ANTTYPE4=RX_MODE; //Adding sector
equipment for the common RRU
 ADD SECTOREQM: SECTOREQMID=1, SECTORID=0, ANTNUM=2, ANT1CN=0,
ANT1SRN=61, ANT1SN=0, ANT1N=R0A, ANTTYPE1=RXTX_MODE, ANT2CN=0,
ANT2SRN=61, ANT2SN=0, ANT2N=R0B, ANTTYPE2=RXTX_MODE; //Adding sector
equipment for the inter-frequency mutual aid module RRU3632m

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hofutwo common RRUs, an AAU, or a
Configure two cells when using a combination
combination of common RRU+RRU3632m.
o n
t i combined for 2T4R+2T2R CA, set 2T4R for
a and set 2T2R for the cell served by the
 If a common RRU and an RRU3632m are
the cell served by the common c
i
tif
RRU
r
RRU3632m.
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 If two independent common RRUs are used,H
u
set up cells separately on the
n
corresponding sectors. That is, each cell corresponds to an independent cell sector
o
equipment.
a titwo cells on a single sector. That is, the two cells

f ic equipment.
If a dual-carrier RRU is used, set
correspond to the same cellisector
up
t
rinter-frequency

C
If a common RRU and an e mutual aid module RRU3632m are used,
&
each cell corresponds to an independent cell sector equipment.
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Apply for a license as follows: Hu

o n
If the total bandwidth of two cells for CA does not exceed 20 MHz, each cell
a ti
requires one sales unit of the license for LAOFD-001001 LTE-A Introduction. If
ic
if unit of the license for LAOFD-001002 Carrier
the total bandwidth of two cells for CA is in the range (20 MHz, 40 MHz], each
r t
cell requires one sales
Aggregation for e
C
Downlink 2CC in 40MHz in addition to one sales unit of the
&
license for LAOFD-001001 LTE-A Introduction.
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Massive MIMO is a leading multiple-antennaH
u
technology and a key technology for
single eNodeB for 3D beamforming iand o nmulti-user multiplexing. This technology

4.5G. It features the use of massive antenna arrays (up to 64 antenna arrays) on a
a t improves network coverage, and enhances

ic
reduces the demand for site resources,
user experience with variousifservices.
e rt technologies support beam adjustment only on the

C MIMO, in contrast, supports adjustment of broadcast beams
 Traditional multiple-antenna
&beams in both the horizontal and vertical planes, significantly

horizontal plane. Massive
g
and downlink traffic
n in coverage.
enhancing system
Massivei MIMO supports multi-user spatial multiplexing using up to 8 layers in the

r aand 16 layers in the downlink, significantly improving system capacity.
i T
uplink
e
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

eNodeB LTE V100R013C10 Initial Configuration by CME
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Prepare for configuration. Hu
o n
Obtain the following data based on live network situations such as hardware
ati
configuration, transmission networking, and service specifications.
ic
if
 eNodeB device data: You can obtain it from the site design.
r t
e
 eNodeB transport data: You can obtain it from the transmission networking
design.
C
&
eNodeB radio data: You can obtain it from the radio network plan.
g


i n
Create a workspace.
n
i a planned data area before configuring data.
a Create
r an eNodeB.

T
ei Select a proper eNodeB template to create an eNodeB on the GUI.
 Create
w

u a  Configure eNodeB data.

H The process of configuring eNodeB data is as follows:
 Configure eNodeB device data.
 Configuring eNodeB transport data.
 Configure eNodeB radio data.
 Verify and export the eNodeB configuration data.
 Verify the accuracy and validity of eNodeB configuration data. If the verification
succeeds, the system generates eNodeB configuration data for commissioning
eNodeBs.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Create a workspace.
H u
n
 Create a planned data area before configuring data.
 Prepare templates. o
tiby using the CME, you need to collect project
Before configuring eNodeBs a
iccollect and plan data based on the hardware
f

i
rt networking, and business specifications, save the
information for the office,
e
C data as an eNodeB template, and save global radio data and
configuration, transport
&
collected device
g
cell data respectively as a global radio template and cell template based on
i n planning such as networking and business specifications.

the actual
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu into the following types: Common
The sheets in the summary data file are categorized
n
Data, eNodeB Transport Data, LTE Cell Data, Pattern, and List.
o
t i
aworksheet with data and change history.
 The cover worksheet contains matched base station version, precautions to be
ic
tif parameters whose values are the same for all
taken when you fill in each

r
The common data contains
e parameters have the same value for all base stations to
C
base stations. Such
&
be created and need to be negotiated or planned.
n g
The base station transport data contains basic base station information and
ni transport data. Such as IP address, IP route and so on.


i
planned
r aThe LTE cell worksheet contains planned radio parameters of cells.

T The pattern sheets contain the reference data of a configuration object for a

ei 
a w base station. The object of other base stations is configured based on the
Hu pattern.
 The list sheets contain the random differences among configuration object
data records of various base stations. In this case, the object data must be
planned individually for each base station.
 Management object (MO) is a configuration management object defined in 3GPP
protocols. It is applied to the eNodeB configuration model.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w

u
The eNodeB Transport Data sheet providesHthe route information of ten groups by
n in the IPRoutePattern sheet.

default. You can customize the parameters related to routes, such as IP address,
ti o
Mask, NextHopIP by referring to parameters
ic a
i f
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w

u
This sheet does not contain base station IDs.HData in each row applies to all base
n
stations created by using the summary data file.
o
t i instances. If the number of instances and
aMO of different base stations are the same, you can
 This sheet applies to MOs with multiple
ic
tifsheet.
most parameter values under an
r
define the MO on the Pattern

C
For example, on the user e plane, the number of links and link types for each base
&
station are the same and only the base station IP addresses are different. In this case,
g
you can put the differentiated parameters on the Base Station Transport Data sheet
and use the
n inreferenced correlation on the Pattern sheet.
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu LocalIP) is referred by different
In the above case, the same data source (OmCh
n
Pattern-type sheets (Device IP Address and OM Channel).
o
t i sheets are list type, and if the value of
If “Device IP Address” and “OM Channel”
a to be changed not only in the source sheet, but

ic
“OmCh LocalIP” is changed, it needs
r tif OM Channel sheets.

also in Device IP Address and
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 This sheet contains base station IDs. Data inH
u
each row applies only to one base
station.
o n
t i
a plane, the number of links and link types of an
 The List sheet applies to the scenario where multiple instances of an MO are
available. For example, on the c
i
tif
user
r
MO of all base stations are different. You can define the MO on the List sheet.
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Note: Hu

o n
During the creation of a single eNodeB, you can configure the PnP data when
exporting the deployment list.
tia
ic
tifHowever, this is not recommended.
 During the creation of eNodeBs in batches, you can also configure the PnP data when
r
exporting the deployment list.
Sub Network: Specifiese

C the name of the level-1 sub network where the eNodeB to be
&
commissioned belongs. Set this parameter according to the network plan. The default
n g
value is EASY-DEPLOYMENT.
n iSpecifies
 Sub Area:
is set a
i the sub area where the eNodeB to be commissioned belongs. It
r
T by choosing Application Center > Topo View (Application Style) or
according to the subarea on the U2000. You can obtain information about the
i
eTopology > Main Topology (Traditional Style) on the U2000. In the Main Topology
subarea
a w
Hu window, right-click on the blank area in the topology view and choose New > NE from
the shortcut menu.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The most complex process for creating a summaryH u data file is how to design a
n file, the CME provides a tool for
summary data file and set the mappings between data in the file and NE models. To
o
tiusing this tool, users can quickly set the
help users quickly create a summary data
mappings between data in the fileaand NE models.

customizing a summary data file. By
f ic the following operations: Design data. Set the

By using the tool, users caniperform
rt NE models. Define the data in the Common Data,

mappings between dataeand

C eNodeB Radio Data sheets. Define the data in the Pattern
sheet. Define the&
eNodeB Transport Data,
g data in the List sheet. Select some scenario-based templates for
n in summary data files.

quickly customizing
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Area1:Tab page, which displays a set of NE H
u
configuration parameters. This area can
be customized.
o n
t i
a
 Area2:NE configuration parameter navigation tree, which consists of NE configuration
objects and parameters. An NEcconfiguration
i
tif area cannot be modified.
object consists of multiple NE
r
configuration parameters. This
Area3:Table, which listsethe mappings between the parameter groups and parameters

C
&
in a summary data file and the NE configuration objects and parameters, respectively.
Functions for g
in a default or user-defined summary data file.
 operations to the summary data file are as follows:
n
i: saves a user-defined summary data file.
: opens
a

T r

ei  : saves a user-defined summary data file as a new one.
a w : verifies the validity of a summary data file.

u

H  : selects a scenario template and adds the related sheets, objects, and
parameters to the current summary data file.
 : searches for information based on keywords in right pane.
 : adds a sheet.
 : shows a hidden sheet.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu mode, select port type, set ip
In this window, we can select transport configuration
n
count, set EPGroup, set OMCH, select reference clock, we only need to operate via
o
guide.
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H
The LLD(Low Level Design) data file is a subset u of the summary data file. The
LLD data file defines the configuration parameters that must be negotiated with
o n
ti negotiated and planned with operators and
telecom operators.

a
ic planned configuration parameters according
Summary data file includes the data
the internally planned data, f
i
rt operators, radio network plan and design, and
defining
e
to the negotiation with telecom
actual site situations.C
&summary data file can be converted automatically by the
g
 LLD data file and
i n of excel.
macro function
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Data collection process Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 From SRAN8.0 onwards, the following threeH
u
types of templates are prepared for all
n these types of templates are independent

types of NEs excluding GBTSs: base station template, cell template, and radio
o
ti
template. Managed in hierarchical mode,
from each other and do not havea
f c
icontains
overlapped objects.

r t
Base station template:i device objects of a base station, such as
C e types, electromechanical equipment, environment alarms,

cabinet types, board
& as algorithm parameters, security policies, and certificates.

base station modes, and base station clocks, and common transmission
g
objects, such
Cellin
n
template: contains cell parameters, such as basic cell information, call
i

r acontrol parameters, and power consumption parameters, and sub-object
i T parameters of cells, such as GPRS parameters.

e
aw
 Radio template: contains base-station-level radio algorithm parameters, such
Hu
as handover control parameters.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Methods for obtaining the eNodeB template,H
u
cell template, and radio template:
o nwith the CME component package

ti according to actual scenarios on the site.
 There are default templates released
a
ic user-defined templates on the site by using the
 User-defined templates are customized
i f
rt
 You can upgrade the existing
customization tool.
C e
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Huof a telecom operator, refers to the
The global data, which is unique on the network
n
common data that can be used by all NEs after it is configured once.
o
During initial eNodeB configuration, ithe

t
anetworking scenario.
parameter items to be configured vary
ic
tif 2, or Layer 3 networking, you need to configure the
according to the actual transport

r
In basic Layer 1, Layer
e in Basic information about the global data when
C
parameters described
& features are provided in Layer 2 or Layer 3 networking, you

configuring global data.
g
into configure not only the parameters described in Basic information
 If the security
n
i the global data but also the security gateway parameters
need
a
r If the security features are provided in Layer 2 or Layer 3 networking and the
about
T
ei authentication is based on certificates, you need to configure not only the

a w
Hu parameters described in Basic information about the global data but also the
security gateway and security certificate parameters described

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Operator ID: Index of operator, one eNodeB Hucan be shared by maximum 6
operators
o n

a ti
Operator name: The name of operator
c of the operator. The operator can be the primary
Operator type: Indicates theitype
f
i

operator or a secondary toperator.

e r
 MCC: Mobile CountryC Code
& Code
g
 MNC: Mobile Network

i n the number of the peer port of the MME.
Port: Indicates
a in IP: Indicates the first signaling IP address of the MME, which is to

Tberused as the first peer IP address for an automatically set up SCTP link.
 First signaling
ei First signaling mask: Indicates the mask of first signaling IP of the MME.
w

u a  Second signaling IP: Indicates the second signaling IP address of the MME, which
H is to be used as the second peer IP address for an automatically set up SCTP.
 Second signaling IP mask: Indicates the mask of second signaling IP of the MME.
 First service IP: Indicates the first service IP address of the S-GW, Which is to be
used in automatic setup of an IP Path on the S1 interface.
 First service IP mask: Indicates the mask of first service IP of SGW.
 Second service IP: Indicates the Second service IP address of the S-GW.
 Second service IP mask: Indicates the first service IP address of the S-GW.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu
Port: Indicates the port number of the NTP server
n
io of the NTP authentication, the available
 SyncCycle: Indicates the NTP synchronization period
Authentication Mode: Indicates thetmode
a

f ic
ti
mode can be PLAIN(Plain), DES_S(DES_S), DES_N(DES_N), DES_A(DES_A),
MD5(MD5)
Key : The key used for e
r

CNTP authenticaiton
 &the index of key used on the peer side
Key Index: Indicate
NTP IP: NTP g

i nserver IP address
i n
a
r Parameters Recommended Value
T
Timing
ei
w
IP NTP server/U2000 IP
u a
H
Port 123
Sync Cycle 360min

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The eNodeB supports multiple clock synchronizationHu modes. It obtains clock signals
n
from the reference clock by synchronization, thus achieving clock synchronization with
o
other devices.
a ti from one or multiple synchronization
 A transport network obtains clock
i f ic signals
r t
sources. When multiple synchronization sources are used, they should be prioritized.
When a synchronizationesource is unavailable, the clock source can be switched to
C source with a high priority. This ensures that transmitted
information is not&
another synchronization
g lost or distorted.
n in can be operated in 3 modes:

Clock in eNodeB
i

r aManual: Indicates that a clock source must be specified by the user

T Auto: Indicates that the system automatically selects a clock source based on

e i 
a w the priority and availability of the clock source
Hu  Free: Indicates that the system clock works in free-running mode, that is, the
system clock does not trace any reference clock source.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu
IPCLK supports two types of the IP clock protocol.
n
IEEE1588 V2, defined by theio
 The protocol can be IEEE1588 V2 (PTP) or Huawei private protocol.
t
a Huawei private protocol is the Huawei-defined IP
IEEE, supports both phase synchronization and
ic
clock protocol, whichifis applicable to the interconnection between Huawei
frequency synchronization.
e rt frequency synchronization only.

C
equipment and supports

&
The eNodeB, functioning as the clock client, obtains the system clock from the
g
clock packets periodically sent from the IP clock server.
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 WorkMode Hu

o n
Indicates the working mode of the satellite card. Satellite cards are classified
ti
into dual-mode satellite cards and single-mode satellite cards. A dual-mode
a
ic
satellite card supports three satellite searching modes. For example, the
t if
working mode of a GPS/GLONASS
r
card can be GPS active, GLONASS active,
Ce mode, the card processes only GLONASS signals. In GPS

or both. In GPS active mode, the card processes only GPS signals. In
GLONASS active
& both active mode, the card processes both GPS and
g
and GLONASS
i n signals. A single-mode satellite card supports only one satellite

GLONASS
a in For example, a GPS card supports only GPS..

system.
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Huof a telecom operator, refers to the
The global data, which is unique on the network
n
common data that can be used by all NEs after it is configured once.
o
During initial eNodeB configuration, ithe

t
anetworking scenario.
parameter items to be configured vary
ic
tif 2, or Layer 3 networking, you need to configure the
according to the actual transport

r
In basic Layer 1, Layer
e in Basic information about the global data when
C
parameters described
& features are provided in Layer 2 or Layer 3 networking, you

configuring global data.
g
into configure not only the parameters described in Basic information
 If the security
n
i the global data but also the security gateway parameters
need
a
r If the security features are provided in Layer 2 or Layer 3 networking and the
about
T
ei authentication is based on certificates, you need to configure not only the

a w
Hu parameters described in Basic information about the global data but also the
security gateway and security certificate parameters described

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

o n
An SA define security policies which will be negotiated between communicating peers
ti
to secure different data flows in different ways.
a
ic
if verification, authentication, and pseudo-random
 An IKE SA is an agreement negotiated between IKE peers. An IKE SA defines the
r t
IKE SA lifecycle, and encryption,
C e
function (PRF) algorithms used between IKE peers.
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

o n
An SA define security policies which will be negotiated between communicating peers
ti
to secure different data flows in different ways.
a
ic
if verification, authentication, and pseudo-random
 An IKE SA is an agreement negotiated between IKE peers. An IKE SA defines the
r t
IKE SA lifecycle, and encryption,
C e
function (PRF) algorithms used between IKE peers.
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The operators who use IPSec can customizeH
u
different security requirements for
o n the security policies of IPSec are used to

different types of data. The operators can define a group of security policies to meet
different security requirements. In a iword,
a tprotected and how to protect the data. Actually,
ic one security policy to enable IPSec.
determine which data needs to be
f
operators must configure at ileast
rt of the ACL, IPSec security proposal, and IKE peer.
An IPSec security policyeconsists
C types of data need to be protected. The IPSec security

proposal and IKE&

The ACL describes which
g peer specify how to protect the data.
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu
Following is the description of each parameters
o n
t i Description
a
Parameter
ic
tif
Proposal Indicate the name of IP-sec proposal
r
name
C e encapsulation mode of an IPSec proposal, which can be

Encapsulatio Indicates the
& the security protocol used in IP-sec proposal

n Mode set to TUNNEL or TRANSPORT
g
inIndicates the authentication algorithm used in the AH. The Message-
Transform Indicate
AH AuthAlg n
i Digest Algorithm 5 (MD5) algorithm uses a 128-bit secret key, whereas
r a
i T the Secure Hash Algorithm 1 (SHA1) uses a 160-bit secret key. The
e MD5 algorithm features faster calculation but lower security than the
a w SHA1 algorithm
Hu ESPAuthAlg Indicates the authentication algorithm used in the ESP.

ESPEncrAlg Indicates the encryption algorithm used in the ESP.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu IPSec with automatic negotiation
IKE SA (Security Association) is used to provides
n
and cipher key exchange to simplify the use and management of IPSec, it is
periodically dynamically managed byio
a t IP sec establishment.
IKE.
fic
 IKE SA should be established before
Following is the descriptiontiof IKE proposal parameters

e r
Parameter
C Description
Proposal ID & the name of IP-sec proposal
Indicate
EncrAlg
i ngIndicates the encryption algorithm used in the IKE proposal.
AuthAlg in Indicates the authentication algorithm used in the IKE proposal
r a Indicates the Diffie-Hellman (DH) group of the IKE proposal. The core
i T
DHGroup
e technology used in an IKE proposal is the Diffie-Hellman (DH) exchange
a w technology. The DH exchange technology is used to calculate private
Hu
information based on public information. It is mathematically proven that
decrypting the DH information is impractical due to calculation complexity.
Authentication Indicates the authentication mode used in the IKE proposal, including
method pre-shared key and digital certificate signature
PRF Algorithm Indicates the Pseudo-random Function (PRF) algorithm used in IKEv2.
The PRF algorithm is used to generate the materials required for IKE
authentication and encryption.
ISAKMP SA Indicates the lifetime of an ISAKMP SA. The ISAKMP refers to the
Duration Internet Security Association and Key Management Protocol, and the SA
refers to Security Association.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 ExchangeMode: Indicates the IKE exchangeH
u
mode. In main mode, keys are
n The aggressive mode does not have

exchanged independently from identity authentications. This protects identity
o
ti
information and hence enhances security.
identity authentication protection.aThis mode, however, meets the requirements in
i f ic
rt the DPD idle time. If the local end does not receive
specific network environments.
e
encrypted packets forCa time defined by this parameter, it sends a DPD packet to
 DPD Idle Time(s): Indicates
&detection. The interval for sending a DPD packet slightly varies in

g
perform dead peer
n in environments.
various network
a i
r
 DPD Retransmission Interval(s): Indicates the interval at which DPD detection frames
areTsent. The interval at which DPD detection frames are sent may slightly vary in
i network environments.
evarious
a w
Hu  DPD Retransmission Count: Indicates the number of retransmission attempts after a
DPD detection fails.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Protocol Type: Indicates the protocol type ofH
u
the data to which the ACL rule is applied.
n
io
 Source IP Address: Indicates the source IP address of data to which the ACL rule is
a t
applied. To add an ACL rule that is applicable to data of all source IP addresses, set
ic
if wildcard of the source IP address. The wildcard is
this parameter to 0.0.0.0.
Source Wildcard: Indicatestthe

r
ebits can be neglected when IP address matching is being
C
used to determine which
&
performed. Generally, it can be considered as the inverse of the corresponding subnet
mask.
g
n in Port: Indicates whether to check the source port number of each data
ibefore applying the ACL rule.
 Match Source
a
r Port Operate: Indicates the filtering condition for the source port.
stream
T
ei
 Source
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
H u
 The operators who use IPSec can customize different security requirements for
o
different types of data. The operators can n define a group of security policies to meet
i the security policies of IPSec are used to
different security requirements. In atword,
determine which data needs to c
i a
f
ti an IPSec policy group to a port. The IPSec tunnel is
be protected and how to protect the data.

r
negotiated to protect theedata streams on the port only after the IPSec policy group is
This command is used to bind
C
bound to the port.
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu after global and equipment data
This Transport Data configuration must be configed
configuration.
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
H u

o n
Currently, there are six product types of the BTS5900 eNodeB templates:
it
DBS5900_LTE, BTS5900_LTE, BTS5900A_LTE, BTS5900L_LTE, BTS5900AL_LTE,
and DBS5900_LampSite_LTE.
ic a
r tif
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Huglobal and equipment data
This Transport Data configuration must be after
configuration.
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 S1 Control Plane Hu

o n
The S1 control plane interface (S1-MME) is defined between the eNB and the
ati
MME. The control plane protocol stack of the S1 interface is shown on figure.
ic
if of signalling messages SCTP is added on top of
The transport network layer is built on IP transport, similarly to the user plane
r t
but for the reliable transport
C e layer signalling protocol is referred to as S1-AP (S1

IP. The application
&
Application Protocol).
S1 User plane
g
Thein

i n S1 user plane interface (S1-U) is defined between the eNB and the S-GW.
r aThe S1-U interface provides non guaranteed delivery of user plane PDUs
i T between the eNB and the S-GW. The user plane protocol stack on the S1
e
a w interface is shown in figure. The transport network layer is built on IP transport
Hu and GTP-U is used on top of UDP/IP to carry the user plane PDUs between
the eNB and the S-GW.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 X2 Control Plane Hu

o n
The X2 control plane interface (X2-CP) is defined between two neighbour
a ti
eNBs. The control plane protocol stack of the X2 interface is shown on figure.
ic
tf
The transport network layer is built on SCTP on top of IP. The application layer
signalling protocol is ireferred
r
to as X2-AP (X2 Application Protocol).
C e

&
The X2-UP interface protocol stack is identical to the S1-UP protocol stack.
X2 User Planeg
inX2 user plane interface (X2-U) is defined between eNBs. The X2-U

i n
a
 The
T r interface provides non guaranteed delivery of user plane PDUs. The user
ei plane protocol stack on the X2 interface is shown in figure. The transport
a w network layer is built on IP transport and GTP-U is used on top of UDP/IP to
Hu carry the user plane PDUs.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
configuration.
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
configuration.
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a data H
u
exchange technology derived from the
traditional LAN.
o n
t i grouped into multiple network segments
a virtual workgroups. The hosts in different VLANs
 VLAN allows LAN devices to be logically
ic
if and they communicate with each other only through
(that is, smaller LANs) to implement
r
are separated from each other
t
C e domain, that is, a host in a VLAN can receive the
routers. A VLAN is a broadcast
&from other VLANs. The VLAN attaches different labels to the

broadcast packets from the other hosts in the same VLAN but cannot receive the
g
broadcast packets
n
n i
operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM) data and the traffic data. Thus,
a i services can be provided. The VLAN also provides services of different

r and security levels on the MAC layer.
differentiated
T
ei
priorities
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 There are two ways of configuring VLAN, one H u
is based on NEXTHOPIP(VLANMAP),
the other is TRAFFICTYPE (VLANCLASS).
o n it is better to use NEXTHOPIP method.

If mapping different traffica

ti
If one base station has one VLAN,

i f ic into VLAN priority ,the TRAFFICTYPE would be
rt include NEXTHOPIP, MODE, and VLANGROUPNO.

used.
e
NEXTHOPIP C
 The parameters of VLANMAP
&
 indicates the next hop IP address used for mapping the VLAN.
ng maps to one VLAN , otherwise, NEXTHOPIP maps to one

 MODE includes SINGLEVLAN, VLANGROUP, If select SINGLEVLAN,
i
in
NEXTHOPIP
aVLANGROUP(VLANCLASS),
r different traffic with different VLAN
then MO VLANCLASS is used to configure
T
ei VLANGROUPNO Indicates the VLAN group that the added VLAN mapping
w

u a belongs to.
H
 The parameters of VLANCLASS include TRAFFICTYPE, VLAD,VLANPRI and
VLANGROUPNO
 TRAFFICTYPE indicates the transmission traffic type ,which is used to
categorize the VLAN based on different types of service data. The value can
be ranged with USERDATA, SIG, OM_HIGH, and OM_LOW,OTHER.
 VLANPRI Indicates the VLAN priority. A greater parameter value indicates a
higher priority.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
configuration.
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
configuration.
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Two modes are available for configuring S1 H
u
and X2 links: link and EndPoint.
n
io resources of the S1/X2. The MOs to be
 The link mode is a direct configuration mode, which is used for configuring
a t
IPPATH and SCTPLINK transport
configured are IPPATH,cSCTPLINK,
f i S1Inteface, and X2Interface.
The EndPoint modetiis an implicit configuration mode, which is used for

r
e and SCTPLINK transport resources between the local
C
configuring the IPPATH
&
and peer ends of the S1/X2, when the local and peer ends of the S1/X2 are
g
configured in direct mode. The MOs to be configured are S1ServIP, S1SigIP,
n in X2ServIP, MME, SGW, and X2eNodeB.

X2SigIP,
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu of operator.
The planning of IP address depends on the networking
Here is some basic rules of IP planningn
iosame ETH port.


t
a share the same logic IP.
All the interface can share the
ic
tif the logic IP should be used as inner IP and mapped
 If IP is limited S1/X2 interface

e r
Once IP tunnel is used,
into outer IP C
& IP should be in different segment of eNodeB local
g
 All the transport
in
maintenance IP
n
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu must be configured for the link
An SCTP link and an IP path on a transport interface
n
mode, and the information about the involved ports is negotiated by local and peer
o
devices.
a ti set parameters, such as source IP address,

i f
When configuring a transmission
icSCTP port number, and destination SCTP port number,
link,
rt ends.
destination IP address, source
C e
at both source and destination
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu must be configured for the endpoint
The port information about the transport interface
mode. Endpoint mode is recommended.
o n
t i end point parameters such as eNodeB
a end as well as MME/S-GW/eNodeB parameters
 When configuring a transmission link, set
ic
if automatically generates S1 and X2 interfaces
control and user planes at the source
r t
at the destination end. The eNodeB
Ce
based on end point parameters.
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu of the MCC, MNC and ECI
 ECGI (Evolved Cell Global Identity) - is comprised
n
(Evolved Cell Identity), the later being coded by each service provider.
 ECGI = PLMN I D+ eNB ID(20 bits) i+o
a t Cell ID(8 bits)
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
aw
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Band Duplex FDL_low FDL_high NOffs-DL NDL Hu FUL_low FUL_high NOffs-UL NUL
n
(MHz) (MHz) (MHz) (MHz)
1 FDD 2110 2170 0
ti o 0-599 1920 1980 18000 18000-18599
ica
2 FDD 1930 1990 600 600-1199 1850 1910 18600 18600-19199
ti f
3 FDD 1805 1880 1200 1200-1949 1710 1785 19200 19200-19949
r
4 FDD 2110 2155 1950 1950-2399 1710 1755 19950 19950-20399
Ce
5 FDD 869 894 2400 2400-2649 824 849 20400 20400-20649
6 FDD 875 885 2650 2650-2749 830 840 20650 20650-20749
7 FDD
&
2620 2690 2750 2750-3449 2500 2570 20750 20750-21449
ng
8 FDD 925 960 3450 3450-3799 880 915 21450 21450-21799
ni
9 FDD 1844.9 1879.9 3800 3800-4149 1749.9 1784.9 21800 21800-22149
10
a i FDD 2110 2170 4150 4150-4749 1710 1770 22150 22150-22749
T r
11 FDD 1475.9 1500.9 4750 4750-4999 1427.9 1452.9 22750 22750-22999
ei 12 FDD 728 746 5000 5000-5179 698 716 23000 23000-23179
w
13 FDD 746 756 5180 5180-5279 777 787 23180 23180-23279
u a 14 FDD 758 768 5280 5280-5379 788 798 23280 23280-23379
H 17 FDD 734 746 5730 5730-5849 704 716 23730 23730-23849
33 TDD 1900 1920 26000 36000-36199 1900 1920 36000 36000-36199

34 TDD 2010 2025 26200 36200-36349 2010 2025 36200 36200-36349
35 TDD 1850 1910 26350 36350-36949 1850 1910 36350 36350-36949
36 TDD 1930 1990 26950 36950-37549 1930 1990 36950 36950-37549
37 TDD 1910 1930 27550 37550-37749 1910 1930 37550 37550-37749
38 TDD 2570 2620 27750 37750-38249 2570 2620 37750 37750-38249
39 TDD 1880 1920 28250 38250-38649 1880 1920 38250 38250-38649
40 TDD 2300 2400 28650 38650-39649 2300 2400 38650 38650-39649

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Radio data includes the configuration data ofH
u
local cells and neighboring cells.
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 By dividing planned data areas, different usersHucan have different workspaces, which
n
io before the modified configuration data is
allows multiple engineers to work in parallel. The modifications in one area do not
t
a and security of configuration data.
affect the services on the existing network
ic
r t if
activated. This enhances the reliability

e
1、The configuration data of NEs on the live network is saved to the current data area
of the CME using theC
& data, users copy the data of one or more NEs from the current
synchronization function.
g
inthe planned data areas created by themselves.
 2、Before configuring
i n
data area to
a
r perform data planning and data configuration in their own planned data

i T
3、Users
eareas.
a w
u
 NOTE: If multiple users configure the data of one NE at the same time, data conflict

eNodeB LTE V100R013C10 Initial Configuration by
CME
occurs. The CME provides a conflict check function to guarantee the data validity.
 4、After the data planning and data configuration is complete, users save the
configuration data in the planned data areas as configuration scripts. Then, users
activate the scripts for the data to take effect on the live network.
 5、The data in the current data area of the CME is updated with the configuration data
of NEs on the live network using the synchronization function.
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Choose CME> Planned Area> Create Planned Hu Area . The dialog box for creating a
planned data area is displayed.
o n
 The information about the new planned
t i data area.
Because the OMCH is c
i aset up before the initial configuration, do not select
tif a planned area.
 not
r
any NE when creating
Ce of the planned data area.

 The name
& a user group.

 Select
n g user has the NMS application authority Manage Custom Data,


i
If the current
n drop-down list box related to user groups displays the information about
a ithe
T r all user groups. If the current user does not have the authority, the information
ei about the user group to which the user belongs and the information about the
a w Default user group are displayed.
Hu
 The user groups to which the planned data area belongs are as follows:
 Default: The planned data area of this group can be accessed by all
users.
 Others: The planned data area of such a user group can be opened by
only the users in this group and the users in the Administrators user
group.
 Click OK. The planned data area is created.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 1. Configuring eNodeB Equipment Data Hu
o n
ti
 Configuring Data of Cabinets and the BBU3900 Subrack
 Configuring RF Units
ic a

r tif Units
Configuring Monitoring

C e Modules
Configuring Power

&
Configuring ALDs
g

n in
Configuring Time and Clocks
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 2. Configuring eNodeB Transport Data: Hu

o n
Configure physical layer data of an eNodeB
i eNodeB
Configure link layer data of tan
a

i f icdata of an eNodeB
rt layer data of an eNodeB.
Configure network layer

e
Configure transmission
C plane and service plane data of an eNodeB.(Configuring
&
Configure signaling
g
in
S1 and X2 interface data)
i n
r a
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The process of configuring eNodeB radio dataHisuas follows:
n
io
 Add sectors, configure sector antennas, and set up connections between
sectors and RXUs.
a t
Add sector equipment tocsectors.
i
tif

 Add LTE cells.

e r
 Configure cellCsector equipment groups.
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 1. Apply a summary data file. There are three
u to do it:
Hways
o n released with CME version.
ti before.
 Import a default summary data file
Import a customized one a
ic
 saved
i f
rt
 Open a scenario template.
Right click.eThe main window for customizing the summary data file is

C
&
displayed.
Ifgthe import fails, you need to check whether the following requirements
inare met. Ensure that the following requirements are met, and then import

n
i the configuration data again: The mediation is installed. The NE version
r a
T
ei
matches the mediation version. The name of the external template does
a w not contain any Chinese character.
Hu  If the data is incorrect, it cannot be imported into the database. Then, the
value of relevant parameters are null. For example, if the number of
character strings exceeds the specified length of the database or the
integer data is filled with character strings, the corresponding parameter
data cannot be imported into the database.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 2. Edit the summary data file as required. H
u
o n summary data file.
ti
 Use the customize tool to edit the
c a
the relevant template.fi
 Optional: If need a scenario-based template, you can add them here. Select
i
oftthe summary data file and if any error information displays,
, Check rule r
 3. Click
correct it until the fileC
e
passes the verification.
&the summary data file (this button is available only to a user-
g
 4. click to save
i n data file), or click to save the file to a local PC.

defined summary
a in the data in the summary data file based on the collected configuration
r
 5. Configure
T
ei
data.
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Example for data validity verification : the ID H
u
of a sector configured for a cell must
exist in the sector data.
o n
t i the configuration data of an eNodeB must
contain data of at least one cell.ca
 Example for data integrity verification :
t i fiverification: eNodeB1 and eNodeB2 are neighboring


e r and Cell2 of eNodeB2 are neighboring cells. According

Example for data consistency
C
eNodeBs. Cell1 of eNodeB1
&
to the data consistency rule, the tracking area code (TAC), physical cell identifier
g
(PCI), and E-UTRA absolute radio frequency channel number (EARFCN) of Cell1 in
n
eNodeB1 data in must be consistent with those in external cell data of eNodeB2.
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

u
Export the deployment lists and configurationHfiles of base stations.
n
io > Export Auto Deployment Data (U2000
 On the menu bar, choose Advanced > Export Auto Deployment Data (CME
t
ais displayed for you to export auto-deployment data.
client mode) or CME > Advanced
ic
tif
client mode). A dialog box

Select the base e

r
Select Site creation/expansion scenario, and click Next.

C stations whose auto-deployment data you want to export, and
click Next.
&
Selectg
inNext.
 a save path for the exported file and a method for processing data, and
n
i data in the base station deployment list, and click Next. The CME starts
click
r a
T  View
ei toIf theverify data correctness and exports the data.
a w  export is successful in U2000 client mode, set the following options:
Hu  Select Do not open the Auto Deployment window to close the

wizard.
 Select Open the Auto Deployment window. The CME automatically
switches to the auto-deployment window and creates a commissioning
task.
 Select Open the Auto Deployment window and start Auto
Deployment task. The CME automatically switches to the auto-

eNodeB LTE V100R013C10 Initial Configuration by
CME
deployment window and starts a commissioning task.
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Click Finish. Hu
Note:
o n
 The save paths for the exported
a ti data configuration scripts and deployment lists
are as follows:
i f ic
r t scripts: export directory\CfgData\base station
e
 Data configuration
name
C
&
g use the script executor to check and edit the exported data


i n
You can
a in
configuration scripts.
T r Exported deployment list: The naming convention is

i

e Auto_Deployment_List_ID of the planned data area_time stamp.xml. If
a w multiple NEs are selected at a time, the NE data is exported to one
Hu deployment list.
 Exported data configuration script: The script is in XML format. Each site has
one configuration script.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

eNodeB LTE V100R012C10 Troubleshooting
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Steps in the general troubleshooting process Hu
o n
No. Step
ti Remarks
a to be backed up includes the database, alarm
ic
Data
if
1 Backing Up Data
r t information, and log files.
2
Collecting Fault
Ce Fault information is essential to troubleshooting. Therefore,
maintenance personnel are advised to collect as much fault
&
Information
information as possible.
ng
Determining the Fault
ni
3 Determine the fault scope and type based on the symptoms.
i
Scope and Type
r a Identify the fault causes based on the fault information and

T
4 Identifying Fault Causes
i
symptom.
e Rectifying the Fault
w
5 Take appropriate measures or steps to rectify the fault.
u a Checking Whether If the fault is rectified, the troubleshooting process ends. If the
H 6 Faults Have Been fault persists, check whether this fault falls in another fault
Rectified scope or type.
Contacting Huawei If the fault scope or type cannot be determined, or the fault
7
Technical Support cannot be rectified, contact Huawei technical support.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Fault information classification Hu
 Original information
o n

ati
Original information includes the fault information reflected in user complaints,
ic
fault notifications from other offices, exceptions detected in maintenance, and the
tif
information collected by maintenance personnel through different channels in the
r
Ce
early period when the fault is found. Original information is important for fault
locating and analysis.
&
Alarm information
g

n Alarm information is the output of the eNodeB alarm system. It relates to the
ni

a i hardware, links, trunk, and CPU load of the eNodeB, and includes the description
T r of faults or exceptions, fault causes, and handling suggestions. Alarm information
ei is a key element for fault locating and analysis.
aw
 Indicator status
Hu
 Board indicators indicate the running status of boards, circuits, links, optical
channels, and nodes. Indicator status information is also a key element for fault
locating and analysis.
 Performance counter
 Performance counters are statistics about service performance, such as statistics
about service drops and handovers. They help find out causes of service faults so
that measures can be taken in a timely manner to prevent such faults.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 Equipment faults are further classified into the following types:
 Cell faults
Cell setup fails.
o n
ti

a
 Cell activation fails.
ic
tif or fails intermittently.
 Operation and maintenance channel (OMCH) faults

r
The OMCH is interrupted
e does not work properly.
C
The CPRI link

&
The S1/X2/SCTP/IPPATH links do not work properly.

gIP transport is abnormal.

infaults

n
Clock
i The clock source is faulty.

r a 
i T The IP clock link is faulty.


e
w
 The system clock is out of lock.
u a  Security faults
H 

The IPSec tunnel is abnormal.
SSL negotiation is abnormal.
 Digital certificate processing is abnormal.
 Radio frequency faults
 The standing wave is abnormal.
 The received total wideband power (RTWP) on the RX channel is abnormal.
 The antenna line device (ALD) link does not work properly.
 License faults
 License installation fails.
 License modification fails.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 User Tracing Hu

o n
User tracing is a function that traces all messages of a user in sequence over
ti
standard and internal interfaces, traces internal status of the user equipment (UE),
a
ic
and displays the tracing results on the screen.
 Interface Tracing
r tif

C e
Interface tracing is a function that traces all messages within a period in sequence
&
on a standard or internal interface and displays them on the screen.
g
in is a function used to locate a fault by comparing the faulty component
 Comparison/Interchange
n
i fault symptom with a functional component or normal condition, respectively.
Comparison
a

T r or
ei Interchange
 is a function used to locate a fault by interchanging a possibly faulty
a w component with a functional component and comparing the running status before
Hu and after the interchange..

 Switchover/Reset
 Switchover helps identify whether the originally active equipment is faulty or
whether the active/standby relationship is normal.
 Reset is used to identify whether software running errors exist.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 If you need to contact Huawei technical support during troubleshooting, collect necessary information in
advance.
 General Fault Information
o n
 Name of the office
a ti
ic
Name and phone number of the contact person
ifoccurs

r
Time when the fault
t

e
Detailed description of the fault symptoms
C version of the equipment
& taken after the fault occurs and the result
 Host software

g
Measures
nSeverity level of the fault and the time required for rectifying the fault
i
nLocation
i

a
Fault Information
Tr One-click logs of the main control board


ei

One-click logs of baseband boards

w

u a  One-click logs of RRUs
H 

Alarm information
KPI data of the entire network
 Intelligent field test system (IFTS) tracing
 Cell drive test (DT) tracing
 SCTP link tracing
 Signaling tracing on interfaces
 eNodeB configuration information
 U2000 self-organizing network (SON) logs
 U2000 adaptation logs
 U2000 software module management logs

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Definition Hu

o n
When the eNodeB detects that a cell is unavailable due to a cell activation failure,
ti
the eNodeB reports an ALM-29240 Cell Unavailable alarm.
a
i c
if the problem is due to scenario-specific causes. These
 Cell unavailability means that all UEs in a cell cannot perform services. If only some
UEs cannot perform tservices,
r
e with the aid of signaling tracing, which is not described
C
causes can be found
herein.
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 A resource item is set to a value inconsistent with H uthe hardware or software configuration,
leading to cell setup failures.
Possible causes are listed as follows: io
n

Incorrect UL/DL sub-frame a

t

i f ic ratio or incorrect special sub-frame radio in TDD mode
rt configuration
 Incorrect cell power configuration

C e
Incorrect cell frequency

&
Incorrect cell preamble format configuration
g
Incorrect cell UL/DL cyclic prefix configuration
in cell bandwidth configuration

i n
Incorrect
r aIncorrect cell beam-forming algorithm switch configuration

T

ei Incorrect cell antenna mode configuration

 Incorrect cell operator information configuration
aw

Hu
 Incorrect CPRI line rate configuration
 Incorrect cell network-related configuration
 Fault Handling Procedure
1. Check whether there are related alarms. Handle them if there were.
2. If the fault isn’t rectified after step1, rectify the cell fault based on the MML
command outputs about cell activation failures.
3. If the fault persists, contact Huawei technical support.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 MML reference for power configuration: MOD H
u
PDSCHCFG
RS Power ＝ Total power per channel(dbm) n – 10lg(total subcarrier)+10lg(P + 1)
io
 b
a t
ic
r tif
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 HuCELL
MML reference for bandwidth configuration: MOD
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Fault Handling Procedure Hu
n
1. Check whether the S1 resources are unavailable, and handle the problem if there are the
o
following situation.
ati
ic
if
 Cell unavailability is due to S1 resource unavailability if any of the following
conditions is met:
r t

C e
In the output of the DSP CELL command, the value of Cell latest avail state
&
is Unavailable S1 link.
n g
ni
 In the output of the ACT CELL command, the following information is
ai
provided:Configuration data activating failed:Abnormal S1 link state for a
Tr
cell.
eihandle the alarm according to the help information of ALM-25888 SCTP Link Fault.
2. If the fault isn’t rectified after step 1, check whether there is an SCTP link alarm. If yes,
a w
Hu 3. If the fault isn’t rectified after step 2, check whether there are S1 interface fault alarms. If
yes, handle the alarms according to the help information of ALM-29201 S1 Interface
Fault.
4. If the fault persists after step 3, contact Huawei technical support.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Reason: Run the DSP S1INTERFACE MML command,Hu check the S1 interface status, found
that S1 interfaces were not configured.
o n
 Fault Handling
a ti
f ic S1 interfaces, the cell fault was rectified.
After OM personnel configured
ti

r
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Possible Causes Hu
 abnormal RF units
o n
 Abnormal baseband unit
a ti
ic
tif the main control board and RF units
 abnormal CPRI links

r
version mismatch between
e of CPRI line rates

C
unsuccessful negotiation

&
mismatch between RF networking and data configuration
Fault Handlingg
in whether there are alarms related to hardware, we can observe the
 Procedure
n
iindicators or use MML commands to query the status of the hardware. When on
1. Check
a
r site, we can replace the hardware, to locate the fault point, and then to solve the
T
ei
w
fault.
u a 2. If the fault wasn’t rectified after step1, check as the following step. DSP BRDVER
H (query the version of board), DSP CPRILBR (CPRI line rate negotiation, we can
modify negotiation rate by MOD RRUCHIAN), LST RRU (query whether the RF
networking and configuration data are matched, use MOD RRU to modify it),
whether there are breakpoints between RRU and BBU (use MOD RRUCHAIN to
restore breakpoints). Handle the problem if abnormal.
3. If the fault persists after step 2, contact Huawei technical support.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Fault Handling Hu

o n
After the fibers were reinstalled, the alarms were cleared and the cell was
successfully activated.
ati
ic
r t if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
n
1. Obtain the command output after the cell fails to be activated.
o
a
2. Rectify the cell fault according ti to the command output.
i f ic after step 2, contact Huawei technical support.
3. If the cell fault isn’t rectified
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Fault diagnose Hu

o n
According to the command output, the cell activation failure is caused by license
ti
limitation. The result of DSP LICENSE command indicates that the licensed number
a
of cells is 3.
ic
r tifactually configured according to the result of the LST CELL
However, four cells are
e

command.
C

& failure.
The configured number of cells exceeds the licensed number, which leads to the
g
in
cell activation

n
i a new license is applied for, downloaded, and activated, the cell is
Fault Handling
r a
T  After
ei successfully activated.
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
n
1. Check whether the board status is abnormal and whether the board versions are
o
ti
mismatched. Run the DSP BRD or DSP BRDVER for query. Pay more attention to RF
a
units.
ic
r tif after step 1, collect the logs of the faulty cell. The logs to
2. If the fault isn’t rectified
C e the logs of the main control board, LBBP, and RF unit.

be collected include
&
3. Determine whether restoration operations such as eNodeB or board resets can be
g
in
performed.
i n
a
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu
Typical alarm: ALM-26200 Board Hardware Fault
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
 LEDs on LMPT board
on
LED Color Status Description
i
at
Green ON The connection is successful.
c
it fi
SFP0 (LINK) OFF There is no connection.
and
SFP1 Orange ON
e r The port is receiving or transmitting signals.
(ACT) OFF C The port does not receive or transmit signals.
&
ng
Green ON The connection is successful.
n
(LINK) i OFF
ai
ETH, There is no connection.
r
FE/GE0,
T
FE/GE1 Yellow ON The port is receiving or transmitting signals.
ei(ACT) OFF The port does not receive or transmit signals.
a w
Hu ON There is power supply, but the board is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.
RUN Green
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board works properly.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s Software is being loaded to the board.
ON The board is reporting alarms.
ALM Red
OFF No alarm is generated.
ON The board is in active mode.
ACT Green
OFF The board is in standby mode.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu obtains the information about the
TRACERT is used to start route tracing. Route tracing
nICMP protocol.
gateways on the host-to-destination route by sending test packets on the route. It is
o
ti
realized by the different value of TTL and
a
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a data exchangeHu technology derived from the
traditional LAN.
o n
VLAN allows LAN devices to be logically
t i grouped into multiple network segments (that is,
aworkgroups. The hosts in different VLANs are separated

smaller LANs) to implement virtual

ic
r t if
from each other and they communicate with each other only through routers. A VLAN is a
C
broadcast domain, that is, ea host in a VLAN can receive the broadcast packets from the
The VLAN attaches&
other hosts in the same VLAN but cannot receive the broadcast packets from other VLANs.
(OAM) data n
g different labels to the operation, administration, and maintenance
n i and the traffic data. Thus, differentiated services can be provided. The VLAN
a i services of different priorities and security levels on the MAC layer.

also provides
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 If an alarm indicating an Ethernet link fault canH
u
be monitored among active alarms on the
n
eNodeB, IP physical layer faults possibly happen.
o
The possible causes are the Ethernet cable
t i or optical module has faults
a status.

ic
if
 Locate the fault based on the indicator
r t
Indicator Status
e Possible Fault Cause
Both green indicatorsCon the Port negotiation is successful and the ports
& are on. are up. This indicates that the physical layer
g
eNodeB and switch
i nindicator on the communication is normal.
i
The greenn The port on the local is up and the port on
localais on and the green
r the peer is down. The possible cause is that
T on the peer is off. the configuration is incorrect or the
ei indicator
w
hardware is faulty. Perform the following
u a steps to locate the fault.
H Both green indicators on the The negotiation has failed and the ports are
eNodeB and the switch are off. down. Perform the following steps to locate
the fault.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The Port Attribute indicates whether an Ethernet port isuan electrical port or optical port.

H
used, the port status should be down. n
 The port attribute can be set to AUTO. If the Port Attribute is set to Fiber, but an electrical port is
t io the same on the eNodeB and the switch.


c a
The Speed and Duplex mode must be configured
i
t i f port on the eNodeB can be set to AUTO only. If the GE
The Gigabit Ethernet (GE) electrical
r is used to connect to the switch, the port attribute must be set to

e
electrical port on the eNodeB
C and the switch.

AUTO on both the eNodeB
 Recommended parameter & settings
i ngType Rate and Duplex Mode Rate and Duplex Mode
i nPort
on the eNodeB on the Switch
a or optical port
FErelectrical
T
100M/FULL 100M/FULL
ei FEGE electrical or optical port AUTO/AUTO AUTO/AUTO
a w electrical port AUTO/AUTO AUTO/AUTO
Hu GE optical port 100M/FULL 100M/FULL

GE optical port AUTO/AUTO AUTO/AUTO
 The configurations on the switch can be checked by changing the parameter settings on the eNodeB.
Change both the rate and duplex mode to AUTO.
 If port negotiation succeeds after the change and the DSP ETHPORT command output is the
same as expected, the rate and duplex mode are both set to AUTO on the switch.
 If the port negotiation fails, the rate and duplex mode are not set to AUTO on the switch.
Analyze the possible configuration on the switch based on the DSP ETHPORT command output
and change the configuration on the eNodeB accordingly.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Handling procedure of isolating the fault. Hu

o n
Step 3.1. Connect a PC to the Ethernet port on the eNodeB and check whether the
alarm is cleared.
ati
ic
if
 Step 3.2. Connect a PC to the Ethernet port on the switch and check whether the
r
PC indicator is on. t

C e
Step 3.3. Identify and isolate the fault.
& is cleared and the PC indicator is off, the Ethernet port on the
If the alarm
ngswitch

i
is faulty, replace the switch.
a in IfeNodeB
 the alarm persists and the PC indicator is on, the Ethernet port on the
T r is faulty, run the RST ETHPORT and RST BRD commands to reset the
ei Ethernet port and the board, respectively. Check whether an alarm
aw
indicating a board chip fault is reported. If an alarm indicating a board chip
Hu
fault is reported, replace the board on which the Ethernet port is located.
 If the alarm is cleared and the PC indicator is on, the Ethernet ports on the
peer device and the eNodeB are not fully electrically compatible. Check the
parameters negotiated between the Ethernet ports on the switch and the
eNodeB.
 After all of the above 3 steps of IP physical layer troubeshooting, if the fault persists,
contact Huawei technical support.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu of the maximum transmission unit,
The data to be negotiated after RST ETHPORT consists
port rate, and duplex mode
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Possible causes of IP link layer faults Hu

o n
The Ethernet port negotiation mode is inconsistent between the eNodeB and the
peer device.
a ti
ic
if
 The virtual local area network (VLAN) is incorrectly configured.
 Fault diagnose
e rt
Check whetherCthe ARP and VLAN mechanisms work properly.
& transmitting an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP), Stream
Before
g

i n Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP), or User Datagram Protocol (UDP)
a in packet, the eNodeB queries the next-hop media access control (MAC)
T r address in the ARP table based on the IP route. The eNodeB transmits the
ei packet only if an ARP table is configured on the eNodeB. If no ARP table is
aw
configured, the eNodeB broadcasts an ARP request for the next-hop MAC
Hu
address.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) Introduction Hu

o n
Firstly, the eNodeB query the next hop MAC address (the corresponding ARP entry) based
on the IP route.
a ti
ic
With the ARP entry, the eNodeB sends the SCTP or UDP packets.
if the ARP entry, the eNodeB sends an ARP request broadcast


r t
If the eNodeB does not obtain
Ce
packet and ask for the next hop MAC address.
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei •The transmitting endpoints
need to send the data
a w packets, but the ARP entry
Hu is not available, then the

packet transfer flow is as
 Note:
shown in the left figure
 The ARP packet is the broadcast packet between two layer 2 communication nodes.
 If the layer 2 networking is adopted, the ARP request is sent to the nodes (eNodeB or EPC).
If the layer 3 networking is adopted, the ARP request is sent to the gateway.
 If the transmitting endpoint has the ARP entry, the ARP request packet is not transmitted.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 If Continuing Ping of PING is set to ENABLE, pressHuCtrl+Q to terminate the PING command
STR PORTREDIRECT can be used to check n whether the eNodeB has sent an ARP packet and
io

whether the packet is correct.

t
a on the onsite switch.
ic
tiisf 20 minutes on the eNodeB.
 (Optional step) Query the ARP information
The ARP aging period
r
Ce

 If the communication between the eNodeB and the peer device continues
only &for 20 minutes, the ARP update has failed after the aging.
i
ngIfcaused
the VLAN configuration is changed within the 20 minutes, the fault is
a in by an incorrect VLAN configuration.
T r If the VLAN configuration is not changed within the 20 minutes, the peer
ei

device must also be checked.
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 If VLAN group mode is used, the ARP messageH
u
type is OTHER.

n
If the VLAN information in the ARP message is correct, the eNodeB is normal. Confirm with
o port type of the peer device and the reason why
the customer the VLAN configuration iand
a t
the peer device does not respond.
ic
r tif

C eIP link layer faults troubleshooting, if the fault persists, contact
After the above 3 steps of
&
Huawei technical support.
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Fault Description Hu

o n
The peer device cannot be pinged and an IP address in the same network segment
ti
as the eNodeB can be pinged. Alarms indicating an SCTP link fault, cell
a
ic
unavailability, and a path fault are reported by the upper layer.
 Possible Causes
r t if

C e
The route configuration is incorrect or a related device is faulty.
& network is disconnected.

The transmission
ng


i
Fault Diagnose
a inmost cases, the cause is that routes are unavailable. If the ARP table and VLAN
In
r are normal, troubleshoot the fault as described in the part of “troubleshooting IP

T
ei layer faults”.
a w
Hu  LST IPRT is used to list the information about all the static IP routes
 DSP IPRT is used to query the information about all reachable IP routes

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 TRACERT is used to start route tracing. Route tracingHu obtains the information about the
running this command, you can checkiwhether o n the route is reachable and locate the
gateways on the host-to-destination route by sending test packets on the route. By
a t failure occurs.
position where a network connection
f c
iindicates

r t
In TRACERT packets, "*" i that the detection expires, "!" indicates that the
C e "!N" indicates that the network is unreachable, "!Y" indicates

port is unreachable,
& the source route fails, and "!H" indicates that the host is
that the IP address is unreachable, "!P" indicates the protocol is unavailable, "!S"
g
indicates that
in
unreachable.
n
a i can press Ctrl+Q to stop execution
r
 You
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 SCTP: Stream Control Transmission Protocol Hu
 IP: Internet Protocol
o n
 OM: operation and maintenance
ati
ic
if
rt

C e
The SCTP is a transmission protocol that works on the IP layer. The function of SCTP is
similar to that of the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and User Datagram Protocol
(UDP) that work on &the same layer as the SCTP. The latest standard to which the SCTP
n g for Comments (RFC) 2960 released in October 2000.
i
conforms is Request
Compared
i nwith the TCP, the SCTP is improved for specific applications. In addition,
a

T r features are added to the SCTP. The SCTP is now widely used in radio
multiple
i
ecommunications, multimedia, and QoS.
a w
 The OM channel is used for remote maintenance of eNodeBs. An OM channel is set up
Hu using TCP handshakes.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP)
u is unavailable or available only in one
Hlink
direction.
o n
After sending data to the peeridevice,

t the sender does not receive a response from
athe sender does not receive data from the peer device.
ic
the peer device. In addition,
f
The SCTP link is abnormal. ti

r

Ce or intermittently disconnected.
The SCTP link is faulty
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w

u
Ensure that the MME parameters configured onHthe eNodeB are consistent with the SCTP
n
parameters of the MME and that eNodeB parameters configured on the EPC are consistent
o
ti as the first peer IP address, the second peer IP
with the SCTP parameters of the eNodeB.
a
 On the eNodeB, parameters
f ic homing), and peer port number configured on the
address (used in SCTPidual
such
eNodeB must be e rt with those configured on the MME.

C
consistent

&
On the MME, check whether the peer port number configured on the MME is the
g
same as the local port number configured on the eNodeB and whether a correct
n in segment is configured.
network
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 If an SCTP link is intermittently interrupted, theH
u
eNodeB cannot receive a response from the
n recovers.
peer device and then the SCTP link is down. After several seconds, the eNodeB initiates
o
SCTP link reestablishment and the SCTP
a ti link
i f ic
 QoS: Quality of Service
r t

C e
Step 2. Check the QoS of signaling data.
& checking
DSCP configuration
ngRun

i the LST DIFPRI command to query the DSCP value for signaling data.
a in Check whether the DSCP value is 46 in the QoS configuration for the
T r transmission network. Ensure that data with a DSCP value of 46 can be
ei properly transmitted in the transmission network.
a w  If the transport network bandwidth is limited and the DSCP value for SCTP
Hu services is less than that for other types of services, the SCTP link will be
intermittently interrupted. Therefore, check whether SCTP services has a
high DSCP-indicated priority in the transmission network with the
customer.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 GE: Gigabit Ethernet Hu
 FE: Fast Ethernet
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 QCIs: QoS Class Identifiers Hu
o n
ati
ic
r tif
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Check user-plane parameters: Hu

o n
For link mode:LST IPPATH:;check the local IP and peer IP

a ti LST USERPLANEPEER:;
For EP mode:LST USERPLANEHOST:;
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) is
u through the ping command to check
Hused
nIf the response message is not received within a
the network connection. An ICMP echo request message is sent to a specific host to
o
request an ICMP echo response message. i
tmessage
i
specified time, the Host unreachable
c a is displayed on the screen.
 The Host unreachable message
r tifis displayed in the following cases:
The specified hosteis invalid.

C

&
The physical connection of the network is not secure.
g
ithen causes, run the ping command to connect to other hosts in the same
 The two communicating hosts do not support the same communication protocol.
n
isegment. If the ping command is successful, then the connection is functional. In
To analyze
a

T r
network
i
ethe
this case, check the physical connection and the operational status of the specified host. If
a w ping command fails, check whether the physical network connection of the current
Hu host is secure.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Free Running Hu

o n
When there are no available reference clocks after the crystal oscillator is warmed
ti
up or when reference clocks for the network become unavailable and its duration
a
ic
reaches the threshold specified by the holdover mode, the clock enters the free
t f TDD eNodeB can normally work for 8 hours.

running mode. In this icase,
r
The clock transitsefrom the free running mode to another mode when the eNodeB

C
&
obtains and locks reference clocks again.
Fast Trackingg
inthe eNodeB obtains reference clocks or when reference clocks become

i n
When
a

T r tracking mode.
available but the phase offset reaches the threshold, the clock enters the fast
ei In this mode, reference clocks become unavailable, and the clock enters the free
aw

Hu
running mode. When the frequency offset of reference clocks is less than the
traceable threshold but reaches the locked threshold, the clock remains in fast
tracking mode. When the frequency offset of reference clocks is less than the
locked threshold, the clock enters the locked mode.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The clock status can be checked by running theH
u
DSP CLKSTAT command.
The value of Current Clock Sourcenindicates an unknown status.
io State indicates that the reference clock is


t
areference clock is lost.
The value of Current Clock Source
ic
tifindicates that the PLL status is abnormal, for example, the
abnormal, for example, the

r
The value of PLL Status
reference clock isein free-run mode or there is excessive frequency deviation.
C
The value &of Clock Synchronization Mode indicates that the clock synchronization
mode isgnot set to a specified mode.

n inperform a manual clock test by below steps:


a i
We also can
T rStep 1. Start a clock quality test by running the STR CLKTST command.
ei Step 2. Several hours later, stop the clock quality check by running the STP CLKTST
a w command.
Hu Step 3. Check the clock quality test result by running the DSP CLKTST command.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu
MML commands for adding different clock sources
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Clock Source State Hu

o n
The link available status (Link Available State) of a reference clock can be checked by
ti
running a command such as DSP IPCLKLINK, DSP SYNCETH, or DSP TOD.
a
ic
The value of Clock Source State is Available when the external reference clock of the
if

t
eNodeB meets either of the following conditions:
r

Ce
The physical connection for non-IP clock between the reference clock and the
eNodeB is normal, or the route for IP clock from the eNodeB to the IP clock server
&is correct.
g
n The eNodeB can properly receive clock signals sent by the reference clock.
Ifin
i 
ra
 the clock source state or the link available state is unavailable,
i T Check whether the physical connection and communication are normal between
e the eNodeB and the clock source. For the GPS, the number of satellites must be
a w greater than or equal to 4, which can be checked by DSP GPS.
Hu  Check whether the eNodeB can properly receive clock signals. For a non-IP clock,
clock signals are generated at the physical layer, and therefore you can check only
on the equipment that sends the clock signals whether they are correctly sent. For
an IP clock, you can check whether clock packets are correctly received by
performing a trace task on the U2000 or by analyzing packet headers on the
nearest transmission equipment. The clock source state and link available state of
an IP clock can be determined based on the characteristics of received clock
packets. For details about the analysis, see the PTP clock packet analysis procedure
in the next step.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Check for packet loss Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 SeGW: Security GateWay Hu
 IKE: Internet Key Exchange
o n
ati
ic
if
 IKE negotiation failure: An IKE security association (SA) fails to be set up between the
eNodeB and the SeGW.
e rt
 C The IKE SA between the eNodeB and the SeGW is normal, but
IPSec tunnel setup failure:
&by the IKE SA fails to be set up.
the IPSec SA carried
n g failure: A digital certificate fails to be obtained due to an IKE


i
Certificate application
in failure.
negotiation
a
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Related Alarms Hu
 ALM-26841 Certificate Invalid
o n
ALM-25891 IKE Negotiation t i
a
 Failure
i f
ALM-25880 Ethernet LinkicFault
rt Optical Interface Performance Degraded

C e
ALM-26223 Transmission
ALM-26222 Transmission Optical Interface Error
&Transmission Optical Module Fault

g
ALM-26220
n in Remote Maintenance Link Failure

ALM-25901
i

r a
ALM-25888 SCTP Link Fault
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

u
Transmission security faults are generally due toHdata configuration. Therefore, data
n
consistency check between the eNodeB and the SeGW is crucial to troubleshooting.
o
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Run the ADD IPSECBIND command, and specifyH
u
values for the mandatory parameters such
n LST IPSECPOLICY command.

as the slot No., subboard type, port type, port No., and IPSec policy group name. To learn
o
about the IPSec policy group name, run
a ti the
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 In the output of DSP TRUSTCERT command. Check Huwhether the name of the root certificate
n command to download the root
is correct and whether the root certificate has expired. If the root certificate is incorrect,
o
apply for a new one. Then, run the DLD
a ti command to add the root certificate to the
CERTFILE
ic
certificate, and run the ADD TRUSTCERT
i f
rt command. Check whether the issuer of the root certificate is
eNodeB.
 e
C root certificate has expired. If the device certificate is incorrect,
In the output of DSP CERTMK
& Then, run the DLD CERTFILE command to download the device
correct and whether the
g
apply for a new one.
n run the ADD CERTMK command to add the device certificate to the
eNodeB.i n i
certificate, and
r a
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu command to change it.
If a used certificate is incorrect, run the MOD APPCERT
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Step 9. If the transmission security fault persists,
u Huawei technical support.
Hcontact
 Before contacting Huawei technical n support, collect configuration files,
o certificate, intermediate certificate, device
certificate files (including theiroot
t
aLogs.
ic
certificate files), and board
r tif information transmitted between the eNodeB and the

If possible, collect header
Ce

SeGW during negotiation.
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The eNodeB considered the encrypted notification Humessages invalid and therefore
discarded these messages.
o n
 Fault Handling
a ti
This fault was due to the c

f i configuration on the peer equipment. After the message
i peer equipment was modified, the fault was rectified.
transmission rule on tthe
r
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 RF: Radio Frequency Hu

o n
Generally, RF unit faults are indicated by alarms. Therefore, this chapter describes how to
ti
troubleshoot RF unit faults based on reported alarms.
a
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 During a VSWR test on a radio frequency (RF) unit, Hupower of the RF unit is first coupled as
n The difference between the measured
forward power and backward power by using directional couplers, and then they are
o
tisi the return loss, which can be converted to a VSWR
measured by using standing-wave detectors.
a
forward power and backward power
f c VSWR value is used to determine whether a VSWR
iThe
rt
value by using related formulas.i
alarm is reported.
e
CRF unit by high or total reflected power, the VSWR alarm post-
processing switch &
 To avoid the damage to
g must be turned on for a remote radio unit (RRU) to be added. In this

n VSWR alarm is generated, the RRU automatically shuts down the faulty
n i
way, if a major
transmiti(TX) channels and then does not provide output power. In this scenario, the cell
r aby the RRU degrades the capacity or becomes unavailable. The cell coverage and
T
served
i
eperformance also deteriorate.
a w NOTE
u

H  If a major VSWR alarm is generated, the faulty TX channels are automatically shut down. If
you have rectified the related faults, you can run the STR VSWRTEST command or manually
modify the TX channel configuration to open the TX channels. However, the VSWR alarm
still exists. It will be cleared only after the RRU is reset.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H
PIM interference is induced by non-linearity of the passive
u components in the TX system. The
nis also two signals without any additional frequency
antenna non-linearity is indicated by the intermodulation (IM) suppression degree. For a linear
o
ti input is two signals, new frequency components are
system, if the input is two signals, the output
a
c the output, and then the output is more than two signals.
component. For a non-linear system, if the
generated in the system and addedito
i f
The added frequency components
e rtIM.areIf the
known as the IM products. The process of generating
C
frequency components is called IM products work on frequencies within the receive (RX)
& is generated. In a high-power and multi-channel system, nonlinearity of

frequency band and accordingly increase the uplink interference or received total wideband power
g
(RTWP), IM interference
frequencyin
in
the passive components generates high-order IM products. These IM products and the operating
a and affects the normal communication.

are mixed to form a group of new frequencies, and accordingly a group of useless spectra
T r
is generated
 i
ecomponents are generated, such as two IM3 components operating on the frequencies of (2 x f1 -
In a linear system, assume that the two input signals work on the frequencies of f1 and f2. Then, IM
a w
Hu f2) and (2 x f2 - f1), and two IM5 components operating on the frequencies of (3 x f1 – 2 x f2) and
(3 x f2 - 2 x f1). As shown in the figure, the input signals and IM components are marked in green
and red, respectively. The IM order of an IM component (m x f2 - n x f1) is the sum of m and n.
These IM components are generated symmetrically on the left and right of the wanted signals. Their
intervals depend on the IM orders and the maximum frequency spacing (or bandwidth) of the input
signals. A higher IM order leads to a lower amplitude for the IM components and a further distance
from the wanted signals, and therefore a smaller impact.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The generating mechanism of PIM interference is complicated.
H u
n signal may generate frequency components, and this
 Generally, PIM interference exists when multiple frequency components are generated. However, in a
o
ti components are also IM products. Moreover, in a
non-linear system, a single amplitude-modulated
scenario with improper connections,a

leads to spectrum expansion. These frequency
i f ic even continuous wave (CW) signals generate frequency
rt
components.
 All passive components encounter

e
C intermodulation distortion that may be caused by unreliable mechanical
&
contacts, poor soldering, or oxidization.
g
Passive components such as combiners, duplexers, and filters require specific IM suppression degrees. If the IM
in ancables

suppression degree of IM order meets the requirements, the IM products have no impact on the system
n
i degrees can reduce
a
performance. Generally, do not have requirements for PIM suppression degrees. A cable requiring high
r
PIM suppression PIM interference, but it is too expensive to be used widely.
Tan improper connection is not definitely coupled with the PIM interference. If an RF unit is

i
Note that
eto insufficient
w
properly connected with the antenna system, high-power IM components may also be generated
adue PIM suppression degrees of the cables.

u If the IM components work on frequencies within the RX frequency band, this increases the noise floor of the
H

RX channels and decreases the sensitivity of the RF unit. For a FDD system, frequency bands such as
800MHz and 700MHz have small duplex spacing (spacing between the DL frequency and the UL
frequency). The IM3 and IM5 products of the TX signals are easily to work on frequencies within the
RX frequency band. In this scenario, the impact of PIM interference must be paid special attention.
 To sum up, the generating conditions for PIM interference are as follows:
 The input is TX signals of the eNodeB, or occasionally external interference signals transmitted
through the antenna. The media is cables or passive components such as duplexers and antennas.
The output is IM products. The power of the IM components depends on the IM suppression degree
of the passive components or cables.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu interference generated by the interference
Spurious emission interference refers to the additive
n power leakage of the interference source,

source on the working frequency band of the receiver that is interfered with. Spurious
o
tiintermodulation signals, and reduces the signal noise
emission interference includes the out-of-band
a
c
ratio (SNR) of the receiver thatifisi interfered with.
amplified noise floor, and transmitting
A receiver usually works e

t
atra linear area. When a receiver receives strong signals, it works in
non-linear mode or in C

&
a saturation state in some cases. This is called blocking interference.
ng the receiver works in saturation state and then gains are reduced. In
Generally, blocking interference is caused by a strong interfering signal out of the receive
i
band. As a result,
addition,in
a the interfering signal may mix with the local oscillator signal and then cause the
r in the IF. Moreover, the out-of-band suppression ratio of the receiver may be
T
interference
i so that the interference is generated directly. Blocking interference can reduce the
elimited,
a w receiver gains and increase the noise.
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 RCU: Remote Control Unit Hu

o n
Each RCU consists of a driving motor, control circuit, and drive structure. The driving motor
ti
is usually a digitally controlled step motor. The control circuit communicates with the
a
ic
controller and controls the driving motor. The drive structure contains a gear that meshes
f of the driving motor, the gear moves to transmit
with a pulling bar. Under the icontrol
r t
motion to the pulling bar,eand accordingly the tilt angle of the antenna can be adjusted.
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Huall output power is reflected back
If the VSWR value is greater than 10, it means that
n
because no feeder is connected to the related antenna port or the related feeder is bent or
o
damaged.
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 NOTE Hu

o n
The execution of the STR VSWRTEST command interrupts services carried by the RF
unit.
ati
ic
if
 TIP
r t
It is recommended to pick multiple frequencies within the operating frequency
e

C
range supported by the cell as the test frequencies, and repeat the STR VSWRTEST.
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 If the two values are significantly different, runH
u
the STR VSWRTEST command to perform
n
VSWR tests on a frequency point at an interval of 1 MHz or smaller within the bandwidth
range to compare tested VSWR values.io
a t feeder between the RF unit and the antenna system
 If the values are the same,
i f ic and accordingly the queried VSWR values are not
the
t the feeder connection at the local end. Then, go to step

rcheck
may be insecurely connected
C e
stable. In this case,
&
5.

g
If some of the values are large, a hardware fault may occur in the RF unit. Save the
n and submit the results together with one-click log files of the main
testiresults
n
i board and RF unit to Huawei technical support for further analysis.
r a control
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu feeders, jumpers, combiner-dividers,
The components of antenna system include antennas,
n
filters, and tower-mounted amplifiers (TMAs).
o
a ti
If the feeder connection is normalcafter the above 5 steps, contact Huawei technical

t i fi
support.
e r
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 PIM has a typical characteristic: The level of theH
u
intermodulation products increases with
n
the transmit power. Using this typical characteristic, the existence of PIM interference can
o
t
be determined. If the uplink interferencei increases significantly with the transmit power,
PIM interference exists. Otherwise,aPIM interference does not exist. You can increase the
i f ic simulated load, and then compare the received
rt values before and after the simulated load is added.
transmit power by adding a downlink
e
signal strength indicator (RSSI)
C
&
 Step 2.1 Note:
g
The simulated load and transmit power have a positive correlation with the value
inSimLoadCfgIndex parameter.

n
of the
a i that load simulation is mainly used in interference tests. You are advised not
T r to use load simulation for a cell with more than six active UEs. Otherwise, the
 Note
ei scheduling performance cannot be ensured.

a w
Hu  Step 2.2 Note:
 To create an RSSI tracing task, choose Monitor > Signaling Trace > Signaling
Trace Management from the main menu on the U2000 client. In the left
navigation tree, choose LTE > Cell Performance Monitoring > Interference
RSSI Statistic Detect Monitoring. Then, click New in the right pane. An RSSI
tracing task is created.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 By using breakpoints, divide the cable connecting Huthe RF unit top to the antenna port into
nthe antenna port. Each time the cable is
several segments by using breakpoints. Disconnect the cable at the breakpoints one by one
o
along the direction from the RF unit top
a tithe breakpoint to a matched load or a low
to
ica downlink simulated load, and check whether the RTWP

disconnected at a breakpoint, connect
intermodulation attenuator, add
t i f
values increase. Ensure therinserted attenuator has low intermodulation interference so
e
C PIM interference to the cable. If the RTWP values increase,
that it will not add additional
PIM interference is&
g
introduced by the device or cable before this breakpoint.
i n is caused by the RF unit, replace the RF unit. If the interference is caused

If the interference
n

a i replace the cable and then check whether the interference still exists. If the
by the cable,
T r is removed, no further action is required.

interference
eIfi the interference persists, check whether the interference exists in the antenna.
w

u a
H

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Description of crossed pair connection Hu

o n
RF channels in an RF unit must be used by the same sector except in MIMO
ti
mutual-aid scenarios. The purpose is to ensure the consistency between the
a
i c
direction and coverage of an antenna so that balanced RTWP values are obtained.
r t
If the RF channels of anif RF unit are used by different sectors, the RF unit will have
C e Note that the ALM-26522 RF Unit RX Channel
different RTWP values.
&different between two cells with a crossed pair connection.

RTWP/RSSI Unbalanced alarm is reported only when the number of UEs is
g
significantly
n intests and trace signaling without interrupting the services.

Perform drive
i a phone call in a cell (for example, cell 1). Check whether the UE accesses cell

a
r 1, where the UE is located. If the UE accesses another cell (for example, cell 3), the
Make
T

ei antennas of cells 1 and 3 are cross-connected.

a w
Hu  Run the STR CROSFEEDTST command to start the a crossed pair connection test.
 The Crossed value of RESULT appears in pairs. If RESULT is Crossed for two
sectors, a cross pair connection exists between the two sectors. Detailed
information about the sectors with a crossed pair connection is displayed in the
detection result.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 ALD-related alarm: Hu

o n
ALM-26530 RF Unit ALD Current Out of Range
ALM-26541 ALD Maintenance
a tiLink Failure
i
ALM-26751 RET Antenna
f icMotor Fault
rt Data Loss


e
ALM-26754 RET Antenna
CAntenna Running Data and Configuration Mismatch
ALM-26757 RET
&ALD Hardware Fault

g
ALM-26752
n in RET Antenna Not Calibrated

ALM-26753
i

r a
ALM-26531 RF Unit ALD Switch Configuration Mismatch
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The service segment is a unique part describingH
u
product version information. A service
o n attributes:
segment is determined by "product name+ESN+version". ESN is short for electronic serial
number. The service segment has the ifollowing
a t
i f ic
e rt
C
&
n g
n i

a i segment is a collection of resource items and function items, which have the
The feature
samerauthorization attributes. The feature segment is determined by "product
i T
ename+feature segment name+Esn". A feature segment has the following attributes:
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Default State Hu

o n
An eNodeB enters the default license state if no valid license key is installed on the
ti
eNodeB. In the default license state, an eNodeB operates with the minimum
a
ic
resource and function items: a maximum of six users, traffic rate of 5 Mbit/s, and
r tif items.
disabled optional function
 Protected State
C e

&fails or the feature has passed the expiration date but stays in the
In the protected state, the feature is limited because the correctness verification of
g
in days. In the protected state, resource and function items on a feature
the license
i n
reserving
r asegment can still be available within the keep-alive period (60 days by default).
i T State
Demo
e

aw
 An eNodeB enters a demo license state when a demo license file is installed. A
Hu
demo license is valid within six months, its resource items are set to the maximum
values, and its function items are all enabled. All feature segments in a demo
license have the same expiration duration. When a feature segment expires in the
demo license, the eNodeB transits from the demo license state to the protected
license state. The eNodeB can stay in the protected license state for a maximum of
60 days. After the 60 days have elapsed, the eNodeB enters the default license
state.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 A license is an authorization agreement between Htheu supplier and the operator on the use
n
of products. It defines the product features, versions, capacity, validity period, and
o
application scope.
a tidetermine the network functions and capacity at a

ic
Operators can purchase the license to
specific stage, maximizing theifreturn on investment.
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

Hulicense. The check items are as follows:
During license installation, the eNodeB checks the

o n on full-text signature, Service field signature,

Integrity check: Whether the product name in the license file matches the
ti
software name; whether the checks
a
ic the equipment serial number (ESN) in the Service field
and feature signature are successful.
t
Accuracy check: Whether i f
matches the ESN ofrthe equipment; whether the VR version number in the Service

e
C VR version of the software.
field matches the
& check: Whether the license for the feature exceeds the validity
Validity period
g

in
date; whether the license for the feature exceeds the validity date and protection
i n
period.
r a
T
 Difference check: Differences between new and old license files, including
ei items are reduced or lost, and whether the validity period for the feature becomes
whether any function items in the new license files are lost, whether any resource
a w
Hu 
short.
If the license check fails, the subsequent processing is as follows:
 If the integrity check fails, the license file installation fails.
 If the accuracy check fails (the ESNs or the VR versions do not match), users need
to confirm whether to continue with the installation. If users choose to continue
with the installation, the feature defined in the license file can run in trial mode for
60 days. After 60 days, the feature enters the default mode. The license file with
the same errors cannot be installed repeatedly.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Licensed Feature Entering Keep-Alive Period Hu

o n
This alarm is generated when the licensed feature exceeds the validity date. You can run
ti
the DSP LICENSE command to check the license control items that exceed the validity
a
c
date. After the licensed feature exceeds the validity date, the feature enters the keep-alive
i
tif
period of 60 days (the keep-alive period is not affected by the system time jumping). During
r
e
the keep-alive period, the expired feature operates in the current license settings. After the
C
keep-alive period, the expired feature operates in the default license settings.

&
Licensed Feature Unusable
ng
ni
 This alarm is generated when the licensed feature exceeds the keep-alive period.

i
License on Trial
aThis alarm is generated when a license file enters the keep-alive period. The possible causes
T r
ei
are as follows:
aw
 The license file exceeds the validity date.
Hu
 The license file is revoked.
 The ESN in the license file is inconsistent with the actual ESN of the eNodeB.
 The eNodeB version in the license file is inconsistent with the running version of the
eNodeB.
 The ESN and eNodeB version in the license file are inconsistent with the actual ESN
and the running version of the eNodeB.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w

H
License control items are classified into resource items and ufunction items. The DSP LICENSE command
can be used to list all the control items on the maintenance console.
o n exceeds 1. Operators determine the number of

ti theynumber
 The allocated value for a resource item generally
a
resource items in the commercial license purchase based on the site requirements. Typical
i c
resource items include the cell bandwidth, of accessed users, and number of cells.

tif values
The function items are assigned
The typical function itemsrinclude
of 0 or 1 to indicate whether the functions are purchased.
C e
802.1X-based access control.
enhanced synchronization (clock synchronization), IPSec, and IEEE

&
Common License control item description
g
Power: RF Output Power (per 20W) (FDD)
n power license controls the total required power of RF modules in an eNodeB. Each RF
iThe

n
i module

r a provides 20 W power by default. Extra power must be purchased in units of 20 W.
T If the eNodeB operates in default license mode, the licensed power is 0 W by default.
ei
 Bandwidth: Carrier Bandwidth (per 5MHz) (FDD)
a w  The bandwidth license controls the total required bandwidth of an eNodeB. In the LTE
Hu
system, bandwidth of each carrier is scalable. It can be 1.4 MHz, 3 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz,
15 MHz, or 20 MHz. Bandwidth is purchased in units of 5 MHz.
 CSFB control item
 The control items for UTRAN, GERAN, and CDMA control the CSFB function for these three
RATs, including LLT1CFBU01: CSFB to UTRAN; LLT1CFBG01: CSFB to GERAN; and
LLT1CFBR01: CSFB (FDD) to CDMA2000 1xRTT
 eNodeB throughput: Throughput Capacity (per Mbps)
 This control item specifies the total licensed throughput of the eNodeB, which includes the
uplink and downlink throughput. Users can run the MOD LICRATIO command to specify the
proportion of licensed uplink throughput to the total licensed throughput.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

eNodeB LTE V100R012C10 TOP Alarm P-0
Analysis and Handling
n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
ng
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u
华为技术有限公司版权所有未经许可不得扩散

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
r tif
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
r tif
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
r tif
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
r tif
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
ng
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu or when exceptions occur on key
Alarms are generated when faults occur on devices

n
functions, such as a board fault. Alarms can be cleared. Alarms are more severe than
o
events.
t i
Events are occasionally generated

c awhen the equipment is running. They indicate only
i at a certain point in time. The system generates
i f
some events periodically rtot notify you of the equipment status. They do not need
the status of the running equipment
manual handling. Ce
The differences & between an alarm and an event are described as follows:
g is a special type of event. If the U2000 raises an alarm, it indicates


i n
An alarm
i nthat a fault has occurred on the U2000 or its managed object. The fault must
r a be rectified as soon as possible. Otherwise, the U2000 services cannot run
i T properly because the fault could affect the functions of the U2000 or its
e
a w devices.
H u  An event indicates that the status of a managed object changes. The change
may not affect services of the U2000.
 For example, Central Processing Unit (CPU) busy, hard disk failure, or network cable
disconnection are alarms.
 For example, successfully exporting periodic operation logs is an event.

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
 NOTE: Hu

n
You can search the database on how to clear alarms.
tio
 Alarms may be cleared when you switch from the alarm query page to
ic a
another page. After you switch back to the original page, alarms will be
if
refreshed and the cleared alarms will not be displayed in the page.
r t
Ce
&
ng
i ni
r a
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
r tif
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
 Alarm severity : Hu
 Critical
o n
i
The device or resource tmay be no longer available. The fault must be
a

removed immediately.
ic
 Major
r tif
The Qualityeof Service (QoS) of the device or resource decreases

C
&
greatly. Proper measures must be taken to recover the service.
Minor g
inThe QoS of the device or resource decreases slightly. Proper measures

n
i must be taken or further observation need to be done to avoid more
a

T r
i
severe faults.
e
aw
 Warning
Hu
 The QoS of the device or resource may be affected. Proper measures
must be taken.

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
H
In application style, after right click on the NE

u
icon and select “current alarm” or
n
“alarm logs”, to query the alarm result.
it o
ic a
r tif
Ce
&
g
nin
a i
T r
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
ng
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
u to the local maintenance terminal
(LMT) are displayed on the Browse Alarm/EventH
Normal alarms, events, and engineering alarms reported

tab page in real time. You can view the
n
detailed information about alarms and events to determine the real-time running status of the
it o
system.
a Alarm/Event.
Procedure

ic
In the LMT main window, click In the displayed Alarm/Event window,
tif and Engineering Alarm tab pages.


click the Browse Alarm/Event tab. The Browse Alarm/Event tab page contains
View the alarm or r

Normal Alarm, Event,


C
To view detailed
einformation about an alarm, double-click the alarm record.
event information on the Browse Alarm/Event tab page.

& Information dialog box, click Solution to query the description,
The Detailed Information dialog box is displayed.

g
In the Detailed
n impact on the system, system actions, possible causes, and handling
i
parameters,
inquery
procedure.

r a
You can the historical alarms or events from the alarm or event logs to determine the
T
previous running status of the equipment.
ei
Procedure

In the LMT main window, click Alarm/Event, and then click the Query Alarm/Event
w

Log tab in the Alarm/Event window. The Query Alarm/Event Log tab page is
u a displayed.
H
 Set the search criteria as required.
 Click Query. The query results are displayed in the Result area.
 To view the detailed information about an alarm or event, double-click the alarm or
event record.
 The Detailed Information dialog box is displayed.
 In the Detailed Information dialog box, click Solution to query the description,
parameters, impact on the system, system actions, possible causes, and handling
procedure.
 Click Close to exit the dialog box.

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
ng
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
ng
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Antenna alarm includes RRU, CPRI Port, RRU H

u
Path alarm.
n
Every kind of alarm may cause Cell Unavailable alarm, Cell Capability Degraded alarm,

etc.
it o
ic a
r tif
Ce
&
g
nin
a i
T r
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
ng
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
ng
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
ng
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
 System Actions Hu

n
In ring topology, the lower-level RF units automatically switch to the normal
tio
link.
ic a
r tif
Ce
&
ng
i ni
r a
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
r tif
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
 Check for the root alarms on the U2000： Hu

n
26506 RF Unit Optical Interface Performance Degraded
tio
 26540 RF Unit AC Input Power Failure

c a
26501 RF Unit Optical Module or Electrical Port Not Ready
i

tif
26507 RF Unit Optical Module Fault
r

 Ce
26230 BBU CPRI Optical Module Fault
26320 BBU IR Optical Module Fault
&
26503 RF Unit Optical Module Transmit/Receive Fault
ng

i ni
r a
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
r tif
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
ng
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
 System Actions Hu

n
The RF unit automatically resets after being disconnected from the BBU for 10
tio
minutes. If this alarm is not cleared after three consecutive resets, the RF unit
ic a
automatically resets through power-off.
r t if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
r a
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
r tif
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
r tif
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
ng
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
VSWR: Voltage Standing Wave Ratio. The VSWR

H uat the antenna port is calculated
n
based on the sampled forward power and reverse power.
System Action

When the detected VSWR t

i o

c
not handle the alarm. iThe
aalarm
exceeds the minor alarm threshold, the system does
i f is automatically cleared when the detected

t than the alarm threshold.
VSWR becomes less
r
Ce to switch off the TX channel of the RF unit based on the
When the detected VSWR exceeds the major alarm threshold, the system
determines whether
&
actual configurations. When the VSWR alarm post-processing switch is set to
ON, g
i nthe TX channel of the RF unit is switched off and the alarm cannot be
inOFF, the power of the RF unit is automatically decreased (by 3 dB by default.

automatically cleared. When the VSWR alarm post-processing switch is set to
a
r The specific value depends on service status.) to avoid hardware damage.
T
ei Once the detected VSWR becomes less than the alarm threshold, the alarm is
a w automatically cleared.
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
r tif
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Preprocessing of recording alarm informationH

u
1. related data configuration

Query the VSWR threshold ofo

n
i
Procedure Items to Be Confirmed
t information
 the RRU by the command of LST RRU to check
On the U2000, record
whether thethe
VSWRfollowing
c athreshold
alarm alarm
plan. i"Location
to
is appropriately set basedinformation
All alarm on the
facilitate subsequent
configurationprocessing:
t i fthreshold Information",
has been correctly
r
"Equipment Alarm
If not, setSerial Number",
the VSWR and "Last Occurrence
of the RRU by the MML command MOD RRU.
e by the MML command RST BRDPWROFF
 recorded.
Time".
C
2. reset the RF unit remotely

&
3. contact and assist onsite engineer

g
obtain the inventory information of the board related to the alarm, and
in it to on-site engineers

provide
i n
r a
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
r tif
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
ng
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
 System Action Hu
 None
n
atio
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
r a
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
 0. Root alarms for SCTP link fault Hu
 25880 Ethernet Link Fault
n
tio
 25881 MAC Excessive Frame Error Rate

c a
25887 Ethernet Trunk Link Fault
i

tif
25895 Ethernet Trunk Group Fault
r

 Ce
25891 IKE Negotiation Failure
26832 Peer Certificate Expiry
&
26841 Certificate Invalid
ng

ni
 26831 802.1x Authentication Failure
a i
 26842 Automatic Certificate Update Failed
T r  25860 PPP/MLPPP Link Fault
ei
 25861 MLPPP Group Fault
a w  25862 MLPPP Group Excessive Packet Loss Rate
H u 
 25863 PPP Link Excessive Frame Error Rate
1. Related data configuration to be checked
 the SCTP link configuration by the MML command LST SCTPLNK, or LST
SCTPLNK6
 the IP route configuration by the the MML command DSP IPRT, or DSP IPRT6

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
ng
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
 X2AP: X2 Application Protocol Hu

n
SCTP: Stream Control Transmission Protocol
tio
 ICIC: Inter-Cell Interference Coordination
 System Action
ic a

t if
The X2 interface setup procedure is initiated again if the X2 interface setup
r
e
procedure fails.
C
&
ng
i ni
r a
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
r tif
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
 0. Root alarms for X2 interface fault
 25888 SCTP Link Fault
n
tio
 25889 SCTP Link Congestion
25880 Ethernet Link Fault
a

ic
if
 26221 Transmission Optical Module Not In Position

r t
26223 Transmission Optical Interface Performance Degraded

Ce
26220 Transmission Optical Module Fault
&
 26222 Transmission Optical Interface Error
ng
 1. Related data configuration to be checked
ni
a. Check the X2 interface by the MML command DSP X2INTERFACE.
a i
b. Check whether there is a cell in the local base station in normal status by the
T r MML command DSP CELL
ei c. Check whether the S1 interface of the local base station is blocked by the MML
a w command DSP S1INTERFACE.
H u d. Check whether the peer base station is configured with the X2 interface.
e. Check whether there is a cell in the peer base station in normal status.
f. Check whether the local base station is blacklisted by the peer base station by
the MML command LST X2BLACKWHITELIST, and RMV X2BLACKWHITELIST, if
the local base station is blacklisted.
g. Check whether the S1 interface of the peer base station is blocked.
h. Delete and reconfigure the X2 interface by the MML command RMV
X2INTERFACE and ADD X2INTERFACE.

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
ng
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
 Description Hu

n
The cell status is dependent on physical resources such as baseband resources,
tio
RF resources, CPRI resources, and transmission resources, and also license
ic a
resources. When the physical resources are insufficient, faulty, or blocked, a
if
cell becomes unavailable due to physical resource unavailability. When the
r t
physical resources are available, a cell can also be unavailable due to license
Ce
resource insufficiency. This alarm is reported when a cell is unavailable for 90
seconds (default value) continuously. This alarm is cleared when the cell
&
becomes available again and stays available for 15 seconds (default value). The
ng
cell unavailable duration and cell available duration for reporting and clearing
ni
this alarm, respectively, can be set by running the SET ALMFILTER command.
a i
System Actions
r

T If the transmit/receive channel of the RRU is faulty, the cell is reestablished
ei

with resource derating.
a w  If the physical link between the RF unit serving the cell and the upper-level RF
H u unit or BBU is faulty and the RRUs are in hot redundancy mode, the system
switches to the standby link.
 If the baseband processing unit carrying services is faulty, the system attempts
to reestablish the cell on another baseband processing unit.
 If the system does not work properly, the system attempts to identify the fault.

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
r tif
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
ng
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
 0. root alarms for cell unavailable
 26230 BBU CPRI Optical Module Fault H u

o n
26819 Data Configuration Exceeding Licensed Limit
 26264 System Clock Unlocked
t i
 26210 Board Blocked
c a
i Update Failure
29201 S1 Interface Faultif
 29202 S1 Interface Configuration
rt Fault


e
26200 Board Hardware
C Program Error
26203 Board Software
&Board Maintenance Link Failure

26205 BBU
26252gBoard Unrecognizable

in Board Type and Configuration Mismatch


n
i 26204 Board Not In Position
26251
ra

i T  26214 Board Powered Off
e  26253 Board Software Auto-Supply Failure
aw
 26254 Board Software Synchronization Failure
Hu
 26533 RF Unit Software Program Error
 26532 RF Unit Hardware Fault
 26525 RF Unit Temperature Unacceptable
 26235 RF Unit Maintenance Link Failure
 26538 RF Unit Clock Problem
 26524 RF Unit PA Overcurrent
 26545 RF Unit TX Channel Switched Off Through Command
 26529 RF Unit VSWR Threshold Crossed

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
ng
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
r tif
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
 The possible causes are as follows: Hu

n
A feeder is not securely connected to the antenna system.
tio
 A passive component in the antenna system or a feeder connector is
faulty.RRU 2 is faulty.
ic a
r tif
Ce
&
ng
i ni
r a
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
 The test results show that the VSWR value ofH
u
port 1 on RRU 2 is 2500, which indicate
n value of port 1 remains unchanged.

open circuit. After the antenna system is removed from and reconnected to port 1,
i o
and ports 0 & 1 are reconfigured, the VSWR
t by the faulty RF port of RRU 2.
a
Therefore, the problem may be caused
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
nin
a i
Tr
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
r tif
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
r tif
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
r tif
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
r tif
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
 Tips: Hu
n
For upload or upload & expansion operations, eNodeBs that have been loaded
tio

with commercial licenses and those have not can be treated in the same way.
c a
They can apply and download commissioning licenses in eRAN3.0 that do not
i
if
require bound ESN at the license sites to perform upload or upload &
r t
expansion. These operations do not impact services.
Ce
&
ng
i ni
r a
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
ng
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
rt if
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
r tif
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
H u obtained parameters after
DSP DHCPRSLT is used to query the automatically

n result of the remote maintenance

automatic establishment of the remote maintenance channel. The result of this
i o
command is the latest automatic establishment
t
a
channel.
f ic
rt i
C e
&
g
nin
a i
T r
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
r tif
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
r tif
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
r tif
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
r tif
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
r tif
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
r tif
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

n
it o
i c a
r t if
Ce
&
n g
ni
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu
n
atio
ic
r tif
Ce
&
ng
i ni
ra
T
ei
a w
H u

eNodeB LTE V100R013C10 Site Solution P-0
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
3900 series base stations include BTS3900,H
u
BTS3900L, BTS3900A, BTS3900AL,
DBS3900, and BTS3900C.
o n
t i
a
5900 series base stations include BTS5900, BTS5900L, BTS5900A, and DBS5900.
ic
r tifbase stations and their modules are as follows: (The
base stations in the figureseare 3900 series base stations.)
The application scenarios of the
C
Indoor macro base & stations: BTS3900/BTS5900 and BTS3900L/BTS5900L

i
Outdoor macro
ngbase stations: BTS3900A/BTS5900A and BTS3900AL
Outdoorin

a micro base station: BTS3900C
r base station: DBS3900/DBS5900
T
ei
Distributed
aw
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
The BBU3910A performs the following functions: Hu
n
ioLMT or U2000 to provide signal transmission,
Provides ports for connecting to the transmission equipment, RF modules, USB
t
a receive reference clock, and support BBU
devices, external reference clock, and
ic
tf
perform automatic software upgrade,
maintenance on the LMT or iU2000.
r
e station system. The management involves the processing of

C
Manages the entire base
&
uplink and downlink data, signaling processing, resource management, and operation
and maintenance.
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
aw
Hu

eNodeB LTE V100R013C10 Site Solution
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 New module introduced in eRAN13.1 Hu

o n
The BBU5900 has a different slot numbering with the BBU3900/BBU3910.
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The LMPT was delivered in the early phase H
u
of LTE deployment. Currently, the UMPT
n
is delivered by default on the live networks.
o

a ti
A UMPT performs the following functions:
f ic devices, monitors performance, and processes

ti
 Manages configurations and
r
signaling of a base station.

Ceand manages resources for other boards in the BBU.
Processes signaling
 & port, transmission ports, and a maintenance port, which are used
Provides a USB
n g software upgrade, signal transmission, and LMT- or U2000-based

i
for automatic
BBUnmaintenance.
a i a UMPT panel
T r
Ports on
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Huboard panel indicates its type.
A silkscreen on the lower left corner of a UBBP
UBBP specifications:
o n
i
Cell tBandwidth
Board
Number of
ic a Antenna Duplex
Cells
f
ti 10/15/20
(MHz) configuration Mode
UBBPd3 3
e r 2T2R FDD
UBBPd4 3
C 10/15/20 4T4R FDD&TDD
UBBPd5 &6 10/15/20 2T2R FDD
n g 6
i
UBBPd6 10/15/20 4T4R FDD&TDD
UBBPd9
a in 3 10/15/20 8T8R TDD
T r
UBBPe1 3 10/15/20 2T2R FDD
eiUBBPe2 3 10/15/20 4T4R FDD
a w
u
UBBPe3 6 10/15/20 2T2R FDD
H UBBPe4 6 10/15/20 4T4R FDD&TDD

UBBPei 12 10/15/20 4T4R FDD&TDD
UBBPem 2 5/10/15/20 64T64R TDD

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Ports on a UPEUa/UPEUb/UPEUc/UPEUd H
u
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
oni a UPEUe
Ports a

T r
ei
a w
Hu
 Indicators on the panel

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The RRU3281 is used as an example here. H
u
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The RRU3278 is used as an example here. H
u
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 New module in eRAN13.1 Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Ports on the AAU5972
o n
Interface
a ti Connector
Classification
Type
f ic
Silkscreen
Type
Quantity Description
iCPRI0,
rt CPRI1 DLC Used to connect
Ports on the
CPRI
Ce connector
2
to the BBU.
&
cabling Tool-less
g
cavity panel female Used to supply -
Power Input 1
i n connector 48 V power.
n
ai
(pressfit type)
Tr
Standard
AISG IN1,
ei
AISG 2 One female port
AISG IN2 and one male
connector
a w AISG AISG
port, both
u Standard located at the

OUT1,
H AISG 2 bottom of the
AISG antenna
Ports on the connector
OUT 2
bottom panel
Antenna
Calibration CAL 4.3-10 1
calibration port
Antenna port.
Used to connect
RF (1) To (8) 4.3-10 8
to an external
RRU.

Permission
n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Note: Hu

o n
The DCDU-12B provides 10 circuit breakers using 10 tool-less female
a ti
connectors. The cables can be made on site. The 6 big tool-less female
ic
tif (load6-load9) can use 2.5-4 mm power cables.
connectors (load0-load5) can use 2.5-10 mm2 power cables while the 4 small
r
tool-less female connectors 2
The DCDU-12B e

C can supply power to 1 BBU, 6 RRUs (no restrictions on RRU
&
type in ILC29 VD scenarios; in other scenarios, 3 RRU3278s and 3 RRUs of
g
other types), and 1 FAN or 4 BBUs and 1 FAN.
n intwo circuit switches are connected in parallel to supply power to one

i the following requirements must be met:
If the

r aDCDU,
i T
e
 Two circuit switches are used for power supply from the same power
aw
system.
Hu
 The specifications of two circuit switches must be the same, including
size and model.
 The specifications of the two lines of input power cables must be the
same, including length and diameter.
 The maximum length of a DCDU power cable is 10 m.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Note: Hu

o n
Providing a maximum power supply capacity of 100A/6000W
a ti to meet the power supply requirement of two

Providing 4 x 30A output current

RRUs and one BBU

i f ic
r t for output power to meet the power supply
e
Built-in surge protection

C
requirement in outdoor or distributed site scenarios
&
g
n in
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Note: Hu

o n
IMB03 only allows vertical installation on the wall, horizontal placement is not
allowed.
ati
ic
if
 Plug-in RRU is not supported.
rt
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Note: Hu

o n
APM30H Ver.E supports 1 BBU and 12 RRUs. It does not support built-in
batteries.
ati
ic
tif
 One APM30H Ver.D is configured with two PSUs by default. A maximum of
r
five PSUs can be configured. Each PSU can provide 3000 W power. One
e for 4 to 9 RRUs; two more PSUs and one PDU are
C
more PSU is required
&
required for 10 to 12 RRUs.
g
n in
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Note: Hu

o n
ILC29 Ver.D can support 8 BBUs and 6 RRUs.
a ti a DCDU-12B and fan subrack by default. If more

ILC29 Ver.D is delivered with

f ic more fan subrack is required.

ti
than 4 BBUs are used, one
r
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hupower supply interface:
Value range of the circuit breaker in the operator
Pmax./VminIo1.5Pmax./Vmin
o n
t i
adevice. For example, when -48V power supply is
 Where Pmax. is the actual power consumption of the device, and Vmin is the
ic
if uses -36V, the RRU3251 uses -34V, the
minimum operating voltage of the
used, the RRU3232/RRU3702
r t
C
RRU3253/3252/3256/3259 e uses -32V, and the BBU uses -38.4V. For the 220/240V
&
AC power supply, 176V is used; for the 110V AC power supply, 90V is used.
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Note Hu

o n
–48V DC power supply. If there is free installation space, use the ILC29
ati
cabinet to house the BBU and DCDU.
ic
if
 If the DCDU is installed in the ILC29 cabinet, the mounting ears must be
r t
reversely installed.
C e
The DCDU provides power to the RRU and BBU3900.

& can support up to six RRUs. The DCDU-12B can support up

The DCDU-03B
to nineg

i n RRUs. It changes to DCDU-12B after eRAN7.0.

a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Note Hu

o n
220V AC power supply, no space required for installation, BBU installed
a ti
indoors and RRUs outdoors: IMB03 + ETP48100-B1.
ic
tif remotely; the remote distance is determined by the
 The ETP48100-B1 already has surge protection means. RRU DC power
r
supply can be provided
e
C
RRU power consumption.

&
220V AC power supply when indoor room space is insufficient, BBU installed
indoorsgand RRUs outdoors, power-backup-not-required situation. The BBU
andin
i n ETP48100-B1 embedded are installed in the IMB03 box. The IMB03 is
Tramounted on the wall.

ei  The ETP48100-B1 can provide power for up to three RRUs. When the BBU
aw
has two UPEU boards, power supply can be provided to only two RRUs
Hu
because two of the four DC power supply ports are used for the BBU.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Note Hu

o n
The battery cabinet IBBS200 is optional and it should be configured when
a ti
backup power is required. The maximum capacity of the batteries is -48 V/184
Ah.
ic
f SLPU is installed in the 1U space on the top of the
r
The surge protection tiboard
e unit.

C
power distribution
&
APM30H Ver.E supports up to 2 BBUs and 21 RRUs. The power supply box

g
in PDU03D power distribution box is required for three additional
supports 6 RRUs by default. If the total number of RRUs is greater than 6, one
n
i Each PDU03D supports 3 x 30A power distribution. When the number
additional
r aRRUs.
i T of RRUs is greater than 15, the PDU01D and ODM can be used to provide
e
aw
power for the RRUs. Each PDU03D supports 1 x 100A power supply.
Hu
 The maximum weight of the APM30H plus IBBS200 in full configurations is
420 kg. If they are installed on the roof, the bearing capacity of the rooftop
must be considered.
 Other outdoor cabinets can be used. The APM30H can also be replaced by an
outdoor power cabinet of energy-based products. However, monitoring alarms
can only be reported to the BBU through the dry node.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Note Hu

o n
The OMB provides 10 x 30A breakers and supports 6 RRUs at most. A
ti
a
maximum of 6 DC power cables and 12 CPRI fibers are used.
ic
f is configured by default with the maximum output of
tiPSU
 The ETP48100 can provide up to 100A of current. Two 50A PSUs need to be
configured. One 50A
e r
2900 W.
C
&450 W.
If a BBU is embedded in the OMB, the BBU power consumption must be no

g
inlength of the AC input power cable should be less than 10 m.
more than
i
Then
a

Tr
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu supply site solution.
The figure is a typical indoor AC distributed power
n
io
If the centralized AC power supply is used, all the power cables for the BBU and RRU
t
a is used, the DCDU provides power to the BBU and
are routed out from the distribution box.
f ic
RRU in a unified manner. ti
If the centralized DC power supply
r
e that the RRUs are installed indoors. The typical

C
Indoor coverage indicates
&
configuration scheme is the same as the outdoor scenario (with no remote RRUs).
g
in
Value rangenof the circuit breaker in the operator power supply interface:
a i
T r
Pmax./VminIo1.5Pmax./Vmin
e i Pmax. is the actual power consumption of the device, and Vmin is the minimum
Where
awoperating voltage of the device.

Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Note: Hu

o n
DC power supply refers to the case of –48V DC power supply.
Indoor coverage scenario: By

a ti default, the individual devices use power

f ic of power is provided externally, the power should
ti In this case, the power supply scheme is the same as
separately. If only one route
r
be supplied centrally.
e scheme. The only difference is that the RRU installation
C
the outdoor coverage
&
locations are different, and the corresponding power supply and matching
g
solution are the same as the outdoor coverage scheme.
n in
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Note: Hu

o n
It is used in indoor coverage. The BBU uses –48V DC power supply. There is
a ti
sufficient installation space in the room.
ic
tifof nine RRUs.
 The DCDU-12B provides power to the BBU, and the DCDU-12B can provide
r
power to a maximum
e power directly from the power cabinet. The power cabinet
C
The BBU can obtain

&
should meet the protection requirements.
g
n in
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Note: Hu

o n
It is used in indoor coverage. The BBU uses –48V DC power supply. There is
a ti
insufficient installation space in the room.
ic
tifIMB03 is mounted on the wall.
 BBU and RRU indoor installation scenario: The BBU and DCDU are installed
r
in the IMB03, and the
The DCDU-12B e

C provides power to the BBU. The DCDU-12B can provide
&
power to a maximum of nine RRUs.
g
n provides power to the RRU and BBU.
i
The DCDU

a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Note: Hu

o n
It is used in indoor coverage. The BBU uses 220V AC power supply. The
a ti
IMB03 is mounted on the wall. The BBU and the ETP48100-B1 embedded
ic
if power to the BBU. It can also provide power to
power supply are both installed in the IMB03.
The ETP48100-B1 tprovides

r
e near the IMB03.
C
one RRU installed
&
The ETP48100-B1 can provide power for up to three RRUs. When the BBU

g
in two of the four DC power supply ports are used for the BBU.
has two UPEU boards, power supply can be provided to only two RRUs
i n
because
r a
T
The ETP48100-B1 has surge protection means. The DC power cables can

ei connect to remote RRUs, and the distance between them depends on the
aw
RRU power consumption.
Hu
 If the indoor wall cannot hold the IMB03 and the RRU. The IFS06 must be
delivered to house the IMB03 and RRU. One IFS06 can house a maximum of
six RRUs.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Note: Hu

o n
It is used in indoor coverage. The BBU is installed in the OMB and uses 220V
a ti
AC power supply. This solution is applicable to scenarios having dustproof
ic
underground garage.ifThere is no backup power.
requirements, such as the BBU installed in the weak-current wells and
The OMB Ver.Ae

rt

C provides one 12A air breaker to external devices. The
&
maximum power consumption must be less than 430 W (12A x 36 V).
g
Therefore, this solution is applicable only to RRUs with a power consumption
n inmore than 430 W.

of no
a i power consumption of the BBU must not be more than 250 W.

Tr The

ei  The length of EPS30-4815 AC input power cable must not exceed 10 meters.
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Application scenario: Hu

o n
Outdoor fast deployment, high-speed railway and highway coverage

a
Stations spacing greater than ti 200 m, independent power supply for RRUs
i f
Use of integrated cabinet ic when the area is limited and there is an overall
rt

e
appearance requirement
 Advantages: C
Integrated&
g
 power supply device saving area, convenient in handling split power
Mainnpower equipment is integrated, facilitating rapid establishment of stations
ni adapting to a variety of environments.

i
aIn-band power supply monitoring, saving a dynamic monitoring system and
and
T r
i

e supporting a variety of monitoring schemes
a w
u
 Station spacing: It is recommended that the spacing between two stations each
H served by two RRUs (bidirectional) be not greater than 1.1 km and the spacing
between two stations each served by one RRU (using an RF power splitter) be not
greater than 800 m.
 RRU partner: TP4860C mounted on the wall is called the RRU partner. There are two
types: DC and DC-type two. They both have built-in 40Ah lithium batteries.
 TP48200A: outdoor integrated power supply cabinet

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w

o n
Outdoor fast deployment, high-speed railway and highway coverage

ati
Stations spacing greater than 200m, independent power supply for RRUs
ic
if
 Enhanced outdoor cabinet applicable to high heat consumption and high-
rt
capacity scenarios
 Advantages:
C e
expansion&
Integrated power supply device saving area and providing sufficient space for

ng
Air iconditioner,

i n heat exchange, ventilation, a variety of temperature control,
ra
and large cooling capacity can adapt to a variety of environments.
i T  In-band power supply monitoring, saving a dynamic monitoring system and

e
w
supporting a variety of monitoring schemes
u a  Station spacing: It is recommended that the spacing between two stations each
H served by two RRUs (bidirectional) be not greater than 1.1 km and the spacing
between two stations each served by one RRU (using an RF power splitter) be not
greater than 800 m.
 RRU partner: TP4860C mounted on the wall is called the RRU partner. There are two
types: AC&DC and DC. They both have built-in 40Ah lithium batteries.
 TP48200A: outdoor integrated power supply cabinet
 Mini room name: APM70-D equipment storage cabinet
 ETP48200 name: APM70-D power supply unit

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w

o n
High-speed railway and highway coverage
Station spacing greater thanti200 m, independent power supply for RRUs
a

The sharing equipmentic

tif
 room is used for new site construction and the original
r
Ce in a new address and the equipment room size is small.
room space is insufficient.
A new site is installed
&
g
 Advantages:
i n main power equipment facilitates rapid establishment of stations

Integrated
n

a i adapts to a variety of environments.

and
T r In-band power monitoring, saving a dynamic environment monitoring system

ei and supporting a variety of monitoring schemes

a w
u
 Independent 4G system, clear interface
H  Station spacing: It is recommended that the spacing between stations each served by
two RRUs (bidirectional) be not greater than 1.1 km and the spacing between stations
each served by one RRU (using an RF power splitter) be not greater than 800 m.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w

o n
High-speed railway and highway coverage
Station spacing greater thanti200 m, independent power supply for RRUs
a

There is sufficient roomic

tif
 space, and follow-up equipment expansion is
r
Ce
supported.
 Advantages:
& centralized power system has a large capacity and supports
g
 The traditional
i n
multiple sites for site expansion.
i n
aIndependent backup power supply system, supporting co-siting of multiple
r stations (multi-standard, multi-base station)

T
ei In-band power monitoring, saving a dynamic environment monitoring system
w

u a and supporting a variety of monitoring schemes
H  Station spacing: It is recommended that the spacing between stations each served by
two RRUs (bidirectional) be not greater than 1.1 km and the spacing between stations
each served by one RRU (using an RF power splitter) be not greater than 800 m.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu in a standard 19" rack that can
BBU indoor applications: The BBU can be installed
n configure an ILC29 cabinet or INS12 rack.

also be provided by Huawei. When wall-mounted installation is adopted, configure the
o
BBU outdoor applications: The c a tican be installed in the APM30 or OMB.
IMB03. When floor installation is adopted,

i i L-shaped rack can be configured.

fAn
BBU

r t
RRU indoor floor installation:
C e
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Expansion plan description: Hu

o n
A new BBP is added for the TDD LTE site and it is placed in slot 2.
a
After expansion, the TDD LTE

ti site and FDD LTE site use co-main control and
f ic and TDD RRUs are recommended to use
ti
co-transmission. FDD RRUs
r
independent antennas.
A GPS clock caneprovide frequency synchronization for the FDD LTE site and

C
&
time synchronization for the TDD LTE site concurrently.
n g
i
It is recommended
 that the TDD RRUs and the FDD RRUs be cascaded only
i n the FDD RRUs are remotely deployed. In other scenarios, it is

when
T rarecommended that the TDD RRUs and the FDD RRUs not be cascaded.
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Massive MIMO is widely regarded as a key update Hu of multiple-antenna technology in
nsignificantly improving system capacity and 3D
the 4.5G era. It uses a large number of antenna arrays to perform 3D beamforming
o
ti
and multi-layer multi-user multiplexing,
a
ic
coverage.
i f
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Comparison between Massive MIMO and traditionalHu MIMO
Category Traditional MIMO
Beamwidth can beio
n Massive MIMO
Broadcast
a t adjusted Beamwidth can be adjusted on
Beamforming
fic
only on the horizontal plane. both the horizontal and vertical
r t i planes, improving vertical-plane
e
network coverage.
Uplink multiple- C
A maximum of 8 antennas can Up to 64 antennas can be used
antenna receive
&be used for uplink receive for uplink receive diversity.
diversity
n g diversity.
n i Up to 2 layers can share the Up to 8 layers can share the
i
Uplink multi-user
MIMO
r a same time-frequency resource. same time-frequency resource.
i T single- Traffic beamwidth can be

Downlink Traffic beamwidth can be
e
aw
user (SU) adjusted only on the horizontal adjusted on both the horizontal
beamforming plane. and vertical planes, enhancing
Hu
the beamforming accuracy.
Downlink multi-user Up to 4 layers can share the A maximum of 16 layers can
beamforming same time-frequency resource. share the same time-frequency
resource.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hotspot coverage: Massive MIMO can effectively Hu improve system capacity through
n pairing significantly improve the cell
spatial multiplexing. Up to 8 layers in the uplink for MU-MIMO pairing and up to 16
o
ti in hotspot areas.
layers in the downlink for MU beamforming
a
icMIMO enables the eNodeB to adjust the vertical
throughput and meet capacity demands
i f
rtto 35°, enhancing vertical coverage of broadcast beams.
 Tall-building coverage: Massive
broadcast beamwidth toeup
C can be covered by a single site.
&
In this way, more floors
g
Massive MIMO strengthens power, array, and diversity gains, and enables energy to
in

n
be more concentrated by implementing 3D beamforming on traffic beams. The gains
i
aUEs in tall-building scenarios.
r
effectively offset the propagation and penetration losses and improve link quality of
i T
indoor
e
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Slot order: Hu
BBU3910: Slot 3-2-1-0-4-5
o n
BBU3900: Slot 3-0-1-2-4-5
ati
ic
if
 To learn the backplane forwarding capability, see CPRI Sharing Feature Parameter
rt
e
Description.
C
&
i ng
n
rai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 1800 MHz S111 configurations Hu
 One UBBPe4
o n
 CPRI rate: 10 Gbit/s
ati
ic
if
 1800 MHz S222 configurations

e rt
Two UBBPe4 boards
CPRI rate: 10CGbit/s; common CPRI compression must be enabled.
2100 MHz S111&


g configurations
One
n inUBBPe4
i

r aRRU3971 boards combined

T Cascading is recommended for combined RRUs; CPRI rate: 10 Gbit/s

i
e2100 MHz S222 configurations

a w

Hu  Two UBBPe4 boards

 RRU3971 boards combined
 Cascading is recommended for combined RRUs; CPRI rate: 10 Gbit/s;
common CPRI compression must be enabled.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 1800 MHz S111 configurations Hu
 One UBBPe4
o n
 CPRI rate: 10 Gbit/s
ati
ic
if
 1800 MHz S222 configurations

e rt
Two UBBPe4 boards
CGbit/s; common CPRI compression must be enabled.
CPRI rate: 10
2300 MHz S111&


g configurations
One
n inUBBPe4
i

r aRRU3279
T

i CPRI rate: 10 Gbit/s

e2300 
a w
 MHz S222 configurations
Hu  Two UBBPe4 boards

 RRU3279
 CPRI rate: 10 Gbit/s; common CPRI compression must be enabled.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 No feeder is required for the 1800 MHz Active
u mode. Feeder connections in the
Honly
passive mode are mainly described here.
o n
t i
a angles, not through external RRUs.
 The AISG cable of the AAU cannot be connected. The reason is that the AAU5972 is
ic
tif
used to control the tuning of downtilt
r
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Specifications of voltage-boosting PDB Hu
on
Item Voltage-boosting PDB2.0
ti
a
Dimensions 19-inch, 1U, depth: 310
ic
tifpower distribution module
Input voltage -48V (-38.4V to -57V)
r
Cepower distribution modules
Output power of voltage-boosting -57V
Number of voltage-boosting 2 PCS
& capacity
g
Capacity of one module/total 3.6 kW/7.2 kW
Output currentnof voltage-boosting module
n i 4 x 30A (4 x EPC05)
a i
r
-48V output current 4 x 30A (4 x EPC04)
i T
Monitoring 1 dry contact, RS485
eSurge protection capability
aw Heat consumption
10KA/20KA
Hu
150W
Temperature range -40 to 55℃
 Maximum lengths of AAU power cables
RRU Power Consumption (W) 1~70m (Max Length) 71~100m (Max Length)
800 ~ 1050 3.3/4 mm2 cable 5.3/6 mm2 cable
1050 ~ 1200 5.3/6 mm2 cable 8.2/10 mm2 cable

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Supported cabinet types Hu
o n
ti
Power Supply Cabinet Maximum AAU Quantity
ic a 6 (one DCDU or two PDU03D modules are

if
220V AC APM30H Ver.D/Ver.E
t
required if more than three AAU are used)
e r 6 (one DCDU is required if more than three

–48V DC
C
TMC11H Ver.D/Ver.E
AAUs are used)
&rack+DCDU12B
Open
ng
–48V DC 3
n i
i
220V or -48V OMB Ver.C 3
220Va
r
T220V AC
or -48V IMB03/IMB05 3
ei OPM50M 2
a w
Hu  AAU power cable specifications when AAUs are remotely deployed
RRU Power Consumption (W) Distance: 0 to 70m Distance: 71 to 100m
800 to 1050 5.3/6 mm2 cables

1050 to 1200 5.3/6 mm2 cables 6/8.2 mm2 cables

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu blocks:
Outdoor green space station has four main building
n
io lighting, fire fighting, but also equipped with a
Room module: the equipment room, which is equipped with power supply,
t
a grounding design
temperature control, monitoring,
ic
tifare two types of tower, one is a single tube and the other
highly reliable surge protection
Tower module: There
is parallel to the e
r
C four corners of the tower. The top of the tower is installed with
&
an antenna support lightning rod. The bottom and bottom frame are connected
g
to each other.
n in frame: steel frame structure to support the upper tower. It is also

i
Bottom
r aconnected to the below base to ensure the stability of the tower.
i T Prefabricated foundation: composed of a number of reinforced concrete beams;

e

a w the specifications of each reinforced concrete are the same; the quantity to be
Hu delivered varies with the tower height.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 For the suburbs, urban surroundings, urban H
u
temporary coverage and "dust-free
n
construction" station, you can choose the single tubular tower with good appearance,
environmentally friendly, and easy toio
a t accept.
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 The tower support module uses a single tube. HItulooks beautiful, and you can mount
2G RF x 3 + 3G RF x 3 + 4G RRU x 3 + 0.6m MW.
o n
t i
acan be adjusted base on the total height of the site.
 Huawei single tubular tower uses a modular design. The height of each section is 6 m.
ic
tif of the steel frame are connected through the flange, the
The top height of the top section
 Tower section and the bottom
r
overall structural designeis simple, and it is easy to install. A single tower section can
C
&
be lifted, or 2 to 3 sections can be pre-installed on the ground first and then be
g
mechanically lifted. There are two types of tower height: 30 m and 35 m. The tower
n in 2G +3G, and the design wind speed is 28 m/s.

mounting meets
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Huand simple structure. It can be flexibly
This solution is characterized by small footprint
narea, roads, greenbelts, and so on. This

deployed in scenarios where site acquisition is difficult. For example, it can be
o
ti
deployed in places outside a residential
solution can be quickly deployeda
ic
and removed.
i f
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Solution Introduction Hu

o n
Using poles, 10 feet standard container/armored engine room to implement
rapid installation
ati
ic
if
 15 meters height of tower, mounted with two layers of antenna
r t
e
 Prefabricated basis, delivered with the green 4G site products
 Solution Highlights C
&
g
 Free of site survey or reduced amount of site survey, direct laying, low
i n
requirements for geological conditions
n
i station area is small, and it is easy to find a site location.
aThe
r Rapid deployment

i T 
e
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hucan be used to quickly and
In high-wind-pressure scenarios, parallel towers
n
temporarily deploy a wireless coverage solution for operators. The tower height can
o
be 30 m.
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 High reliability: Traditional flange connections
u used to connect tower sections.
Hare
The technology is mature and reliable.
o n
t i angles of the steel structure. It has a modular
a The construction is safe and fast.
 High security: The tower body has four
ic
tifthe same structure with traditional towers with better
design and assembled by the bolts.

r
High-loading capacity: It has
e deflection angle is less than 1 degree. Such
C
carrying capacity. The tower
&
characteristics meet most requirements in rural and suburb areas.
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu power and the DCDU is 5 m. The
The recommended distance between the AC/DC
maximum distance must not exceed 10 m.
o n
t i 2
a
 The OCB supports power cable conversion. It supports 3.3 or 4 mm input and 8.2, 10,
or 16 mm output for DC powerccables.
i
tif
2
r
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 When the AC RRU installed remotely for an H
u
outdoor site, you must configure the SPD
n
2 2
AC protection unit. The SPD input cable should be 3.3 mm or 4 mm input cable,
which is considered according to theio
t
2
SPD60 protection reliability (1.5 mm does not
match the protection of SPD60). a
i.c
It is required that the power cable for remote outdoor
i f
rt to be installed on the top of tower.
RRU not be less than 3.3 mm 2

C e
AC RRU is not recommended
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Note: Hu

o n
The recommended power cable distance between the cabinet and DCDU is 5
a ti
m. The maximum distance must not exceed 10 m.
ic
tif
 If the RRU3232 is to be deployed in a distance longer than 170 m, contact
r
Huawei R&D to resolve.
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu
RRU3232 is used as an example in this course.
o n
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Note: Hu

o n
Configure the EPS30-4815 or OMB501 based on the installation environment
ati
when the BBU3900 is powered by AC power supply.
ic
if
 The power cables are included in the OMB501 when the OMB501 is
configured with the tBBU3900.
r
Configure AC oreDC modules for RRUs based on the power supply type.

C
&
g
n in
a i
Tr
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 In the LTE system, the BBU and RRUs exchange Hu data through CPRI ports. Optical
n
modules and fibers must be configured. Connection modes are classified into the
direct connection, pigtail connection,io
The optical modules connectedcto a t and cascading.
fi rate, and transmission distance). (If the optical

 two ends of the fiber must have the same
t i
r ends of the fiber are provided by Huawei, their BOM codes
specifications (wavelength, data
e
must be the same.) C
modules connected to two
&
g
Although multi-mode optical modules with the data rate of 6 Gbit/s support a
in

n
maximum transmission distance of 100 m, the maximum length of an RRU power
a i
r
cable is 100 m. If RRU power cables longer than 100 m are required, contact R&D
i T
personnel.
eWhen the distance between the BBU and RRUs is longer than the maximum allowed
aw

Hu
distance, RRUs must be powered by a nearby power supply.

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Note: The cable connection diagram in Figure 2H
u
is applicable to the scenario where
n
RRUs are used for indoor coverage. Figure 1 and Figure 2 correspond to typical
o
ti
scenarios 2 and 3 in the preceding slide.
a
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
aw
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 Hu and provides two eXchange
The UBBPei board is installed in the BBU subrack
n
Convergence Interfaces (XCIs) to connect to the RMU3900A.
o
t i as RMU) is deployed on the RRU or AAU to
adata. Each RMU provides two XCI ports connecting
 The RMU3900A (hereinafter referred to
ic
tif connecting to the RRUs or AAUs.
aggregate and deaggregate CPRI
r
to the BBU and 12 CPRI ports

C e and UBBPei must use QSFP optical modules. These
The XCI ports on the RMU
&
optical modules support a rate of 4x9.8 Gbit/s (equal to aggregation of four 9.8 Gbit/s
g
CPRI links) or 4x10.1 Gbit/s (equal to aggregation of four 10.1 Gbit/s CPRI links).
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
ing
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 It is recommended that CPRI MUX be enabled Hufor the RMU to reduce costs of optical
n
modules and fiber optic cables. For details about baseband processing boards
o
supporting CPRI MUX.
a ti
i f ic
e rt
C
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 BOQ: Bill of Quantity Hu
 Conclusions:
o n

a ti
Green cell (3RRU+1BBU (Distributed site)): 80A*1 -> 63A*1 -> 100A*1
i
Yellow cell (3RRU+1BBU
f ic (Macro site)): 80A*1 -> 63A*2 -> 100A*1
rt (Distributed site)): 80A*2 -> 63A*2 -> 100A*2

C e
Blue cell (6RRU+1BBU
Orange cell (6RRU+1BBU (Macro site)): 80A*2 -> 100A*2
&

g
Red cell (3RRU+2BBU, 4BBU): 80A*2 -> 63A*2 -> 100A*1
n in cell (3BBU): 80A*1 -> 63A*1 -> 100A*1

Purple
i

r a
i T
e
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
 BBUnT represents the UPEU configured in the Huupper slot of the BBU, and BBUnB
n
represents the UPEU configured in the lower slot of the BBU.
o
t i
anot support UPEUd.
 The blue font indicates the default configuration of the delivered materials.
ic
tif
 DCDU-03B Load6 to Load8 does
r
Ce
&
g
n in
a i
T r
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

n
it o
ic a
if
rt
Ce
&
i ng
a in
Tr
ei
a w
Hu
o n
ati
ic
rt if
Ce
&
i ng
n
r ai
T
ei
a w
Hu

Recommendations
 Huawei Learning Website
 http://learning.huawei.com/en
 Huawei e-Learning
 http://support.huawei.com/learning/NavigationAction!createNavi?navId=MW
n
000001_term1000025144&lang=en it o
i c a
 Huawei Certification if
r t
Ce
http://support.huawei.com/learning/NavigationAction!createNavi?navId=_31
&

&lang=en g
n in
 Find Training
rai
i T

e
http://support.huawei.com/learning/NavigationAction!createNavi?navId=_trai
a w
ningsearch&lang=en
Hu
More Information n
it o
ic a
t i f
 Huawei learning APP e r
C
&
i ng
a in
T r
ei
a w
Hu
版权所有© 2018 华为技术有限公司

HCIA-LTE Training Material V1.0 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

HCIA-LTE Training Material V1.0 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Recommendations

 Huawei Learning Website

版权所有© 2018 华为技术有限公司

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

o n and roaming saw these replaced with “Second

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

i T  GSM Phase 2+ (Release 96).

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

t io from their operator. This concept is

ng user throughput, which really create borderless networks.

a in core of FusionNet is based on LTE-B techniques (such as multi-flow

H OPEX, allowing users to enjoy ultra-broadband, zero-waiting and ubiquitous

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

tiremoved from the core network. Voice services are

a in management, authentication, key management, encryption, and integrity

ei  A serving gateway (SGW) provides functions such as paging, information

a w management for a UE in idle state, mobility management, encryption on

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

o n include the HSS, PCRF and ePDG. The

HSS (Home Subscriber Server)cisaconsidered to be a “master” database. Although

i i the HSS in practice is made up of several physical

a i of the associated charging vectors.

a w de-capsulating IPSec and PMIP tunnels.

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

o n Dynamic allocation of resources to UEs in

g and transmission of paging messages (originated from the MME);

T r Measurement and measurement reporting configuration for mobility and

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

i T SGSN selection for handovers to 2G or 3G 3GPP access networks;

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

t io subcarriers appeared. However, mass

commercial application did notic

tif of digital communication technologies, IFFT on the

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

o n is simple and direct while the spectral

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

in good performance for another

average SINR in the C e

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

i f icsub-channels is generated, deteriorating the BER of

t to the frequency offset is the primary disadvantage of

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

Confidential Information of Huawei. No Spreading Without Permission

i Tlarge as that of an FDMA system.